Imm 480 Haitian

MA4800Ⅲ/h
INJECTION MOULDING MACHINE
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
HAITIAN PLASTICS MACHINERY GROUP

CO. LTD.
MA4800Ⅲ/h INJECTION MOULDING MACHINE
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Serial number: MA4800Ⅲ/h -SMS

Edition: A
DESIGNED CHECKED APPROVAL

SIGNATURE Baohua Yang Chuang Wang Jun Wu
DATE 2020-09-18 2020-09-18 2020-09-18
HAITIAN PLASTICS MACHINERY GROUP

CO. LTD.
Forward
Customer Service- Telephone Number
Classification Tel and Fax
Tel：+86-574-86177242/86182601
Switchboard
Fax：+86-574-86221864
Service Tel：+86-574-86181801
Hotline Fax：+86-574-86182662
Customer Tel：+86-574-86182616
Complaint Fax：+86-574-86182662
We take customers' demands seriously. If you have any question for

Haitian, please contact us immediately.
E-mail：inter-sales@mail.haitian.com
Internet URL：http://www.haitian.com
1
Forward
FOREWORD
General notes on the operating manual
Prerequisite for perfect machine operation is knowledge of how the individual units
function, the handling and maintenance of the machine.
In this respect this operating manual is a useful aid. It informs your on the correct
usage of your HT injection molding machine and belongs therefore, in the hands of
every responsible machine-setters.
Before putting your machine into operation, please study this operating manual
thoroughly.
Pay particular attention to any text preceded by the symbol. This also contains
advice with regard to your safety.
Note: --pay special attention
Attention: --safety information
Machines in series of MA are in accordance with the standard available for

“Q/NHT J062-2016 link hydraulic plastic injection molding machine”.
The machine must be applied in the environment of elevation no more than 1000
meters.
The clamping force and noise level must be abided by the parameters in the
following table. Necessary protective measure must be taken as the noise will
exceed over 70dB (A).
Mold clamping force/kN ≤4500 ＞4500-16000 ＞16000-25000 ＞25000
Noise level/dB(A) ≤82 ≤83 ≤84 ≤85
2
Forward
Haitian is only responsible for interaction between plastics injection molding
machine and auxiliary equipments. If customers remove any auxiliary equipment,
relative safety devices must be remounted. Moreover, customer shall have
responsibility for changing it.
Customer can only use designated parts by Haitian, especially nozzle,

plasticizing assembly, heating bands, and fastener.
Places labeled with marks can only be allowed to enter.
The height of safety device and of safety distance is calculated as per specified
working position (machine installation ground or appointed working platform) as
for reference. Relevant safety device height and safety distance must be
recalculated (consult in GB 23821) or relevant safety devices must be considered
for adding, if the customer needs to increase assistant working platform or
changing machine installation foundation in machine using process. Haitian won’t
take any responsibility if any customer arbitrarily changes appointed working
place on the machine.
The description and diagrams given in the operating manual are in line with the
production range. We stress that this is subject to alteration according to special
requests or further technical developments.
Reprinting and duplication, including extracts, requires ours authorization. The

handing of this manual to a third party is not permitted.
3
Table of contents -Manual 1
MANUAL1
Chapter 1 Installation and Alignment……………………………………1-1
1.1 Cable suspension diagram ............................................................1-1
1.1.1 Mini- type machine lifting ..............................................................1-1
1.1.2 Middle type machine lifting .................................................... 1-1
1.1.3 Unloading .............................................................................. 1-3
1.1.4 Aids for machine transportation ............................................. 1-4
1.1.5 Removal of protective............................................................ 1-4
1.2 Environment Requirements for Installation ........................... 1-4
1.3 Machine dimensions & Foundation plan ............................... 1-5
1.4 Installation and Alignment ..................................................... 1-5
1.4.1 Installation ........................................................................... 1-5
1.4.2 Alignment .............................................................................. 1-6
1.5 Water cooling system ............................................................ 1-10
1.5.1 Water cooling system layout ................................................. 1-10
1.5.2 Discharge of cooling water .................................................... 1-11
1.5.3 Flow rate of cooling water ..................................................... 1-11
1.6 Filling with Hydraulic Oil ........................................................ 1-12
1.7 Power supply......................................................................... 1-12
1.7.1 Check rotating direction of pump motor ............................... 1-13
1.8 Adjustable mounts................................................................. 1-14
Chapter 2 Safety……… ……………………………………………………..2-1

2.1 General safety regulations ..........................................................2-1
2.1.1 Machine main safety scutcheon ............................................ 2-2
2.1.2 Maintenance & repair work ................................................... 2-9
2.1.3 Toxic fumes ........................................................................... 2-9
2.1.4 Explosive decomposition ....................................................... 2-10
2.1.5 Prevent accidents caused by exceeding charge ................... 2-10
2.2 Safety equipment .................................................................. 2-10
2.2.1 General equipment ................................................................ 2-10
2.2.2 Safety equipment .................................................................. 2-11
2.2.3 Moveable guarding in the mould area ................................... 2-11
2.2.4 Nozzle guarding .................................................................... 2-14
2.2.5 Fixed guarding ...................................................................... 2-14
2.2.6 Other dangers when the nozzle guarding is open ................. 2-15
2.3 Hydraulic safety equipment .................................................. 2-15
2.4 Electrical safety equipment ................................................... 2-15
2.5 Checking the safety equipment ............................................. 2-16
1
Chapter3 Putting into operation ..................................................... 3-1
3.1 Preparatory work ................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Correct clothing ..................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Necessary jobs before testing the new machine ................... 3-1
3.2 Testing and adjusting the new machine ................................ 3-1
3.2.1 Power on ............................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2 Start running electric motor ................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 Start heating system ............................................................. 3-2
3.2.4 To operate the machine manually ......................................... 3-2
3.2.5 Semi-automatic & full automatic operation of the machine ... 3-2
3.3 Procedures of mound installation .......................................... 3-3
3.3.1 Preparation .......................................................................... 3-3
3.3.2 Procedures of mound installation .......................................... 3-4
3.4 Procedure of the plastic injection .......................................... 3-6
3.4.1 Notes before the plastic injection .......................................... 3-6
3.4.2 Temperature of the hydraulic oil ............................................ 3-6
3.4.3 Procedure of the plastic injection .......................................... 3-7
3.5 To stop the plastic injection ................................................... 3-8
3.5.1 To stop injection before completion of molding or before
a temporary termination………… .......................................... 3-8
3.5.2 To stop injection at finishing of material or completion of
workpieces or at necessity to turn off the power ..................... 3-8
3.6 To remove the mould............................................................. 3-9
3.7 To remove the screw and the heating barrel ........................... 3-9
3.7.1 Before removal........................................................................ 3-10
3.7.2 Preparations for removing the screw ...................................... 3-10
3.7.3 Disassemble screw and barrel………………………………….. 3-12
3.7.4 Removing the screw tip ........................................................... 3-17
3.7.5 Removing the heating barrel ................................................... 3-18
3.7.6 Removing heating barrel—method 2 ...................................... 3-19
3.8 To discharge air from the proportional valve ............................ 3-19
Chapter4 Maintenance ......................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Maintenance plan .................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Lubrication and Hydraulic oil ................................................. 4-2
4.3 Lubrication and maintenance ................................................ 4-3
4.3.1 Composition and characteristic of lubrication system............ 4-3
4.3.2 Requirements of lubrication oil …………………………….. 4-3
4.3.3 Principle of lubrication .......................................................... 4-3
4.3.4 Maintenance of lubrication system ........................................ 4-4
2
4.4 Routine check ....................................................................... 4-8
4.5 Heat exchanger(oil cooler) .................................................... 4-9
4.5.1 Construction of cooler ........................................................... 4-9
4.5.2 Put into operation .................................................................. 4-10
4.5.3 Check-up、maintenance、clean of cooler ............................ 4-10
4.5.4 Cooler decompose and assemble ......................................... 4-11
4.5.5 Sealing performance test ...................................................... 4-12
4.5.6 Fault and elimination ............................................................. 4-13
4.6 Filter ...................................................................................... 4-13
4.6.1 Dismantle ............................................................................ 4-13
4.6.2 Cleaning .............................................................................. 4-14
4.6.3 Installation ............................................................................. 4-14
4.6.4 Note ...................................................................................... 4-14
4.6.5 Change hydraulic oil.............................................................. 4-14
4.7 Air filter .................................................................................. 4-15
4.8 Check hose circuit ................................................................. 4-15
4.9 Cleaning and checking of screw and heating barrel .............. 4-16
4.9.1 Cleaning and checking screw ............................................... 4-16
4.9.2 Cleaning and check the heating cylinder ............................... 4-17
4.9.3 Screw and heating barrel installation .................................... 4-18
4.10 Moving platen sliding foot adjustment ................................... 4-20
4.11 Temperature setting chart of plastic and barrel ..................... 4-24
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
3
MANUAL2
Chapter5 Technical Parameters & Machine Outline ................. 5-1
Chapter6 Mechanism ......................................................................... 6-1
Chapter7 Hydraulic............................................................................. 7-1
Chapter8 Electric Unit ........................................................................ 8-1
Chapter9 Controller operation ......................................................... 9-1
4
Chapter 1 Installation and Alignment
Chapter1 Installation and Alignment
1. 1Cable suspension diagram
Note: Moving platen should located in such position that the mold height is down to its
min before lifting.
1.1.1 Mini-type machine lifting(whole frame)
1.1.2 Middle-type machine lifting(combined frame)

Middle-type machine are designed as combined frame and unable to lifting the whole
frame. Disconnect the frame into injection unit and clamping unit and lifting them
individual. Procedure of disconnecting and lifting can be found in next pages description.
Frame of middle-type machine connecting indication
1-1
Note:
Please refer the settings of auxiliary equipment required for
machine delivery to chapter 1.1.4.
1.1.2.1 Procedure of disconnecting and connecting the machine frame.
1) Disconnect
(1) Dismantle the carriage cylinder base and disconnect it for fixed platen.
(2) Unscrew the locking bolt on top cover, dismantle top cover smoothly.
(3) Unscrew the locking bolt on side cover, dismantle side cover smoothly.
(4) Release the locking nut in frame of injection unit from the top down.
(5) Remove cylinder locating pin.
(6) Tighten the cable loop as be found in chapter 1.1.2.3. And drug it level to
apart from the clamping unit.
2) Connect
(1) Place the adjustable mounts near the foundation bolt hole on eligible
foundation.
(2) Positioning the clamping unit first according to indication of suspension
diagram in chapter 1.1.2.2 and 1.1.2.3. Then suspect the injection unit to
corresponding position and smoothly placed. Pay attention to the position of
link bolt and corresponding hole. Move the bolt to enter the hole, then install
spring washer and locking nut, after locking elementary, install the cylinder
pin.
(3) Tighten the locking nut after level adjustment.
(4) Install the top cover and side cover.
1.1.2.2 Middle-type machine suspension—clamping unit
1-2
1.1.2.3 Middle-type machine suspension—injection unit
1.1.3 Unloading
When the injection molding machine had been delivered remove all packing. Check
weather the machine is undamaged and in good condition.
Written acknowledgement of any damage in transit must be made by the carrier, and the
1-3
manufacturer must be notified immediately so that a claim be made on the transport
insurance.
A crane with sufficient lifting power is request for off-loading. Machine weights (see
chap5.1)
To protect the machine the cables under tension should not be attached to the weaker
parts of the machine.
The machine should be moved according to the information given in the cable
suspension diagram (chap1.1) and using the aids shown in chap 1.1.4
Should the machine need to be moved again in the factory and no crane is available,
transport should be carried out with the aids of rollers.
Note:
Point 1: cranes and carriers of sufficient power capability should be used (including
the cranes, lifting equipment, hook, and steel cable etc.)
Point 2: In case that any hoisting steel cable has direct contact with spare parts of
machine, we should place layers of rags between the steel cable and spare parts so as
to avoid any damage of machine’s spare parts, for example, pulling shaft of plastic
injection machine etc.
Point 3: Pay attention to the stability and level status of the machine during being
lifted up.
Point 4: Until the unloading and moving are completely done, the wood and other
layers or cushions underneath the machine can be removed.
Note:
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility for any damage which occurs in transit.
1.1.4 Aids for machine transportation
Name Quantity Remark
Cable and Hooks 2
Protection for the clamping unit
1 Delivered with machine
transit
Protection for Injection unit transit 1 Delivered with machine
Rolling Timber or Roller For
At least 3
Moving the Machine on the Length near the width of frame
PCS
Ground
Woods, rags Some
1.1.5 Removal of protective

All exposed machine parts such as piston rods, tie bar, and platen areas are treated with
an anti-corrosive agent prior to delivery of the machine. This creates a fine protective film
which can combine with the lubricants on the bearing surfaces and with the hydraulic oil
without any problem.
Attention:
Please don’t remove any antirust on the part that has direct contact
1-4
with machine operating system.
This provides basic protection against rusting and hostile
environment for machines.
Except in case of necessity, wipe off the antirust with cloth during
operation.
Attention:
DO NOT use chemical solvent to wipe off the antirust。
1.2 Environment Requirements for Installation

During the installation of this machine, please do confirm whether environment
requirements listed in this section have been met fully or not. If the requirements are not
met, the machine will not be able to exert its complete performance and will even
possibly engender wrong operations, which might cause damage and lead to decrease
the operation life of the machine.
 Temperature: 0~40 ℃ (Environment temperature during the machine’s
operation)
 Humidity: 75% below (comparative humidity), no dewfalls.
 Altitude: below 1000 meters.
Attention!
When the humidity is too high, it will affect the insulation or speed
up the aging of the spare parts. Although no special measures to
decrease humidity is suggested, it is still preferable not to place
the machine in a humid place.
Don’t install the machine in places that has much dust, organic
gas, or erosive air. Try to place the machine faraway from the
places that might have electric interference or machines that has
magnetic field (for example, welding machine etc)
1.3 Machine outline and foundation plan

Refer to machine outline & foundation plan (chap5) during the installation.
1.4 Installation and Alignment

1.4.1 Installation
Proof of sufficient load bearing capacity can only be given by an expert (structure
engineer)
In case that machine is installed on the reinforced concrete ground, there is no additional
preparation for groundwork needed before installation.
In case that machine is installed on common workshop ground, then groundwork is
needed prior to installation.
The maximum surface pressure that the machine has on its support concrete
1-5
groundwork can be calculated through machine’s weight and adjustable mounts number
and area.
Foundation bolts should be used in fixing the machine (large or middle type machine)
to the ground surface or groundwork.
Note:
Plastic Injection Machine can be placed on soft adjustable
anti-vibration mounts which means a lot of work in preparing
the groundwork need not apply.
How to use adjustable mounts should be found in chapter1.8 (adjustable
mounts are offered as additional equipment.)
You should keep in mind that adjustable mounts lessen the contact area between
machine and the ground, which reduces accordingly the pressure that machine has on
the ground. You must make sure that the ground has enough capacity to bear the
remaining load.
Note:
After the machine is being fixed at the assigned place, all the
delivery protection materials must be taken away. These
protection and safety materials should be kept in good
conditions so that they can be used again if necessary in the
future.
The constituent parts such as hopper, which has been
disassembled from the machine during the delivery, should be
put back on the machine.
1.4.2 Alignment
1.4.2.1 Alignment items
The machine is completely aligned prior to delivery. This applies specifically to
1) Parallelism of mold platens
Generally, the measures descried below are sufficient to align the machine bed. If
tolerance exceeds maximum permissible levels, please inform the manufacturer.
Tolerance of platen parallelism:
Space between tie bar Tolerance when Tolerance when
available clamping force is zero clamping force is max
200--250 0.20 0.10
250--400 0.24 0.12
400--630 0.32 0.16
630--1000 0.40 0.20
1000--1600 0.48 0.24
1600--2500 0.64 0.32
2) Nozzle centering
Axiality between nozzle and mould orientation hole can be adjusted as follow plan. It
should reach the follow claim about axiality after centering.
1-6
Mold orientation hole diameter Ф80~100 Ф125~250 aboveФ315

Axiality ≤0.25 ≤0.30 ≤0.40
Adjusting plan:
(1)Adjusting landscape and vertical level of Fixed platen
machine body which between the two mold
platens.
h4
Φ
(2) Unscrew the fasten screw and locking Nozzle
h1
h 1 h3
screw (see chapter3.3.2 diagram1,2)
(3)As right diagram indication, measure h1, h2,
h2
h3, h4 by vemier caliper with 0.05mm
accuracy. Adjusting it to make h1=h3, h2=h4. Orientation hole
Tolerance of adjusting must accord with the
Diagram (1)
request of the above chart. Meanwhile,
adjusting it to makeδ1=δ3, δ2=δ4 (see diagram (2)). Finally, by using level meter
to check about the levelness of screw guide bar, it is suggested that the parameter
shall be around 0.5mm/m (see diagram (3)). After
adjustment, the fastening bolts and lock nuts shall be
screwed down.
3) Adjusting landscape and vertical level of machine body

which between the two mold platens.
The detail adjustment of landscape and vertical level of
large and middle type machine body can be found in
chapter 1.4.2.2.
1-7
1.4.2.2 Machine alignment

The moving platen have a high weight and high moving inertia, so it is essential to
adjust the machine body’s guide carefully to ensure the smoothness when it moves on
the guide.
1.4.2.2.1 Aligning the guide level of mini-type machine.
1) Ensure the distance between the fixed platen and moving platen is minimum, install
adjustable mounts, generally about 6 or 12 pieces, in accordance with installation
hole.
2) Place a level meter (m) in landscape direction on the machine track between the
mold platens as illustrated above (close to the movable platen as much as
possible).
3) Initial aligning: adjusting adjustable mounts to make the air bubble in the middle of
level meter. This is for four sides. (The adjustment method of adjustable mounts can
be found in chapter1.8.)
4) Fine aligning: repeat the step 3) for several times until the landscape level around
0.5mm/m and vertical level around 0.5mm/m.
5) Level alignment in accordance with requirements on the machine can be only
confirmed by using below 7Mpa working pressure to start mould height adjusting
motor smoothly and below 3Mpa working pressure to operate carriage cylinder
steadily.
1.4.2.2.2 Aligning the guide level of large and middle type machine.
1-8
1) Before installation, clean the foundation surface, place adjustable mounts as chapter
5 foundation plan. Lifting the units leaving the surface about 500mm, mounting
foundation bolt, flat washer, spring washer, and nut from the bottom up. Screw nut to
enable bolt end plane above 3 pitches to the up plane of nut.
2) Place the machine on mounts. Pay attention to align the foundation bolt with the
reserved mounting hole. Connect the injection unit and clamping unit together as
chapter1.1.2.1 indication, and then carry out initial level adjustment as per adjusting
procedure 3.
3) After level is confirmed by level meter, pour concrete into the prepared mounting
hole and fasten foundation bolt.
4) After a period of maintenance and ensure the cement set hard (about 10 days in
summer and about 15 days in winter), fine adjusting level of machine body shall be
carried out. Fasten the foundation bolt to fix machine by means of tooling bar after
measurement by level meter.
Length of tooling bar
Bolt model Length of tooling bar
M16 550
M18 600
M20 700
M24 850
Base box
Minimum distance Fixed platen
Moving platen
Adjustable platen
Injection base box
Quench guide
Adjustable mounts
Level meter
Middle and large type machine foundation plan
Adjusting procedure
1)Ensure the distance between the fixed platen and moving platen minimum.
2)Place the level meter on quench guide of the machine operating side. Level meter
placed as near as the moving platen between the fixed and moving platen as diagram
1-9
indication.
3) Initial aligning: adjusting adjustable mounts to make the air bladder in the middle of
level meter. This is for four sides. (Adjustment of adjustable mounts can be found in
chapter1.8)
4) Fine aligning: repeat the step 3) for several times until the horizontal level around
0.5mm/m and vertical level around 0.5mm/m.
5) Aligning machine frame beneath the injection unit based upon the center of nozzle
and fixed platen, tolerance must accord with the request of chapter1.4.2.1.
6) Level alignment in accordance with requirements on the machine can be only
confirmed by using below 7Mpa working pressure to start mould height adjusting
motor smoothly and below 3Mpa working pressure to operate carriage cylinder
steadily.
Attention!
Only after the cement consolidates, nut of concrete bolts can
be fastened.
After the adjustment, all the nuts on the adjustable mounts
must be fastened.
In order to prevent any damage due to the groundwork, it is
recommended to check the plane situation after 4 weeks of
operation.
1.5 Cooling Water Supply System

The cooling water system pressure is 0.2～0.6 Mpa, and water temperature≤28℃.
1.5.1 Cooling water system layout
There are three water circuits in cooling system: 1) Hydraulic cooling circuit
2) Screw and barrel cooling circuit. 3) Mould cooling circuit. The system supplies
water to heater exchanger and cooling water manifold. Mould, screw and barrel cooling
water have be given by the distributaries of water manifold, and thus to make efficient
temperature control.
1-10
Illustration
IN OUT
Oil Cooler
INMold/Injection OUT
base
TO Other Cooling Systems
OUT
Cooling Water Supply
Flow Meter
(Can be supplied on demand)
OUT
IN Oil Cooler
IN
1.5.2 Discharge of Cooling Water

Stop supplying the cooling water and discharge the cooling water through the oil
cooler after finished injection.
In winters, specially based on the weather conditions, the cooling water should kept
its circling under comparative low pressure during machine’s shut-down. (At night, in
case that cooling water might be frozen, cooling water in the oil cooler should be
discharged. The remaining water should be dried up by using compressed air in order to
prevent damages of oil cooler and other equipment.)
Note:
It is very important that all water to cool machine must be
cleaned.
If the cooling water is underground water or pond water unfiltered, the
impurities might cause to block the filtering parts and pipe in the
machine and affect the cooling efficiency of coolers. In that case we
strongly recommend filter the cooling water before their use.
Attention!
If the cooling water is taken from drinking water system, operators
should ensure that no cooling water will be returned into the drinking
water system.
1.5.3 Flow Rate of Cooling Water

Changing the flow rate of cooling water according to many factors such as the
injection conditions, water temperature, air temperature, the fact whether impurities is
1-11
causing the oil cooler’s efficiency and etc. The flow rates in the following chart can be
only used as reference not as requirement.
Most appropriate flow rates are decided through actual plastic injection molding
experiences.
The Flow Rate of Cooling Water in Cooler
Pump Driving Flow Rate Pump Driving Flow Rate
motor Power motor Power
7.5KW 13 L/min 55KW 94.5L/min
11KW 19 L/min 75KW 129 L/min
18.5KW 32 L/min 110KW 190 L/min
30KW 51.5 L/min 155KW 269 L/min
37KW 63.5 L/min 220KW 383 L/min
45KW 77.5 L/min 330KW 576 L/min
Note: The temperature of hydraulic oil must not exceed 55°C when putting
into use.
The Cooling Water Flow Rate in mould/water manifold (based on molding
conditions)
Heater Power Cooling Water Flow Heater Power Cooling Water Flow
Rate Rate
6KW 10.5L/M or more 40KW 69.0L/M or more
15KW 26.0L/M or more 90KW 155L/M or more
35KW 60.0L/M or more
Attention!
Inpouring of cooling water provides cooling function.
Design of cooling equipment and pipe are based on that
cooling water reaches 50℃.
If you need to undertake heating operations to insulation soft pipe and
molds, please contact our sales department.
1.6 Filling with Hydraulic Oil

Through filling intake, pour in clean hydraulic oil until it reaches the up limit in the
hydraulic meter (please refer to the Lubricant Chart Chapter 4.2 for the hydraulic oil type).
After the completion of wiring, start the machine and check the oil position in the oil tank.
1-12
If the oil reading is lower than the medium marking in the level indicator, add some
hydraulic oil until the oil is higher than the medium marking .in general, it need to
reaches 3/4 –4/5capacity of oil tank.
Please refer to Parameter sheet in Chapter 5 about oil tank volume for hydraulic oil
supply amount. The real supply amount can larger than listed.
Attention!
Different brands or types of hydraulic oil must not be mixed.
Within 3 hours after adding hydraulic oil, the oil pump cannot be
started, which is to facilitate exhausting air inside the oil.
1.7 Power Supply

Electrical equipment on the machine is designed in accordance with customer’s
requirements and in line with regulations laid down in the relevant countries.
Electrical wiring can be done by consulting local electrical engineering company.
In case of using 3-phase A/C power supply, a fuse with appropriate rating is needed.
On the input connection panel connecting the electrical cable and electrical parts,
the power supply is in 3-phase and 4-line. The voltage is 380V and frequency is 50Hz
(except special condition). Please refer to the Parameter Chart in Chapter 5 for total
power of machine. Other special voltage requests should inform the manufacturer in the
order.
: Attention:
Connection of power supply should only undertake by an experienced
electrician
Note:
Please pay special attention to the fuse’s amperes and correct phase sequence. If the
rotating direction of driving motor is reversed, it can be reversed back just by changing
two-phase live wires on the input connection panel.
Power supply voltage must be measured. Input power supply voltage should be in
the range of 10% of the rating voltage. Its frequency should be the rating frequency
(with 1Hz deviation). If voltage deviation exceeds the above mentioned range, please
contact the related power supply company.
In order to avoid accidents caused by electricity leakage, a wire (its section area is
listed the following chart) must be connected to the ground pole of machine on one end.
On the other end, it must be connected to grounding pole or welded onto a copper plate
then bury the grounding pole or copper plate inside the earth that is not easy to be dry.
1-13
Motor Power Conductor Size (Section Area)

<15KW 14 mm²
15-37KW 22 mm²
>37KW 38 mm²
1.7.1 Check Rotating Direction of Pump Motor
Oil pump motor switch
When the power supply is connected, we must check the rotating direction of oil
pump motor.
Attention!
Hydraulic oil must be filled to full! Before starting the oil pump,
we must ensure that oil in the tank is full.
 Turn on the power switch.
 Turn on the oil pump motor switch briefly on the operation panel to run the oil
pump motor then turn off immediately.
 Check whether the rotating direction is same to the direction indicated by
outside cover on the motor.
In case that the direction is not correct, turn off the machine power supply switch
and turn off the power supply switch on the power supply cable. Change the location
of power input line L1 and L2 (see chapter8 .main circuit).
Attention!
If the rotating direction of oil pump motor is not correct,
it will damage the hydraulic oil pump.
Note:
Turn off the oil pump motor through oil pump
motor switch on the operation panel.
1.8 Adjustable mounts
1-14
Distance 15mm
Adjustment
( for mini-type machine)
(For large or middle-type machine)

HT series of plastic injection molding machines can be fixed on the adjustable
mounts and its anti-vibration function will make the machine operate quieter.
After installing adjustable mounts, small machines do not need to be fixed on the
ground by concrete bolts. Middle and big machines might be moved by the vibrations
during the operation and must be fixed by concrete bolts.
Attention!
All the supply lines, for example cooling water supply lines,
must be flexible.
Adjusting Adjustable mounts (mini-type machine)

 Unfasten the nut (2)
 Screw the bolt (1), until the mounts’ height reaches its minimal.
 Adjust machine by adjusting bolt (1) on all mounts. Please refer to chapter1.4
for operation in details.
 After the adjustment, fasten the nut (2)
1-15
Adjusting adjustable mounts (large or middle machine)
 Release adjusting bolt in anti clockwise direction.
 Adjusting all bolts to align the machine (see chapter1.4 in detail)
Attention
Adjusting distance should not exceed 15mm; otherwise it will damage the
adjustable mounts.
1-16
Chapter 2 Safety
Chapter 2 Safety
Plastics injection molding machines are auto equipments integrated with mechanical,
electric and hydraulic as three-in-one. As when machine running, there is a certain
dangerous occasions. To prevent to be injured, before machine put into operation,
machine operators must be well-known of the following safety information and must be
trained.
Note: Due to not abide by the following safety instructions as well as privately change
components(electrical and hydraulic circuits) in terms of safety maintenance, Haitian will
not bear the responsibility for personnel injured or machine damaged.
2.1 General safety regulations
Service, maintenance & repair work should only be carried out by personnel
sufficiently qualified in their particular field and who have specific knowledge of injection
molding machinery. They should be versed in the maintenance of industrial health and
safety standards and they should be familiar with the construction and functioning of the
necessary safety equipment on the machine.
If necessary, enlist the help of our service department.
Attention!
The safety equipment fitted on the machine is there for you safety
and that of the production of goods.
The machine should only be operated when all safety equipment is in
working order.
To remove, modify any safety related equipment is therefore not

permitted.
The safety equipment also includes the safety program contained in

the software. Don't carry out any changes to this program.
If the safety equipment malfunctions or a fault occurs on it, the machine must
be immediately shut down:
Actuate emergency stop button;

 Main switch-off;
 Close down the cooling water supply after about 20 min.
The person in charge must be informed at once.

Before putting the machine back into operation, the causes of the fault must be
2-1
Chapter 2 Safety
eliminated.
If someone’s behavior is dangerous, whom must be warned.
Before machine operation, it must be confirmed that there is nobody in dangerous

case.
Keep passage and floor clean, and clean about something that may cause worker
trip over, electrical short-circuited or mechanical blocked.
If there is water, oil or resin on the floor or machine, it must be cleaned for get rid of
operator tumbling.
If the machine needs to be filled with oil, it must be in the state of stop running. After
oil feeding, the tool must be put back to the original place, not on the machine.
2.1.1 Machine main safety scutcheon
Scutcheon Sample Installation position
On the guide rail of

operational side or front
safety door
2-2
Chapter 2 Safety
On the guide rail of

operational side or front
safety door
Beside the air switch of the

electrical cabinet
2-3
Chapter 2 Safety
Non stamp positions-for

referential, may be it is not
definitely pointed out on the
machine. The power of
interpretation is reserved by
Haitian.
Beside the air switch of

the electrical cabinet
2-4
Chapter 2 Safety
On electrical cabinet cover,

barrel cover and heater
cover, voltage＞36V
On external socket box
2-5
Chapter 2 Safety
On hopper
On barrel cover
On barrel cover
2-6
Chapter 2 Safety
Barrel guarding cover
On safety door or button

box
2-7
Chapter 2 Safety
Installation position
Scutcheon Sample
Automatic safety door
2-8
Chapter 2 Safety
2.1.2 Maintenance & repair work
Attention!
All repair and maintenance work should only be undertaken when the
main switch on the injection molding machine is switched to “0" if
necessary, is locked by padlock.
It is the employer's duty to instruct the machine operator on the construction

operation and function of the safety equipment as well as on the correct altitude to health
and safety at work.
Attention!
Any process which impairs safety on the machine should be stopped.
The employer must ensure that no unauthorized personnel work on the machine.
No safety equipment whatever should be taken off the machine or put out of action. If
it is essential to remove safety equipment in order to carry out repair work, then it should
ensure safety. As soon as the repair work is completed, the safety equipment must be
refitted and its effectiveness checked.
Attention!
No unauthorized conversion or modification of the safety equipment
on the injection machine is allowed!
2.1.3 Toxic fumes

Some plastic materials give off toxic fumes when heated to excess. This applies
particularly to PTEE, POM and PVC.
The design of the machine is not applicable for processing materials may send out
harmful gas, smog and dust. It is recommended that an exhaust system be installed to
divert these hazardous fumes. For the specific installation method, please contact
Haitian. During exhaust system installation, any damage caused by arbitrary change of
original safety structure which is not permitted by Haitian shall be born by the refitted
part.
Note：
If the extraction facility be fastened directly on the machine, we would
recommend that the extraction facility should be installed on the fixed
mould.
2-9
Chapter 2 Safety
2.1.4 Explosive decomposition
When exposed to prolonged heating, some plastic materials have a tendency to
react by decomposing and becoming explosive. In particular, these are polymethyloxide
and PVC. The type of plastic, which react in this way, should only be processed using
nozzles, which are apart from mould when pressure builds up and then the air caused by
decomposition can be flowed out from nozzles.
Prevention of accidents by：
 Adhering strictly to the prescribed parameters of the plastic materials, in
particular, processing temperature and dwell time in the plasticizing cylinder in
line with the material manufacturer’s specification.
 When processing heat sensitive plastics, the dwell times of the material in the
plasticizing cylinder should be reduced, when there are intermissions in
production or there is a material change, polyethylene should be used for
purging (to cleanse the plasticizing cylinder of any sensitive material) and then
the heating switched off.
 The operator must wear suitable protective clothing to prevent molten materials
suddenly being ejected from the nozzle due to insufficient pre-drying or some
material degradation.
2.1.5 Prevent accidents caused by exceeding charge

In general, setting weight of charging higher 15% of product weight is reasonable.
Exceeding charging would cause much of high pressure and temperature melting
plastics leaving in the barrel and heating passage after injection step. When charging
with high back pressure is end, thus high pressure would remain in the barrel. In case of
manual cleaning or repairing mold, the energy caused by high pressure has a chance to
release suddenly and severe injury the operator.
Note:
We strongly stress that it must retract the nozzle to leave the mold, stop
pump motor and open the guard before you enter the clamping space to clean or
repair.
2.2 Safety equipment

2.2.1 General equipment
The safety equipment consists of guarding and locking equipments.
 The guard panels prevent access to the danger areas and protect personnel from
plasticizing melt spurting out.
 When a particular movable guarding door is opened, locking mechanisms interrupted
any dangerous machine movement.
The measurements for the moveable guarding in the mould clamping area and for
the component ejection opening are designed in such a way that there is sufficient safety
margin, for the larger moulds are concerned, the measurements of the guarding panels
are required to be added relatively.
2-10
Chapter 2 Safety
2.2.2 Safety equipment (illustration only for reference, actual machine may be differ with
it)
A B
Position Description
Movable guarding in the mould clamping area—operator side/non operator
1
side
2 Nozzle guarding
3 Fixed guarding on the injection unit—operator side
4 Fixed guarding on the clamping unit—operator side/non operator side
5 Fixed guarding on the clamping unit--side
6 Hydraulic safety valve or hydraulic safety valve switch
7 Mechanical safety unit
8 Electrical safety unit
9 Barrel heating guarding
10 Fixed guarding –front
2.2.3 Moveable guarding in the mould area
The moveable guarding in the mould cavity area forms a cover over both the
operator and non-operator side on the mould cavity area. There is a cover plate on top of
the canopy that can be removed to allow for the insertion of handling equipment. (No
cover platen on the top of the canopy for large and middle type machines.)
Attention!
The cover plate must only be removed for installing handling
equipment.
It is the employer's duty to ensure when such handling equipment is

fitted that the operating personnel and hands are barred to clamping
zones in the mould area, the clamping unit, the de-molding system and
2-11
Chapter 2 Safety
the handling equipment.
The front moveable guarding in the mould area is fitted with three locking
mechanisms, one is mechanical locking unit, second is hydraulic, and third is electrical.
When the moveable guarding is opened, three locking units are automatically
actuated to block all movements in the clamping unit. Note: It is forbidden to open the
rear movable guarding door, as it is not safe enough to protect operators.
Attention!
The front movable guarding has mechanical protection. When the front
movable guarding door is open, the mechanical protection straightly
stop movable platen moving forward. The special explanation of
adjustment and maintenance for mechanical safety unit:
Safety pawl Adjustable rod
Safety cover
Rear platen Movable platen
2-12
Chapter 2 Safety
Attention!
If changes for a new mould in A type mode, the rod positions alter
together with adjustable bolts, so as to ensure a proper space for safely
clamping mold. That is to say, when the guarding door is opened and
the mold opening reaches to the limitation, the drop bar must be
dropped. It is forbidden to operate the machine when the rod has not
been adjusted to the proper position.
If changes for a new mould in B type mode, the rod positions don’t alter
together with adjustable bolts.
The above relevant parts of the mechanical safety unit must be checked
before machine operation every time. If they have been seriously
damaged or don’t work, they must be repaired or replaced for normal
operation.
The front movable guarding door has hydraulic safety equipments (the rear movable
guarding door of some machines has this function too). When the front door is open, the
safety valve will cut off mold clamping circuit to stop mold clamping.
There are two limit switches are respectively installed on the front door and back
door. When the door is open, the system stops mold clamping by cancelling mold
clamping directive and cutting off the current of mold clamping valve.
Check of the above safety devices:

Before machine running and after mould change, please first check and then
confirm if the limit switch on the front door, hydraulic safety valve or switch and
mechanical safety equipments are in good condition or not.
The machine’s hydraulic safety valve and mechanical safety equipments are with
checking function. If they are error or cannot work, there will be a warn or hint. The
machine can only start mold clamping when they have been repaired. These checking
functions are forbidden to be changed and cancelled.
Error message:
If the machine is started up and the guard door is left open, an error message will
appear on the display screen of the operating panel: “Guard door is not closed!”
Error message elimination:

Close guard door;
Keep checking stroke switch or adjust as well as repair stroke switch until the error
message is canceled;
Error message can automatic canceled after all error messages are disposed.
2-13
Chapter 2 Safety
2.2.4 Nozzle guarding
To prevent the scorching plastic liquid gushing out to scald machine operators,
metallic nozzle cover is installed on the nozzle working position. On the top of the nozzle
cover, there is a moveable canopy with a viewing window, upon which a safety stroke
switch has been installed.
When opening the nozzle guard cover, " Injection carriage forward ", " injection ",
"Charge" are completely stopped (A certain series of machines may have some little
differences with the aforementioned due to configurations), and automatic and
semi-automatic operations are cancelled.
Error message:
If an attempt is made to start the action before the nozzle cover is closed, an error
message will appear on the screen “Nozzle guard cover is not closed! ".
When guard cover is closed, then the message disappears, so the operation can be
started.
Attention!
It is forbidden to step on the injection unit or the machine body for
maintenance or for feeding materials, which is easily wounded.
Therefore, please use auxiliary facilities such as ladder or platform or
auto loader.
Auxiliary feeding loader is provided by users and it must be located with the feed
inlet during the machine operation. For foreign sales machines, when the hopper is
pulled open, the feeding equipment suspends working. While for domestic sales
machines, they receive no impacts from that.
2.2.5 Fixed guarding

Fixed guard door is driven tightly by screwing bolts and can only be released by
using appropriated tools.
It only can be removed during maintenance.
Attention!
It is not permitted to operate the machine with the fixed guarding
removal.
Fixed guarding is to be found on the operator and non-operator side of the clamping
area, on the front or side of injection unit.
Other fixed guarding; protection against reaching the clamping unit on the fixed
mould and protection against touching heat insulation on the plasticizing cylinder.
2-14
Chapter 2 Safety
2.2.6 Other dangers when nozzle guarding is open
If the hopper is moved and the material feed supply is interrupted, the heating up of
the cylinder means a fire risk at the feed opening.
There is a risk of fire in the nozzle area because of the hot nozzle and because of
nozzle heater bands being heated up and the melt being squirted out.
Attention!
PPE protective gloves and safety glasses must be worn when working
in the plasticizing cylinder area.
2.3 Hydraulic safety equipment

The hydraulic safety equipment consists of pressure relief valves, which the
manufacturer has set to the maximum permissible value and then sealed. The valves are
actuated when the pressure exceeds that which has been set in accordance with the
specified value.
Pressure relief valve limits hydraulic system pressure and this protects the operator
and the hose and pipe connections from excessive pressure. This prevents damage as
damage as a result of faults in the hydraulic system. Pressure relief valve protects the
variable pumps in the hydraulic drive from overloading.
Attention!
Under no circumstances must pressure relief valves be adjusted.
2.4 Electrical safety equipment

The electrical safety equipment consists basically of the ground connections and the
emergency stop button.
Earth wire connections on all electrical equipment on the machine particularly
electrical heating equipment, heater bands must be checked periodically.
The emergency stop button is located on operating plate and non-operating fixed
mould guarding plate.
If press the button, various machine movements will be immediately brought to a halt,
both the pump motor and any handling equipment fitted via the standard interface will
also switched off.
For safety reasons, once the emergency-stop button has been actuated, the
machine will remain in the stop position.
The error message "emergency-stop actuated" appears on the operating plate
screen.
The button is released by turning the knob a quarter turn.
The cycle can then be restarted and the error message disappears.
Breaker has under-voltage protection.
2-15
Chapter 2 Safety
2.5 Checking the safety equipment
Attention!
When a customer accepts a machine, the responsibility for servicing
and testing the safety equipment passes to him.
If the fault is discovered on the safety equipment, the machine must
be taken out of service immediately.
The causes of the faults must be eliminated before the machine goes
back into operation.
We recommend the following checks be made on the safety equipment:
 Movable units on the machine and existing of sundries which may
obstacle machine running should be checked carefully by both operating
personnel and setter when adjusting the machine. Ensure all in good
condition, and then close movable guarding.
 Press manual mold open button to make movable platen moving leftward
until mold open.
 Open movable guarding, visual examine whether the safety pawl drop
freely and block clamping motion.
 There should be no clamping motion when press clamping button in inch
manual. If clamping function is actuated, then must checking and
readjusting the hydraulic safety switch. (See diagram 2.2.2 position 6)
 There should be no ejection, injection and charging motion when press
corresponding button in inch manual. If these functions are actuated, then
must checking and readjusting the electric safety switch. (See diagram
2.2.2 position 8)
 Close movable guarding to make safety pawl lifting by mechanical stops
and to press the electric safety switch. The hydraulic safety switch will pop
synchronously. At that time all control button on the operating panel
should be available.
Periodically checking and testing after all the faults are eliminated by a
specialist technician.
Attention!
The above items should be checked every mouth.
Checking safety equipments including the following items:

 The rigidity of executing devices;
 If the safety guarding mechanisms are fixed on the machine;
 If all wires have been correctly connected with electrical safety switches;
 If the function of every safety equipment and limit switch is normal or not.
2-16
Chapter 2 Safety
Attention!
When safety equipment is being checked the guarding is open, thus
exposing the danger zones and care must be taken to keep the body
or other articles far away from these areas.
Checking nozzle cover stroke switch, protective glass must be worn
in order to prevent the melt being squirted out which will cause
damage.
If faults are discovered on the safety equipment, the machine should
be shut down immediately! Before putting into the machine back into
service, the faults and the causes of the faults must be eliminated.
Note：
If the machine has a limited block on the injection unit, before
debugging, make sure its limited block has been dismantled or else
there may be a shearing. For the steps of dismantlement, please see
the diagram below:
Attention!
It is the customer's duty to consult specialist of Haitian when
modifications are made or peripheral units are added on.
2-17
Chapter 3 Putting Into Operation
Chapter3 Putting into operation
3.1. Preparatory work
Note: Before operating the machine, please read Chapter9 carefully

to get familiar with the way of operation to the controlling system, and only after
that may come to the following debugging and adjustment.
3.1.1. Correct clothing
Safety helmet
PPE gloves
Work clothes or overall (Be

sure to fasten the buttons)
Safety boots or shoes
3.1.2. Necessary jobs before testing the new machine

 Check and ensure that the machine has been well installed, including correct
leveling, correct connection of the parts, electrical cables and oil pipes
removed during transportation, removal of the additional parts added for
transportation and lifting.
 Check the power supply and earth lines have been properly connected,
cooling water properly connected and opened for use.
 Check the hydraulic oil has reached above the middle line of the oil level
meter and maintained for more than 3 hours.
 Check the surfaces of all the motional parts have been cleaned and
lubricated.
3.2. Testing and adjusting the new machine

3.2.1 Power on
After whether voltage and frequency complying with the request of main motor
is checked, connect the power supply line, set the power switch on the machine
upward to Position ON to power the machine.
There are some protective switches in the electric cabinet. Open the door of the
cabinet, and put all the mini circuit breaker (see chapter8 component layout) upwards
3-1
in the cabinet to connect all circuit. If LCD screen displays menu means the controller
is in working condition and can take nest steps.
3.2.2. To start running the electric motor.

Push the motor start key on the operating panel to start the oil pump motor.
(For adjusting the running direction of the motor, see Chapter 1). Check the running
direction of each motor if there are several motors. The motor could run if these are
no deviant sounds.
3.2.3. To start heating system
Enter the temperature-setting image to set temperatures for different
zones.(For 5-zones temperature control system, set 180, 180, 160, 140 respectively,
starting from the nozzle; for 4-zones temperature-setting system set 180, 180, 160,
140 respectively. Different plastic material requires different temperature. )
Push the heating key to start heating the barrel. Under the normal circumstances it
should takes around 30 minutes for the temperature to reach the set point.
Attention!
It is strictly forbidden to operate the injection unit when the temperature
has not reached the set point.
3.2.4. To operate the machine manually.

Follow Chapter 9, and enter the data-setting image for every motion to set up a
group of data at a lower pressure and slower speed for each motion. Holding the
manual operation mode, push every motion key and observe if each motion goes
firmly and steadily and confirm the normality of each functional part.
Re-set data to each motion image according to the normal motion requirements.
Holding the manual operation mode, push every motion key and observe if each
motion is Normal. No finding of problem indicates the normality of the manual
operation.
Attention:
Observe the oil level of the hydraulic oil tank after closure of the
mould, completion of plastic injection and retract of the screw.
Stop the motor and fill the tank with oil up to above the middle line
of the oil meter in case the oil level has dropped down under the middle line.
3.2.5. Semi-automatic and fully automatic operation of the machine

After full normality of all the manual motions is confirmed, push the
semi-automation key, Switch on and off the safety door at one push and release, start
3-2
the semi-automatic work Circulation and observe if the machine works normally in the
semi-automatic mode. At the End of one circulation, if no abnormality occurs, re-switch
on/off for another time to enter another round of circulation.
After 3-5 circulation of normal work in the semi-automatic mode, at the end of the
mould closure, push the time automation key to give the fully automatic work mode to
the machine and observe if the machine works normally.
Normal results of all the tests indicate the completion of tests and possibility to
conduct the plastic injection and molding.
If your injection molding machine be installed with SIEMENS controller, after manual
mode in good condition, debugging semi-automatic and full automatic as follows:
Semi-automatic (for SIEMENS)
 Press functioning key of every motion
 Let the motive unit or part to its original position of setting
 Confirmed by screen indication, press semi-automatic functioning key, and
then press semi-automatic start key. Machine works in semi-automatic mode.
 Testing whether semi-automatic mode is in good condition.
 If these are no faults, stop the semi-automatic circulation after repeating 3-5
circulations.
 Full-automatic (for SIEMENS)
 Ensure the motive unit or part is in their original position. If not, resetting it.
 Press full-automatic functioning key and then press full-automatic start key.
 Debugging and adjusting the full automatic function until it’s in good
condition.
Normal results of all the tests indicate the completion of tests and possibility to
conduct the plastic injection and molding.
3.3. Procedure of the mould installation

3.3.1. Preparation
Measure the length, width and height of the mould. Compare the measured data
with those in the parameters sheet (see chapter5) and determine if the mould can be
set on the machine.
Measure the diameter of the mould locating ring to make sure it can fit the
installation holes in the fixed platen.
Measure the flow gate dimensions and distance between flow gate and installation
plane of fixed platen. Check whether it can match to nozzle of machine.
Measure mould ejection platen; check it can match to relative parameters (see
chapter 5) on the machine
In manual thick adjusting mode, adjust the mould height available according to
mould’s actual height. Set the opening stroke according to the space distance which
products can drop freely. Setting ejector stroke to ensure the mould would not be
3-3
damaged by adjusting the mould height.
Clamping plate, filling block for the clamping plate, forcing bolts, nuts, flat washers,
spring washers, wrenches and pipes, etc should be prepared to before mould
installation.
3.3.2. Procedure of mould installation
Attention!
The whole work to installing the mould shall be done manually; the
bellow-mentioned mechanical operations shall be done in the manual
mode or the mould-adjustment mode. Before starting manual operation,
the pump motor must turn off to ensure the operator’s safety.
Step 1: Start the oil pump motor;

Step 2: Open the moving platen.
Step 3: Move the injection base backward;
Step 4: Turn off the oil pump motor.
Note!
If the moving plate is on the position “mould open stop”, step
1-step 4 can be skipped.
Step 5: Adjust the position and number of the ejectors to suit them to the
mould.
Step 6: Suspend the mold: Position the mold by means of inserting the mold
flow gate bushing in the locating ring hole on the fixed platen side. Pay special
attention to avoid collision between the mould and tie bar or other units.
Attention!
Make sure that the two petals of the mould would not
separate from each other during lifting.
Step 7: Use the bolts, mould clamping plate, filling block of the clamping plate,
flat washers, spring washers, etc to install fixed section of the mould on the
fixed plate. In such case it’s no need to apply a very big tightening force.
3-4
Attention! H
For the size of the bolt see the mechanical drawing in
Chapter5 .Depth H of the bolt shall be 1.5～1.8 folds Φ
as large as its diameter .
Step 8: Start running the oil pump motor. Fastening bolt
Step 9: Close the mould in way of step move to let Nozzle adjusting bolt
the mobile part of the mould approach the fixed part until
a tight fitting is achieved. Guide bracket
Step 10: After full closure of the mould, aligning
nozzle center to ensure nozzle center aim at mould flow
gate center. Aligning procedure as follows: (see Fig1,2)
Fig1
 Unscrew the fastening bolt (Fig1) and locking
nut (Fig2)
 Adjusting nozzle height by nozzle adjusting bolt.
 Adjusting nozzle right or left direction by right or left adjusting bolt.
 Tighten fastening bolt and locking nut after end of alignment.
Locking nut Screw drive base
Bolt(adjusting nozzle
right or left)
Fig2
Attention!
Before moving the nozzle observe its length and the depth of the
material let to ascertain if there is any conflict which may lead to a
damage of the nozzle or the heating coil.
Step 11: Turn off the oil pump motor;

Step 12: Tighten up the clamping bolt to mounting fixed parts of mould to fixed
platen firmly.
Step 13: Tighten up the clamping bolt to mounting movable parts of mould to
moving platen firmly as the same way.
3-5
ATTENTION:
The bolt shall be firmly tightened to avoid any dropping at the
opening of the platens.
Step 14: Remove the belt or steel cable used during the lifting and setting.
Step 15: Set up each position, pressure and speed for the mould-opening and
closing, especially set up an adequate pressure required by the finish product molding
at the setting of a high pressure for the mould locking.
Step 16: Start the oil pump motor.
Step 17: Open the mould to extremity, adjust Mould 1 slow position bigger than
high pressure position of the mould closure.
Step 18: Set the data of mould opening/closure and mould adjustment.
Step 19: Close the safety door, push mould-adjustment function key twice to enter
the automatic mould-adjustment status.
Step 20: Once again open and close the safety door .at which the machine will
adjust the mould by itself. After completion of the mould adjustment the machine will
return to the manual mode.
Step 21: Push the mould closing key to conduct the mould-closing operation. After
the mould closure, please turn off the oil pump motor.
Step 22: Once again tighten up all the mould-fastening bolts.
Step 23: Connect other mould-related pipeline, such as the cooling water pipeline.
Up to now the mould has been set up.
3.4. Procedure of the plastic injection
3.4.1. Notes before the plastic injection

 In order to protect the screw, it shall be operated only after 15-30 minutes
from the moment when every point of temperature in the heating barrel
reaches the set temperature.
 To avoid damage on the screw, it is necessary to conduct a test run of the
screw at a speed lower than 60 rpm in the unloaded condition..
 Be careful not let man’s face and hand approach the tip of the nozzle. The
mould-setting up shall be completed before starting the plastic injection.
 Not annotated steps in next paragraph of the plastic injection work shall be all
done in the manual mode.
3.4.2. Temperature of the hydraulic oil

The optimal working temperature is 35-40℃. The viscosity of the oil will be too
high if lower than 25℃. The viscosity of the oil will be too low if temp higher than 55℃.
In order to have an optimal condition of the machine immediately at the
3-6
beginning of the plastic injection, it is necessary to add a pre-heating to the hydraulic
oil if its temperature is lower than 25℃. If the machine has the function of pre-heating,
it is suggested to conduct hydraulic oil pre-heating, and the preheating can be
achieved by setting relevant parameters on the screen of Temperature Para. on the
controller (the preheating is an optional function for servo machines, it is suggested for
adoption if the machines are used in cold areas or customers have special
requirement on oil temperature range).
3.4.3. Procedure of the plastic injection

Step 1: Set the heating temperature of the material barrel to a point suitable for
the material to be used. And start next step only after 15 minutes from the moment
when the temperature of the material reaches the set point.
Step 2: Open the cover of the material hopper, pour the plastic material into the
latter. Replace the cover back (follow the operation instruction if there is an automatic
material loading device)
Step 3: Roughly set up the position of the end, pressure and speed of the material
storage according to the weight of the product and the specific weight of the material.
Adjustment of charging back pressure has two different methods according to

machines type.
 For machine which clamping force above 800 Ton, back pressure can be
adjusted by setting corresponding valve in operating panel.
 Mini type machine can only be adjusted by means of manual adjusting back
pressure valve which installed on the injection oil circuit. Valve can be read
by back pressure gauge installed near the back pressure valve or injection
guard. There are obviously mark near the gauge.
Note:
Too big back pressure may increase the energy consumption
during the charging process.
Step 4: Press the start key of the motor to start running the motor;
Step 5: Press the mould-closing key to do the mould-closing motion until the end of
mould closure.
Step 6: Hold the advancing key of the injection base to advance the injection base
until the nozzle is in contact with the injection orifice of the mould.
Attention:
For different plastic materials and moulds, the order of Step 5
and
Step 6 can be inverted.
Step 7: Press the charge key, at which the screw rotates and gradually moves
3-7
back
to the set position. After that charge stops automatically. May also press charge key
again to stop charge.
Step 8: Press the injection key to start injection action and pressure-keeping
action.
Step 9: At the end of the hold pressure action release the injection key, press the
charge key to next charging process.
Step 10: After end of charge and sufficient time for cooling is estimated, press
mould open key to open the mould.
Step 11: After the mould-opening finishes conduct the knockout action, open the
safety door and take out the product.
Step 12: Observe the quality of the product and carry out an adaptation setting of
the relevant data.
Repeat Step 4 to Step 12 until qualified product is come out.
Step 13: After acceptance of the qualified product, press the semi- or full
automation mode keys to enter the full automatic work mode.
3.5. To stop the plastic injection

3.5.1. To stop the injection before completion of molding or before a temporary
termination.
Press the heating switch and turn off the heating system on the material barrel.
Close the apron of the material hopper.
Attention:
Don’t turn off the heating system on the barrel if a temporary
short time stop only.
3.5.2. To stop the injection at finishing of material or completion of work pieces or

at necessity to turn off the heating system
If the injection machine is fitted with a temperature adjuster for adjusting the
nozzle temperature, turn the adjuster to “0” position to disconnect it.
Not only to heat up the barrel as quickly as possible in next work, but also to
prevent the molten resin from remaining in the barrel. It is necessary to clean the
remaining materials off the heating barrel thoroughly (injection several times without
mounting mould)
Clamping mould in the manual mode (do not use high pressure locking mould
function) and move the injection base and screw to the STOP position, turn off the oil
pump motor and main power switch of the plastic injection machine.
3-8
3.6. To remove the mould
ATTENTION:
Following operations must be done only in manual mode.
Step 1: Start running the oil pump motor.

Step 2: Clamping the mould completely.
Step 3: Turn off /stop the oil pump motor.
Step 4: Open the safety door, fit the mould with bolts and draw in the steel cable
for lifting.
ATTENTION:
Shall assure of non separation of the two parts of the mould when
open the injection machine.
Step 5: Remove all the clamps and connecting pipeline.
Step 6: Start running the oil pump motor;
Step 7: Press the mould opening button to open the mould.
Step 8: Switch off/stop the oil pump motor after completion of the mould-opening.
Step 9: Lift the mould out of the injection machine and place it in an appropriate
position.
3.7. To remove the screw and the heating barrel

For re-assembling them, precede the steps for removal in reverse order and
arrange corresponding parts.
Note:
Although it is very easy for one or two persons to do this work and
finish it very quickly, it is very essential for them always to warn
each other of safety regulations during the assembling, removal
and operating the injection machine.
Attentions for tightening the bolts on the material barrel:

 Must use grade 12.9 qualified bolts and cover the bolt
surface heat-proof grease.
 Evenly tighten up the diagonal bolts. Tighten them for a
few cycles each only following the order as shown in the
right figure;
 Use an appropriate torque wrench (torque valve can be
found in chapter 5.9.3.2)
 Tighten up all the bolts finally.
3-9
 Too tightly of the bolts may lead to damage on them,
 But too loosely may lead to leakage of material.
3.7.1. Before removal
Because of a high viscosity of polycarbonate and UPVC, these materials may
stick to the screw and the barrel when cooling down. Especially it will be very likely to
destroy the metallic surface out of eventual carelessness when stripping it. If these
materials are used, it is necessary to clean the screw and barrel with polystyrene, PE
or other detergents prior to starting the work so as to simplify the cleaning and
removal of the screw.(injection without mounting mould several times )
Necessary materials apart from tools:

 4 or 5 wooden bars or steel rods ( diameter ＜that of the screw ) x (length＜
injection travel ).
 4or 5 sections of square wood (100mm x 300mm).
 Clamping tools
 Waste cotton wadding or ragged clothes.
3.7.2. Preparations for removing the screw

Step 1: Regulate the temperature of the barrel in an approximation to the maximum
value for the resin used, and then disconnect the power of the heater.（The
temperature of nozzle and the second heating zone can be set 50℃ higher
than the normal temperature to be convenient to dismantle the screws of the
front barrel.）
Step 2: Regulate down the speed and pressure of injection; for the injection machines
with multi-step control on the speed and pressure, it is necessary to regulate
all the speeds and pressures in approximation to 0.
Step 3: Close the feed opening and empty the remaining material in barrel.（If the
material is engineering plastic such as PC, PA or ABS, the barrel should be
passed through by PP.）
Step 4: Make the screw (injection piston) return at full travel and let it stop there.
Step 5: Removal of other connecting parts of the screw according to the order shown
below. Place the screw fixture ring bolts in separation from other bolts to avoid
confusion.
3-10
① Remove the bolt;

Remove the bolt
Remove the split
rings(2 pcs)
screw retract
Dispelling key
screw
Screw drive base
3-11
3.7.3. Disassemble screw and barrel
3.7.3.1 Dissemble screw and barrel of large machines
3.7.3.1.1. Dissemble barrel (dissemble barrel and screw together)
Step 1: Make the injection base (carriage piston) return at full travel and let it stop
there, disassemble barrel casing, hopper and electrical parts connected
with the barrel.
Step 2: Loosen the barrel nut and dismantle the two fixed blocks.
Step 3: When Step 5 of 3.7.2 is over, lift the barrel out of the injection base in the
state of screw and coupling are separated.
3-12
Step 4: Screw disassemble, follow the diagram below:
Screw disassemble diagram
3.7.3.1.2. Disassemble screw (dissemble screw only, not including barrel)

Step 1: Make the injection base （carriage piston）return at full travel, and make the
mold height max. and mold opening max..
3-13
Step 2: Remove the barrel end cap and nozzle (numbers in circles indicate the
order of removal).
Nozzle heating ring

Heating barrel head fixture bolt
Front barrel and nozzle
Step 3: Removing screw tip and screw

(1). Put a section of wood on the end of the injection screw (see the sketch). Support
the wood with clamping/jig instead of hands.
screw wood
Screw drive base
clamping
(2). Inching the screw forward, at the same time removing the clamping.
(3). Inching “suck back” key to make the screw drive base retracted fully after screw
travelling forward to end.
(4). Add another wood; repeat Step 1 to Step 3, and it is possible to remove screw by
hand.
(5). Lift the screw by drawing it out from fixed platen direction.
3-14
ATTENTION:
The screw is still over-heated; don’t take the screw with bare hands.
Large screw must be suspended by a hook when the screw be
pushed about its 1/2 length.
3.7.3.2 Disassemble screw and barrel of middle

machines
Step 1: By working on the select switch to move the unscrew
injection unit backward until it cannot move any
more, and then, the locating pin, on the screw
barrel base at non-operational side, will be
inserted into the corresponding pin hole on the
guiding bar holder.
Step 2: Remove the adjustable block at nozzle horizontal position and remove fixture
bolt at the guiding bar holder.
Step 3: Dismantle the cylinder pin located at a higher place (at non-operational side)
which connecting carriage cylinder with screw barrel base and disconnect
them.
Step 4: Set 50% system pressure and 30% system flow on the operational panel.
Press carriage retract key and make use of carriage cylinder at the lower
place (operational side) to drive the injection base to a proper position along
the operational side (see the diagram below). As a result, the screw and barrel
will be taken down successfully. Pay more attention that the wire and hose
shall not be pulled too tight.
Step 5: If only replace the barrel, the whole part of the barrel assemblage must be
3-15
lifted out along the operating side, make reference in 3.7.5 or 3.7.6.
Step 6: If only remove and replace the screw make reference in 3.7.3.1.2 of step 2
and step 3 for screw taken down, the screw can be lifted out along the barrel
direction at the operating side.
3.7.3.3 Disassemble screw and barrel of small machines
3.7.3.1.1 Disassemble barrel (screw and barrel together)

Step 1: Injection completely with the carriage retraction until it cannot move any more.
Step 2: Release barrel fixing nuts and disassemble all electrical elements connecting
with the barrel. Pull the barrel out from the screw barrel base along the fixed
platen direction and then hoist it out with the completion of Step 5 of 3.7.2,
screw and coupling in the detached state.
Step 3: Remove the screw and barrel, make reference in Step 4 of 3.7.3.1.1.
3-16
Note: For certain model of the machines, if the space between the fixed platen and
screw barrel base is too small, the first measure is to increase the length of the link,
and the second measure is to add wooden backing plate at the fixed platen to so as to
make the carriage continue to retreat.
3.7.3.3.2 Disassemble screw (screw only, not including barrel)

Please refer to 3.7.3.1.2 for operation.
3.7.4. Removing the screw tip (this paragraph is for reference only)
Fit the slotted part of the screw with the screw handle, hold the screw tip with
special spanner, and turn it in the direction shown in the sketch to separate it from the
screw. Note: the screw tip is in turn-to-left thread.
Operating handle
Wood piece
Wood piece
Screw Tip
Special spanner
3-17
3.7.5. Removing the heating barrel
Step 1: Remove all heating band off the barrel (also remove their frame if necessary).
Step 2: Remove the barrel-fixture bolts.
Step 3: Lift up the barrel in suspension for time being as shown in the figure.
Screw barrel base

Heating barrel
Woods
Screw drive base
Step 4: Inch screw ret. key to make screw drive base retract to end position.
Screw barrel base

Heating barrel
Woods
Screw drive base
Step 5: Insert a wooden bar between the screw drive base and the end of heating
barrel. Remember to use pliers for clamping the wood instead of using the
hands only, as shown in the sketch.
Step 6: Assure to have the speed and pressure of injection regulated down, and then
do injection motions to push the barrel go ahead.
Step 7: After the barrel goes forward full stroke, inch injection ret. motion to make
screw drive base ret. to end position again.
Step 8: Repeat Step5--Step7.
3-18
Step 9: Lifting height should be adjusted when barrel be pushed about 50 percent
from screw barrel base.
Step 10: Repeat Step5--Step7. Disconnect the heating barrel fully from the screw
drive unit.
Attention!
Remember the heating barrel do not cool after barrel full
separated from screw drive unit.
Step 11: The heating barrel must be positioned at an undisturbed place after it has
been taken down.
3.7.6 Removing heating barrel—method 2

Barrel base cover is designed to divide the circular hole which matched barrel into
two-split collar. If necessary, it need only remove the barrel base cover that can
removing barrel. Procedure as follows:
Step1: Remove all heating bands off the barrel (also remove their frame if necessary).
Step2: Suspend the barrel as chapter 3.7.5.
Step3: Release cylinder nut which fixes barrel with screw barrel base.
Step4: Dismantle the screw on barrel base cover, remove the barrel base cover.
Step5: Lifting smoothly, dismount barrel from screw barrel base.
Step6: The barrel should be placed in a safe position after being removed.
3.8. To discharge air from the proportional valve (some machines don’t have this
fundtion.)
When the pressure system is not stable, there may likely be air inside it. In that
case it is necessary to discharge the air to keep the pressure stable. (This is seen
3-19
always with new machine at the beginning of use.) For this purpose, the concrete
procedure goes as follows:
First set up the pressure and flow of core at 15 respectively, do core motion to
loosen the air-discharge outlet gradually until the pressure doesn’t cause trembling
any more. Tighten the screw at the air outlet and see if the pressure system has
become stable. If not yet, repeat this operation again until normality is attained. After
that restore originally set values of the core pressure and flow. The air-discharge outlet
is located at the end of the coil of the proportional valve. For the details, see the
following figure:
3-20
3-21
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4.1 Maintenance plan
Time scale Maintenance work Chapter

When oil suction minus-pressure relay Prepare to change oil suction 4.6
Is checking oil filter contamination, an
Error message appears on the screen;
“Filter net faulty ".
Every 500 machine hours Check the oil level on the 1.6
hydraulic oil tank
First by-pass filter change after 500 First by-pass filter change -
Working hours
Every 6 month Check and clean oil cooling 4.5
Every 1 month when water quality is
poor
1,000 machine hours after first putting Change or clean the oil suction filter, and 4.6
into operation clean the oil tank
Change or purify the hydraulic oil
Every 2000 machine hours Change the filter element on the tank 4.7
ventilation filter
After maximum 2000 working hours or Change by-pass filter -
when maximum 4.5 bar is displayed on
Pressure gauge
Every 5000 machine hours or at most Change hydraulic oil 4.6
One year Change or clean the oil suction filter, and 4.6
clean the oil tank
Check high pressure hose and replace 4.8
with new one if necessary
Service the electrical motor -
Every 20000 machine hours Hydraulic oil cylinder-change -
Or at most 5 years Seal ring and resistance
Abrasive ring
Change high pressure hose 4.8

Every 3 years Change controller battery -
Every 5 years Change battery on the operating panel -
Note ！
All the high pressure hoses must to be change with new one every 5
years, to avoid any faulty caused by aging problems.
Only the brand new hoses (those replace products from the
catalogue) can be used.
4-1
4.2 Lubrication and hydraulic oil
Lubricant Classification Remark

Hydraulic oil viscosity: 46CST/40℃, Use for system hydraulic.
Hydraulic oil Mobil DTE 25, Shell Tellus Oil 46, Castrol
Hyspin ZZ 46, Wesda anti-wear hydraulic
oil 46, Great Wall brand anti-wear
hydraulic oil 46.
Lubricating grease No.150 EP gear oil (prior to use) For relative point on clamping
No.68 anti-wear hydraulic oil unit of thin oil lubrication
machine type, large machine
moving platen and screw drive
base lubrication
Special grease LIEP00 For relative point on injection
No. 1 LI Grease and clamping unit of grease
No. 3 LI Grease lubrication machine type
Note: For the detail application, please see diagram in P4-5.

Note：
By checking periodically and checking the oil condition; water flow
rate and temperature should be controlled properly and hydraulic oil
temperature should be kept within the limitation(oil temperature
range 5-55℃, and the recommended one 30-45℃).
Note:
If additionIi If additional hydraulic consumption units are fitted to the machine
(linear or rotating e.g. cores or ejector), these must be thoroughly
rinsed through. The fitting of such consumption units should be in
no way affect the necessary quality and purity standards of the
hydraulic oil.
Note：
The hydraulic The hydraulic oil must conform to Quality Standards 8 NAS
1638 (National American Standard) or ISO4406-1999 19/17/14.
If the oil delivered has a tiny contamination grade, a filling must be
through a suitable filter.
Attention：
Care must be taken that the skin touched repeatedly and long time
working with various engine oil must be avoided.
4-2
4.3 Lubrication and Maintenance

The machine is equipped with lubrication distribution in movable parts to ensure
working order of machine (referring to lubrication diagrams), especially for clamping
system. Steel bushing lubrication is used in this machine; the following contents will
introduce the lubrication of the clamping system.
4.3.1 Composition and characteristics of lubrication system

Lubrication system consists of lubrication pump, lubrication pipeline and lubrication
distribution. The oil, flowing to distributors through the pump, reaches each grease
point so as to lubricate each moving part of the machine.
The system performs under computer control. The computer monitors the pressure
relay to control lubrication of the system. When the tank is short of oil, leaking, or there
happens the blocked filter or inadequate pressure, the computer may alarm. Please
check to find reasons and supply grease or repair in time to ensure proper lubrication.
4.3.2 Requirements of lubrication oil

Please refer to page 4-5 of the instruction manual for the oil recommended to the
system.
4.3.3 Principles of lubrication (lubrication diagrams are attached)
4.3.3.1 For Injection molding machine with fixed-damping lubrication:

The machine is equipped with damping distributor. When the pump runs, lubrication oil
from pump to the pipeline accumulates under the action of the damping gear, reaching
the set value of pressure by the relay. When it exceeds the damping differential
pressure, the oil will get over the damping before flowing to each grease point till
terminative time. Because the variable damping gear ensure distribution according to
need, damping-type distributor ensures that the oil may evenly flow to grease points. If
the oil fails to reach the set value of pressure by the relay, the machine will alarm that
the system has trouble for servicing.
4.3.3.2 For injection molding machine with pressurized lubrication:

The machine is equipped with pressurized distributor. When the pump runs, the pump
pressurizes each distributor, making the oil flow to each lubricated point for a smooth
lubrication. When the oil pipeline achieves the set value of pressure by the relay within
lubricating time, the pump stops running, the computer begins delayed lubrication
timing, and distributors relieve pressure with automatic replenishment from the
pipeline. After the timing is finished, the pump restarts in this way till the total
lubrication time is over. The variable capacity of distributor ensures distribution
4-3
according to need. When the pressure of pipeline within lubrication time (Here
"lubrication time" refers to lubrication alarming time.) fails to reach the set value by the
relay, the machine may alarm that the system has troubles for servicing.
4.3.4 Maintenance of lubricating system
M Note: Do not use grease contaminated by moisture, vapor, dust

or sunlight.
4.3.4.1 It is necessary to check periodically if each grease point is normal. Please
note that lubrication time be adequate enough to ensure well lubricated at
each grease point of the whole system. Since the lubricating intervals and
lubrication time are functioned through the reasonable data set-up by the
computer, casual modification of relevant lubrication data set-up is not
encouraging. (The machine has been set up reasonably before shipment,
customers may, however, make some changes according to the actual
conditions. Generally, the new machine can be set less within 6 months,
large machine set less as well). For machines with pressurized lubrication,
the lubrication time is actually alarming time. It is recommended that every
lubrication be set a little longer to have enough time for pressurizing the
relay, thus mal-alarming due to short time is evitable.
4.3.4.2 Conduct periodical check on lubricating condition to keep a proper oil level
in the tank. If find out lubricate out of order, be sure to lubricate in time and
inspect each lubricated point for a good condition,
4.3.4.3 reference values for setting parameters in auto lubrication system
As there are many differences in mechnical design, as well as machine
models, the methods of lubrications in Haitian are consisted by:
fixed-damping grease lubrication system, fixed greased lubrication system,
fixed thin oil lubrication system, fixed thin oil lubrication system with
graphitic bushing, and special lubrication requirements proposaled by
customers. So these lubrication systems obviously have different
lubrication principles, programs and parameters, please see the specific
explanation in Chapter 7.
Note:
The manual lubrication button on the operating panel can not be pressed
freely if under no special conditions, unless insufficent lubrication, because
one press costs a certain amount of lubrication oil, not noly wasting oil but
also causing pollution. During the lubricating, if there might have a fault
alarming for the lubricating on the screen, it mainly signed that the oil
quantity in the lubrication tank is insufficient and the problem caused by
lubricating pipe leakage. The grease should be timely added or repaired.
4-4
Lubrication
Supply oil continually according to operation Lubricated manually for large machines
Refuel the oil before mold adjustment
No.3 grease is recommended for use. Small and middle size machines adopt manually oil feeding
during main maintenance, mold adj. heavy loading and albnormal noise; large size machines adopt
auto oil feeding, which is supplied by auto lubrication system.
○ Grease lubrication machines: No.00 grease, supplied by auto lubrication system.
○ Thin-oil machines: No.150 gear oil or No.68 anti-wear hydraulic oil, supplied by auto lubrication
system.
□ No.1 grease is recommended for use. Small and middle size machines adopt manually forced filling
oil cup, it can regularly feeding oil by hand according to actual running conditions. The guiding bushing
of the charge motor base must be filled once per month at least. Large size machines adopts manually
lburiction pump centralized oil filling, once per month at least.
The machine installed with a forced filling oil cup is recommended to use No.1 grease. Filling oil
during the maintenance. Before oil filling, the oil drain outlet at the lower part of the charge motor base
must be dissembled.
The machine installed with thin oil cup is recommended to use No.150 gear oil. The static state oil level
must be in the oil pointer’s middle, oil exchange generally once six month for the first time, later every
two years.
The machine installed with auto lubrication system is recommended to use No.68 anti-wear hydraulic oil.
The static state oil level must be in the oil pointer’s middle.
△Grease lubrication machines: No.00 grease is recommended for small size machines, supplied by
auto lubrication system. No.150 gear oil or No.68 anti-wear hydraulic oil is recommended for middle
and large size machines, supplied by auto lubrication system of the individual movable platen.
△Thin oil lubrication machines: No.150 gear oil or No.68 anti-wear hydraulic oil for small size machines,
supplied by auto lubrication system. No.150 gear oil or No.68 anti-wear hydraulic oil for middle and
large size machines, supplied by auto lubrication system of the individual movable platen.
4-5
Fixed-damping Lubrication
4-6
Pressurized Lubrication
NOTES：
The manual lubrication button on the operating panel can not be
pressed freely if under no special conditions. During the lubricating,
if there might have a fault alarming for the lubricating in the
computer, it mainly signed that the oil quantity in the lubrication tank
is insufficient and the problem caused by lubricating pipe leakage.
The grease should be timely added or repaired.
4-7
4.4 Routine Check
4.4.1 Check all the bolts on molds and every motion parts of machine about their
looseness
w ro n g
Correct
4.4.2 Check the operation status of thermocouples (the thermocouple systems

vary in accordance with the machine types.)
Correct Wrong W r o n g B r ok e n C on d i t i on
Wrong Not Fastened Enough

Correct
4.4.3 Check the time for temperature in the heated cylinder to rise to see
whether it is too long or too short. At the same time, check the heating circuit to see
whether it cause any danger to heating coil, thermocouple, contactor, fuse and wiring
etc.
4.4.4 Check all safety gates or stroke switches, mold-locking safety devices,
emergency brake buttons, hydraulic safety valves and other additional safety devices
(such as safety cover, cleanup cover etc)
4.4.5On the machines with flow meters (spare parts), check the locations of cool
water entrance and exit, adjustment of flow, water flow inside the oil cooler to see
whether there is any leakage.
4.4.6 In case the machine has central lubricating system, through various grease
devices or cups, check the oil level of lubricants and add lubricant if its surface level is
lower than the required. Address a little lubricant on all motion parts’ surface.
4.4.7Check the operation of all various hydraulic devices in all pipes with loose
sheath to see whether there is any leakage. Check whether there are unusual noises
produced by motor, oil pump, oil motor, heated cylinder and mechanical motion
structures.
Check the appearance status of each heating band. In accordance with the
following illustrations, check whether exists any damages.
4-8
Resins Conglutination Loose Bolts Loose Circuit Damaged Wire
Always clean the whole machine thoroughly by scrubbing and keep the machine
always clean.
4.5 Heat Exchanger (Oil Cooler)
Water cooling type cooler uses fresh water as cooling media. Fluid (high temp. oil)
in shell passes exchange heat with fluid (cooling water) in tube pass by means of heat
transfer tube to lower the temperature of high temp oil and reach the purpose of
cooling.
4.5.1 Construction of cooler
Cooler is consist of such unit as water enter cover, tube board, tube cylinder, deflector
board, seal washer, support etc. The space being surrounded by heat transfer tube
and tube cylinder is defined as shell pass. The space within heat transfer tube and its
connecting pipes is defined as tube pass.
Fig1 construction of cooler
01- water in cover 02-seal washer 03-fixed tube board 04-seal washer 05-defllector board
06-heating transfer tube 07-moving tube board 08-O-Ring 09-water back cover 10-midst flange
11-seal washer 12-support 13-cylinder unit
4-9
4.5.2 Put into operation
Note: working pressure and temperature higher than which indicated

in certificate of quality or product data plate is not permitted.
Only the fresh water can be used as cooling media except special orders.
Quality claims of fresh water:
Cooling water standard

Item Unit Cooling water Makeup water
PH（ 25°） 6.5-8.0 6.0-8.0
Conductivity （ 25°） μS/m <800 <200
Total hardness (CaCO3) mg/l <200 <50
Acid wastage (CaCO3) mg/l <100 <50
(Cl-) mg/l <200 <50
(SO42-) mg/l <200 <50
(Fe) mg/l <1.0 <0.3
(SiO2) mg/l <50 <30
(S2-) mg/l 0 0
(NH4+) mg/l <1.0 <0.2
4.5.3 Check-up, Maintenance, Clean of Cooler
4.5.3.1Cooler check-up
Check follow items after decomposing as chapter4.5.4.1 (see chap4.5.1 construction)
1)Check water enter cover and water out cover, fixed tube board and moving tube
board, see if there are any impurities or be corroded.
2)Check whether all seal element is in good condition.
3)Check heat transfer tube surface, cylinder inner surface, see whether there are ay
impurities or be corroded.
In order to facilitate the check-up of heat exchanger, heat exchanger is better to be
taken off from the machine.
City water supply (or water similar) should be checked once each 6 months.
Industrial water or underground water or water that has high salinity should be
checked once a month.
Attention should be also paid the status of machine. Extend or shorten the time
between two check-ups if necessary.
4.5.3.2 Cooler maintenance
Note: If the cooler doesn’t work for a long period or the fluid might
4-10
be frozen when the cooler stop work. Then the fluid should be given out
thoroughly from the cooler.
4.5.3.3 Cooler clean
If the cool efficiency decreases, it could be assumed that it is dirty inside each pipe.
Take off the pipe caps on both ends and check whether there is erosion or impurity.
Use the alkalescency liquid that can be purchased in the market to clean the inside
the machine body and outside of heating conduit. As for layers that are difficult to
handle with, HCL with low density can be used to clean them. Clean the machine body
and heating conduit until they are very clean.
NOTES：
Before putting the heat exchanger back into its position, clean away
the entire remaining chemical with water and then wipe them dry.
4.5.4 Cooler decompose and assemble
Fig 2: cooler decompose and assemble
4.5.4.1 Cooler assemble

Procedure of assembling as follow orders (see Fig 2)
1) Completely shut all gateways of two fluids to hold back its flow.
2) Drain all fluid even remained in cooler and its connecting pipes.
3) Dismantle adapting pieces of cooler to make the cooler easy to apart.
4) Mark the cooler unit before removal (special for location of fixed tube board)
5) Remove water back cover and take out O-ring.
6) Remove water in cover and take out seal washer.
7) Drag tube bundle out from cylinder (dismantle vertical can avoid the damage on
4-11
seal surface of moving tube board), so the decompose is finished.
4.5.4.2 Cooler assemble
Note: cooler assembling is in reversing order of decompose.
Moving tube board would touch the side step located in cylinder flange when the tube
bundle insert into cylinder. Use cylinder rod with appropriate diameter inserting into the
tube inner surface (length is up to max.300mm) and lifting tube bundle to easy to
install. O-Ring and seal washer should be replaced, locking tightly of connecting bolt
(connect water cover and flange) symmetrically and equably.
4.5.5 Sealing performance test

Sealing test can be carried out as follows: block the outlet of shell pass by plug. Enter
pressure water in shell pass and hold pressure 30 minute. Check and ensure the
joints of flange and all gateways don’t leakage. Testing pressure should conform to the
pressure data of certificate of product or product data plate.
Attention! Safety should be paid special attention to when testing

sealing performance. it should slowly add pressure, person must not located in
front direction of water cover and plug. Ensure that pressure of cooler released
thoroughly before removal of cooler units.
Oil entrance
Entrance of shell pass

Outlet of shell pass
Water out
Water in
Fig3 Indication of sealing performance teat
4-12
4.5.6 Fault and Elimination

Fault Location Cause analysis Elimination
Cooler fixed side Fasten bolt don’t screw Screw bolt tightly
or sealing of tightly
moving side Damage of seal Replace
Linkage washer or O-Ring
Flange Fasten bolt don’t screw Screw bolt tightly
tightly
Midst flange incline Aligning two
flanges
Water(oil) outlet Plug don’t screw tightly Screw plug tightly
Plug don’t wrap sealant Re-wrap sealant
Two fluid collude Sealing of moving O-Ring damage Replace
side Sealing surface which Repair or replace
touching O-Ring
damage
Enable reach the Flow don’t reach its set Increase flow to set
set temperature valve valve
Too dirt paste heating Rinse heating
transfer tube side transfer tube
4.6 Filter
This filter is an oil suction filter installed at the entrance of pump side of oil tank,
which filters and cleans hydraulic oil. When dismantling and changing the filter core,
we should observe the following instructions. (some oil filters are installed inside the
oil tank on certain machines. In case of cleaning the filter, take them out directly for
cleaning).
4.6.1 Dismantle
First take off the sealing cover on the Side of Oil Tank in the Machine
side of machine and turn loose the internal
The socket head cap
hexagonal bolt in the middle of filter (turn screw in the middle
Side cover
loose to the end) to separate the oil filter from The socket head cap
oil in the oil tank. Then remove the side screw on the side cover
surface bolts to take the filter out. At last, The oil suction filter
open the filter to separate the filter core from
the magnetic stick in the middle.
4-13
4.6.2 Cleaning
Use light oil, gas or cleaning oil etc to
thoroughly get rid of all impurities around the
clog coil. Meanwhile, clean all the metals on the
magnetic stick in the middle. Check the surface and
Pour in the compressed air from inside and inside status to decide
following actions to take
blow away all the impurities and dirt.
4.6.3 Installation
Put the core back to the filter and fasten the side surface bolts and then socket
head cap screw in the center.
4.6.4 Note:
(1)When taking the oil filter, must not start the hydraulic pump motor.
(2)When using the compressed air, must not fix the nozzle of blowing pump too much
(3)In case of discovering broken coil, the filter must be changed.
(4) When uninstalling and installing the filter, pay special care not to break the coil.
(5)After installing the core into the filter, before starting the motor, do check whether
the socket head cap screw is fastened or not.
(6) After installing the filter and start the starting pump motor, we should let the oil
pump work without load for 10 minutes. After confirming that the motor runs
normally, the motor can then work with load.
4.6.5 Change Hydraulic Oil
Procedures:
Use handle pump on the oil tank or siphon device to draw out oil inside through oil
intake.
The remaining oil tank could be discharged through discharge hole on the oil tank.
For this, discharging bolt under the oil tank must be turned loose.
Note：
Clean thoroughly everything inside the oil tank, meanwhile the oil
cooling device and oil pipes should be also cleaned. If any used oil
or past oil remains inside, they will speed the aging of new oil.
Open the side cover and top cover of the oil tank, clean everything inside, if the
oil suction filter is installed inside the oil tank. Please take the oil suction filter at the
same time and clean the oil filter in accordance with Section 4.6.2
Clean the oil tank.
4-14
Change clean or new oil suction oil filter. Turn tight the oil discharge bolt. Install
the tank cover and add the hydraulic oil to the standard required in Section 1.6.
Note ：
Pollution control: the used oil must be dealt with properly.
Used oil and oil suction filter could be returned the oil supplier.
Filter can be recycled.
4.7 Air Filter

The air filter is installed on the top of oil tank. When cleaning the air filter, we have
to turn loose its sealing cover first. After changing the core inside the air filter, then we
turn tight the sealing cover again.
O il tank
Note：
The air filter of oil tank is a very important part and should be maintained strictly
in accordance with maintenance plan.
The sealing cover must be turned tight otherwise the oil will be spilled.
Do not use the machine on which the air filter has not bee fixed onto the top of
its oil tank.
The filter core cannot be recycled.
In case of change to additional core, please contact the Customer Service
Department of Haitian company.
4.8 Check hose circuit

In accordance with maintenance plan stated in Section 4.1, Take a checking plan
of hydraulic hose.
Pipeline must be checked in case that any of the followings might happen. If any
of the followings is discovered on the pipeline, the pipe line must be changed.
 Any damage in the outside layer or inside layer of sheath (i.e. obvious
abrasion traces, cutting and broken signs.
 Outside layer becomes fragile (cracks are found on the soft pipes)
 Being distorted. The natural shape of soft pipe and soft pipe are changed
under normal pressure or being pressed or bent, for example disseverance of
outside layer or bubble-shaped hunches on some parts of the pipe line)
 Cracks
 Sealing rings are damaged or distorted. Small damages can be tolerated)
 Due to erosion, the sealing ring function and intension decrease)
 Exceed the storage time and their life-span. (Please refer to the Maintenance
Plan in Section 4.1)
4-15
note：
When considering the life span of hose circuit of machine, we should
take its storage time into full consideration. The maximum allowed
storage time is 2 years after being manufactured.
Attention:
Only brand new hose can be used.
4.9 Cleaning and Checking of Screw and heating barrel
If necessary, uninstall the screw for cleaning and checking.
As for procedures for uninstalling the screw and barrel, please refer to relevant
sections in Chapter 4 for how to uninstall them quickly and correctly.
The spare parts needed are listed as follows (tools not included)
(1) About 4 or 5 pieces of wood (whose diameter should be smaller than that of screw
and length should be shorter than injection position)
(2) About 4 or 5 pieces of wood that is square in shape (100mmX100mmX300mm)
(3) 1 pliers
(4) Cotton waste
(5) 1 long piece of wood or bamboo (whose diameter should be smaller than that of
screw and length should be longer than that of heated cylinder)
(6) Incombustible solvent (for example: tri-chlorine ethylene)
(7) Brass stick and brass brush
Note：
Removed screw should place above some pieces of wood in order
to protect the screw.
Attention:
There is danger of being burnt working near the heated plastic
injection cylinder.
Wear heat protection gloves and protection glasses.
4.9.1 Cleaning and checking Screw

4.9.1.1 Cleaning Screw
(1) Scrub the main body of screw with cotton waste, which will get rid of most the resin
dregs.
(2) Use the brass brush to clean away the remaining resin dregs or uses a burning
device or something similar to heat the resin dregs for a while before use the
cotton waste or brass brush to clean the dregs on the screw.
(3) Use the same method (of cleaning the main body of screw) to clean the
4-16
torpedo-shaped device, anti-reversion ring, driving ring and mixing ring (in some
machines, the mixing ring is not used) etc on the screw (see the following
illustration). Besides it, use brass brush to clean the screw thread and screw’s
main body.
(4) At last, after the screw being cooled, use the incombustible solvent to clean all the
oil stains.
WARNING ：
Don’t try to damage the cold processed materials by abrasion
Before installing the torpedo-shaped device on the screw, address
some molybdenum disulfide lubricant or silicone oil in order to
prevent saturation. Only one thin layer of lubricant is enough. If
there is too much lubricant, the products might be polluted by it.
When using the chemical solvent, routine protection measures
should be taken to avoid direct contact between skin and smog.
4.9.1.2 Check the Screw
S crew tip Anti-reversion ring M ixing ring
Installed w ith screw above ￠ 80
Screw
Screw collar
(1) Check the damage status

(2) Check the plating layer of abrasion
(3) Observe whether the screw thread has any damage (the main body of screw)
(4) Observe whether anti-reversion ring and screw collar surface have any damage or
not. If damaged, it might cause the reverse flow of materials during injection.
4.9.2 Cleaning and Check the Heating cylinder

4.9.2.1 Cleaning the Heating cylinder
(1) Use brass brush to clean the resin dregs on the inside surface of heating cylinder
(2) Wrap cotton waste on the end surface of wood stick or bamboo stick to clean the
inside surface of cylinder. During the cleaning, cotton waste should be changed
accordingly.
(3) Clean the Heated cylinder head and nozzle, especially double contact surface on
these parts.
4-17
WARNING：
Please be very cautious in order not to cause any damage or
leave any abrasion on these surface. Surface abrasion might cause
resin leakage.
Front screw barrel
barrel
Nozzle
Contact surface Contact surface
(4)After decreasing the heating cylinder temperature to 30~50℃, wet some cotton
waste with solvent and clean the inside of the cylinder in accordance with Article 2 in
this section.
(5) Using the method illustrated below to check the inner surface of the cylinder and
ensure that it is clean.
check
Use torchlight Insert a piece

to light up of white paper
4.9.2.2 Check the heating cylinder body to see whether there is abrasion or other
damages on the inner surface.
4.9.3 Screw and heating barrel installation
4.9.3.1 Installation of screw tip
 Follow as chapter3.7.5 Fig, place the screw on two pieces of woods flatly.
 Grease a layer of supramoly or silicon oil on screw surface of screw Tip
 Insert cleaned collar seat, screw collar, mixed ring (some machine not
equipped) into screw Tip in order.
 Use special spanner fixed screw Tip, rotating reversal as chapter 3.7.5, finish
assembling the injection unit.
4.9.3.2 Installation of end cap (front barrel), nozzle and plasticizing unit
4-18
 Lifting the injection unit flat and smoothly. Rinsing it clearly.
 Pushing the injection unit into barrel slowly.(screw Tip toward outside)
 Aligning the hole in end cap and screw hole in the barrel. Tap the mating face
by copper rod to make two faces mating finely.
 Tighten bolt follow as chapter 3.7 indication. install end cap.
 Grease a layer of supramoly or silicon oil on screw surface of nozzle
 Screw the nozzle into end cap(front barrel) and make the mating faces
tightly.
Attention:
Turn the screw on the barrel tightly in accordance with torque given
in the following chart until the temperature of barrel, end cap (front
barrel) and barrel screw are balanced to be equal.
Grade 12.9 bolt Torque (N.m)
Diameter (mm)
10 40
12 40
16 160
20 400
24 500
30 600
36 700
4-19
4.10 Moving platen sliding foot adjustment
Moving platen slide-block device is an auxiliary device used to support moving
platen to ensure the 4 tie bars not to be bent (as illustrated in picture). If this device is
adjusted too tight, it will cause additional load in adjusting the mold and make it more
difficult to adjust the mold. If it is adjusted too loose, it will not perform well its function
to protect the tie bar from being bent. Therefore, it must be adjusted to the best
condition before delivery. As a result, there is no need to adjust it in new machines.
After the machine being put into use for a while, we must check whether it is loose or
not. If it is loose, we must adjust it.
moving platen
tie bar
flat locking bolt
upper slide foot internal hexagonal bolt
4.10.1Mechanical slide foot adjustment (for mini type machine)

Adjustable slide feet are equipped on the moving platen of mini type machine.
The leveling of slide guide under the clamping unit should be aligned first, then
dismount the mould. Press “clamp” key to stretch toggle linkage. Loosen flat locking
bolt (2PCS) as fig. Adjust the internal hexagonal bolt of every slide foot symmetrical to
let the moving length equally. Measure h1, h2, h3 (operating side) and h4, h5, h6 (non
operating side), by fine alignment to make each measure value equally. Then adjust
the mold thickness to see the system pressure changes during the mold adjustment.
Mounts mould for second test until get a satisfactory effect. Use more strength in
turning the flat locking bolt tight.
These is an additional coppering fixed bottom side of the lower slide block. After 2-3
years abrasion, it should be replaced timely if the coppering frayed highly.
4-20
4.10.2 Adjustment of the mechanically movable platen base for medium and
large-sized IMMs
The movable platen for medium and large-sized IMMs is provided with two pairs
of wedge base that can be adjusted. Before adjustment, be sure to firstly calibrate the
levelness of the guide way of the clamping unit of the machine, then remove the mold,
press the mold close movement key to straighten the link mechanism, loosen the
hexagon socket set screw with flat point on the base to symmetrically adjust the
socket head cap screw on each base to make the two pairs of the lower wedge on the
base move equally. Use an inside caliper to measure h1, h2, and h3 of the operating
side and h4, h5, and h6 of the corresponding non-operating side (as shown in Fig. 3),
and calibrate out the actual value against the outside micrometer (vernier caliper of
0.02 grade ) once a point is measured to make the values of each point equal. Then
press the mold height adjustment key to observe whether the system pressure and
movable platen are stable when the mold height is adjusted, install the mold after
adjustment and try again until satisfactory effect is achieved, and then lock the
hexagon socket set screw with flat point.
Copper gaskets are arranged on the bottom surface of the lower wedge of the
base. After about three years, the copper gaskets may be worn out. If they are
severely worn, replace them in time.
4-21
Fig. 3
4.10.2.1 How to adjust the supporting force:

The supporting force can be adjusted by the pressure relay, the range is between 2～
6 Mpa.
You shall adjust the force according to the mould weight. Please turn the adjusting
petiole on the pressure relay in clockwise to raise the force. If you want to reduce the
supporting force, please turn the petiole in counterclockwise meanwhile release the oil
outlet of accumulator to make the pressure lower than the value required, and then
adjust the screw to rise the force up.
Notes: When rise the force, the machine must be in manual mode and the
system pressure must be higher than the pressure required.
The optimal force has been adjusted before delivery; please don't
readjust it unless you really need to.
4-22
4-23
4.10.2.2 Pressure Packing of Accumulator:
The accumulator must be packed with nitrogen. Never use any other gases. The
packing is conducted through packing tool attached as an spare part. The process
starts with the cap on top of the accumulator released, mount the tool with high
pressure nitrogen connected, then open slowly the cock of the tool to achieve
regulated value of pneumatic pressure (about 2-3MPa for this machine). When
pneumatic pressure rises excessively, lower it to the defined range by drawing out the
venting cock. It requires regular inspection on pneumatic pressure in accumulator
during the operation to have it remain within defined range.
Attention: any other gas except nitrogen packing accumulator is not

permitted.
Note: If the pressure is lower or higher than the pressure regulated,

base support of moving platen will be disabled, thus go against the actions of
clamp open/close.
After the adjustment, put back the mold for second trial to see whether the adjustment
is satisfactory or not. We should often pay attention to check whether bolts are loose
so we can adjust it timely to optimize the machine’s performance.
4-24
4.11Temperature Setting Chart of Plastic and Barrel
The following chart only for reference. Actual temperature setting should be based on
long-time operation experiences.
temperature
Barrel
temperature
Contraction
Mold set
Density
Melting
Plastic
Point
Rate
(%)
middle
nozzle
tail
PS 1.05 130~165 0.4 10-75 180-260 200-260 160-250
HIPS 1.04~1.06 130~165 0.4 5-75 220-270 190-260 160-250
ABS 1.06~1.1 130~160 0.6 50-80 190-250 180-240 170-240
LDPE 0.91~0.93 108~126 1.5-5 35-60 230-310 220-300 170-220
HDPE 0.94~0.97 126~137 2.0-5 35-60 230-310 220-300 170-220
PP 0.95 160~176 1-2.5 50-80 210-300 180-260 160-240
PVC 1.35 160~212 0.1-0.5 10-60 170-220 160-195 150-195
PMMA 1.18 160~210 0.5 50-90 180-230 160-240 140-220
PA6 1.13 210~215 0.8-1.5 50-80 210-230 210-230 200-210
PA66 1.14 250~265 2.25 50-80 250-280 240-280 220-280
CA 1.3 69~105 0.5 40-75 180-200 170-190 150-180
PC 1.2 215~265 0.8 80-99 250-320 260-340 280-350
POM 1.41~1.42 165~175 2.0 50-90 190-210 175-220 160-210
4-25
Appendix1-Injection Molding Machine selection
How to Select an Injection Molding Machine
Since there exist many manufacturers of injection molding machine at present,
the machines provided are differ from each other in respect of specification, mold
and quality. The customers are required to select a proper machine that exactly
meets their needs according to the different molded parts. These parameters such
as use function, materials, outline, weight, and annual output should be considered
carefully before purchase.(for example: Injection molding machine be to make
plastic bucket should different as to make high accuracy instrument.) The following
technical parameters are essential in your selection.
Injection Weight: Injection weight be defined as the max weight of injection for
PS plastics without installation mould. Injection weight must transfer in accordance
with the follow formula if materials are not PS.
m=cb/1.05. b: plastics density. c: injection weight as for PS.
According to the practice, the total weight of the molded part is better to be
within 85% of the injection weight. Larger value shall be taken for those
non-crystalline materials and smaller for those of high viscosity.
Clamping Force：When melting plastic inject into mould, there are final locking
force caused by mould platen pressing mould are defined as clamping force. It is an
main technical data of the machine. It would result burr of inadequate clamping force.
Selecting the machine model, the locking force the molded part needs shall be
smaller than the clamping force of the machine. The correct locking force will be
obtained through analog calculation of the computer.
Injection Pressure & Injection Rate：Injection pressure means the maximum
pressure in the barrel at injection. There are 3 different types of screw under the
same clamping force on our machines. Screw A has the minimum diameter as screw
C the maximum. Comparatively, screw A may reach the maximum injection pressure.
Injection rate means the melt quantity from nozzle in unit time. Effective control
on flow at melt filling must be performed according to the characteristics of material
as well as the molded part. We have equipped accumulator device for a better
molding result.
Die Height & Maximum Stroke: The maximum and minimum die heights refer
to the mold thickness which is acceptable for the machine.
The stroke is so limited that the toggle stroke for part take-out must be less than
the maximum stroke of the machine.
Relevant Dimension in Mold Installation：The dimension of mold must fit that of
mold platens and tie bar space to allow the mold to be mounted without any difficulty.
A few points must be reckoned with: The center of main runner of the mold must
coincide with that of nozzle; the dimension of location ring in mold must be identical
with that of location recess in stationary platen; etc.
Screw & Barrel: This element affects the overall function of the machine.
Quality part requires melt in the barrel be well mixed and in uniformity. Moreover, the
material structure of screw & barrel is of great importance to the molding result. We'll
supply a host of plasticizing device as PVC special unit, PC special unit, and
Appendix1-Injection Molding Machine selection
bi-metallic screw & barrel, etc. When ordering the machine, customers shall indicate
clearly the raw material they want to process so as for the manufacture to prepare
corresponding screw & barrel.
Ejection Stroke：Rational selection of ejection stroke shall be encouraged
according to the shape of the product as well as designing structure of the mold. In
ordering, larger ejection stroke is better for varied products.
Microprocessor: Microprocessor’s capacity and working speed is a crucial
factor of product quality. It is in particular vital to reach high rate of finished products.
More check and adjust can microprocessor do, more repeatability products can
achieve. Proper controller shall be selected according to the product accuracy
required, for a good controller determines the proven performance and lower cost of
the machine.
Hydraulic System: At present, our machines except full electric machine adopt
proportional valves controlling the pressure; flow and direction to enable the injection
go on with good repeatability, stability, low noise, good sealing performance. These
hydraulic system features the machine in easy mounting and economical energy
consumption.
In short, multiple elements shall be considered in ordering machine. To select a

proper machine, customers need to know about main components of machines,
make a comparison in quality, price and performance of machines. In this way, you'll
find cost efficient machines which meet customers' needs.。
Appendix 2-Introduction of HAITIAN
 Chinese Excellent Civil –operating Enterprise

 The First Batch of National Innovative Enterprises
 The Core Enterprise Manufacturing Plastics Machinery of The National Torch Plans in
Beilun
 One of The Important New & High-tech Enterprises in China
 National Technical and Research Center
 China Top Brand
 Well-known Brand in China
 Chinese Export Top Brand
 President Company of China Plastics Machinery Industry Association (CPMIA)
 Deputy Executive of China Light Industry Machinery Association (CLIMA)
 ISO9001 CE Standard Certified Enterprise
General aspect Haitian Group with a history of about 4 decades, has been the
largest manufacturing base of plastic machinery in China at present. It
covers an area of over 1.5 million M² with total capital of over RMB 8 billion as well as
more than 5000 staff members among which 40% are college graduates and above. In
2009, its total value of production reached RMB 4 billion.
Product Haitian Group is a high-tech enterprise specializing in the manufacturing of
injection molding machines with more than 40 years of experience. "Haitian" Brand
machines are famous for their superior quality, high efficiency, low energy consumption,
high class and good technical service over plastic machinery industry nationwide. Its main
products consist of link series, vertical compression series and servo energy saving series,
two-platen machine and full electrical series. With the annual output of main products link
series exceeding 20,000 sets, Haitian have ranked top among its domestic competitors in
regard to the production as well as sales values, besides, the exportation of injection
molding machine has taken the lead too.
Quality Pursuing the aim of "Dedication, Devotion, Pioneering and Innovation", the
Science Technology Division determines a working target of " Originality & Innovation"
in accordance with the market demand, adopts world advanced UGII software and
CAD/CAM/CAE/CAPP technologies to optimize design as well as shorten developing
cycle needed for designing.
Since everyone in the company sticks to the principle of "Quality is the Essence",
production is now based on ISO9001 standards with such processes that each product
goes through stringent inspection in the selection of materials, machining
process and assembly. In particular, each machine must undergo a 72-hour continuous
test run before it is shipped.
Market First-class automated CNC machining centers have been imported from
developed countries like Japan, Germany, the U.S.A. and Britain with a view
to manufacturing highly precise mechanical parts of products. Meanwhile, world famous
electrical equipments and hydraulic components are applied in assembly for an
industry-leading injection molding machine in China in terms of outline, accuracy and
durability. Nowadays, the products have been found throughout the country and exported
in batch to over 80 countries and areas, including such developed countries as the U.S.,
Britain and Australia Agencies and service centers are set up in the U.S., Britain, Italy,
Canada, Brazil, etc. Being famous for high performance/price ratios in the realm of
injection machine worldwide, Haitian series products are accepted and praised by
more and more customers, domestically and overseas.
Service In order to strengthen business partnership with customers, Haitian has
established a service network covering every corner of the world under more than
40 years of unremitting effort. This makes the service work standard and specialized.
Service quality is promoted through 24-hour telephone inquiry and "Special telephone line
for claims" which is set up for customers to pour out their complaints. In the mean time,
Sales Engineering Division has been seeking customers' opinions on products at any time
so as to understand their needs. Original machine components are largely increased for
branches and offices to supply customers at more favorable price with higher efficiency.
According to the customers' need, a dedicated training plan is worked out for their
technicians so that the machine will go through a proper operation as well as
maintenance.
Advanced equipment along with superior modern management makes it possible for
Haitian to turn out high quality injection machines. Its user-friendly system is so favored
by customers that the demand for products exceeds the supply. In future, Haitian will
keep on providing excellent products as well as superior service to new and old
customers worldwide.
☆☆☆☆☆ Key Hand-over
24-Hour Project
Star Service
 Training
Claim from
Customers
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Chapter 5 Technical Parameters & Machine Outline
5.1 Data Sheet ···················································5-2
5.2 Mould Mounting Dimensions ····························5-3
5.3 Machine Dimensions & Installation Plan··············5-4
5.4 Machine Foundation & Mat Diagram ··················5-5
5.5 Cable Suspension Diagram ······························5-6
5.6 Machine Outline Diagram ································5-7
5.7 Hopper ·······················································5-8
5.8 Photo Sensor Installation ·································5-9
Designed/Date: Baohua Yang 2021-09-15 Checked/Date: Chuang Wang 2021-09-15
5-1
MA4800Ⅲ/h
5.1 Data Sheet:
A B
Screw Diameter mm 70 80
Calculated Injection Volume cm 3 1423 1859
Injection Capacity (PS) g 1295 1692
Injection Velocity g/s 700 914
Plasticization Capacity(GPPS) g/s 98 117
Injection Pressure MPa 224 171
Injection Speed mm/s 200
Injection Stroke mm 370
Screw Speed r/min 0~250
Heating Input Power KW 46.5
Clamping Force KN 4800
Space Between Tie-Bars (HxV) mm 830×830
Die-Height Available (Max.) mm 780
Die-Height Available (Min.) mm 320
Mold Opening Stroke mm 780
Open Daylight mm 1560
Ejector Stroke mm 200
Ejector Force KN 110
Ejector Number PC 17
Pump Motor Power KW 72+25
Oil tank Capacity l 830
Machine Dimension (LxWxH) m 8.70x2.28x2.70
Total Machine Weight (approx.) t 23.5
Minimal Mold Dimension (LxW) Mm 580×580
≥250—400mm μm 80
Die Die
＞400—630mm μm 100
parallelism height
＞630—1000mm μm 120
Note
Plasticizing capacity (GPPS): GB standard, with application of GPPS plasticizing
capacity of 3-zone screws
5-2
MA4800Ⅲ/h
5.2 Mould Mounting Dimensions
5-3
MA4800Ⅲ/h
5.3 Machine Dimensions &Installation Plan
Heng Zhang
09/10/2021
Mould Installation Surface on the Fixed Platen
5-4
MA4800Ⅲ/h
5.4 Machine Foundation & Mat Diagram
5-5
MA4800Ⅲ/h
5.5 Cable Suspension Diagram
6.7t
16.8t
Note: before suspension of the machine, it needs to be adjusted to keep balance.
5-6
MA4800Ⅲ/h
5.6 Machine Outline Diagram
Alarm Safety door Operating Hopper Safety cover

panel r
Lubricating oil pump product out gate Oil entrance Oil level
FRONT VIEW
Electric cabinet Nozzle cover Safety door
Oil tank Oil cooler
BACK VIEW
5-7
MA4800Ⅲ/h
5.7 Hopper
Note:
1. Drag the hopper after loosing the fastening screw, if feel hard to drag, re-loosing the
fastening nut.
2. Do not drag the hopper without loosing the fastening screw. Do not drag or pull the
hopper body directly. These will cause the damage of parts.
3. Hopper base can load Max.50kg weights. Replacing hopper or in other condition, if
hopper total weight over 50kg, it must replace the hopper base.
4. When the hopper in working condition, the fastening screw must be screwed to avoid
moving its position because of vibration.
5-8
MA4800Ⅲ/h
5.8 Photo Sensor Installation(Matching)
Photo sensor is mounted on the fixed board and screw out about 10mm distance
(see the following picture). You should adjust light alignment after installation. Observe
whether the checking signal on the I/O screen has changed or not when products drop
through the sensor light.
Mounting of photo sensor
Mounting of light reflection board
5-9
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Chapter6 Mechanism
6.1 Mold Clamping Structure ............................................................. 6-2
6.2 Injection Structure ......................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Nozzle ............................................................................................. 6-6
Designed/Date: Hui Jie 2019-06-24 Checked/Date: Chuang Wang 2019-06-24
6-1
MA4800Ⅲ/h
6.1 Mold Clamping Structure
6-2
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Parts List of Mold Clamping Structure
No Name Specification Quantity

1 O-Ring/Outer Collar 107.54X3.53 /BH2701150-PT00 2
2 Attrition Ring GP7301150-T47 2
3 Piston Ring PW4301150-Z20N 1
4 O-Ring 44.04×3.53 1
5 Y-Ring RUJ00075-Z20 1
6 Dust Seal WDJ300750-Z201 1
7 O-Ring/Outer Collar 82.14×3.53 2
8 Attrition Ring F3000005225097A270mm 2
9 Piston Ring OE090008300211D 1
10 O-Ring 37.69×3.53 1
11 Y-Ring RUJ000450-Z20 1
12 Dust Seal DH45 1
6-3
MA4800Ⅲ/h
6.2 Injection Structure
6-4
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Parts List of Injection
No Name Specification Quant

1 Nozzle PA3800-01-01(ZS) 1 ity
3 Y-RING RUJ301100-Z20 2
4 Attrition Ring GR6901100-T47 4
5 Stepseal RSK301100-T46N 2
6 O-RING / Collar 177.17×5.33/ BH4301900-PT00 4
7 Attrition Ring F3000005225150A580mm 4
8 O-RING 110.72×3.53 2
9 Piston Ring PW4401900-Z20N 2
11 Stepseal RSK301000-T46N 2
12 Y-RING RUJ301000-Z20 2
14 Bearing 8336 1
15 Bearing 1000934 1
16 Bearing 2007134 1
17 Dust Seal DH45 2
18 Rimseal RR1300450-Z52N 2
20 Stepseal RS1300450-T46N 2
21 O-RING / Collar 94.84×3.53/ XB10040010902XU 4
22 O-RING/ Collar 37.69×3.53/BH2700450-PT00 2
23 Attrition Ring GP6900700-C380 4
24 Glyd Ring T PT0200700-T46N 2
Ring
6-5
MA4800Ⅲ/h
6.3 Nozzle
6-6
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Chapter 7 Hydraulic
7.1 Hydraulic Circuit .............................................................7-2
7.2 Action Sequence of Solenoid Coil ..............................7-3
7.3 Hydraulic Components List ..........................................7-5
7.4 Valve Manifold.................................................................7-7
7.4.1 Pressure Valve Manifold .............................................7-7
7.4.2 Injection Valve Manifold ..............................................7-8
7.4.3 Clamp Valve Manifold ..................................................7-9
7.4.4 Ejector Valve Manifold .................................................7-10
7.4.5 Core Valve Manifold .....................................................7-11
7.5 Adjustment of Hydraulic System.................................7-12
7.6 Use and Maintenance of Bypass-Filter .....................7-13
7.7 Contrast of Hydraulic Component Model .................7-14
Attached sheet 1 Lube quality and lubrication parameter...7-16
Designed/Date: Li Risheng 2020-09-01 Checked/Date: Zhang Xufeng 2020-09-01
7-1
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7-2
Solenoid coil
DP3
D211
D203
D202
D210
D212
D213
D228
D229
D300
D208
D209
D200
D205
D204
D206
D207
D269
D104
D103
D601
D100
D101
D102
-
Slow
-
Fast
Clamp close
+
Low pressure
+ + + +
+ + + +
High pressure
Nozzle adv.
Injection
+ +
+ +
Hold pressure
+ + + +
+
+
Charge
+
Suck back
+
Nozzle ret.
Designed/Date: Li Risheng 2020-09-01

Slow
7.2 Action sequence of solenoid coil
Fast Open
7-3
+ + +
+
+ + +
Slow
+
Ejector adv.
Ejection
+
Ejector ret.
◎
Core A in
Core
◎
Core A out
◎
Core B in
Core
◎
Core B out
◎
Core C in
Core
◎ Core C out
◎
Core D in
Core
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Core D out
Checked/Date: Zhang Xufeng 2020-09-01

◎
Core release
+
Thick
Mold
+
Thin
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Note:
1."+" shows power in normal state, “-“ shows optional and "◎" for power if specially
functioned.
2. D300 energized when it open and close normally.When the front moving gate is
opend, screw down the travel switch.Then D300 lose power,and it can’t be closed.
7-4
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.3 Hydraulic Components List

No Symbol Code Name Model Description Remark
MTR1/ Motor &
1 A1091158 77kW-1800-YH System pressure HAITIAN
P1 Pump
MTR2/ Motor &
2 A1090972B 22KW-1800-YH System pressure HAITIAN
P2 Pump
Hydraulic
3 M1 110A004 HITMH16-1400-000-D47 Drive charge STF
Motor
Hydraulic BMR-BK01-315-2-A-D-G-N
4 M2 113A055 Drive mold adjustment
Motor 1&FSRD
5 F1 130A035 Filter ZF-100×300 Filter oil
6 F2 132018 Oil level SNK127V-O-O-12-R Oil level & temperature
7 F3 131000 Suction FSB.25.BM Filter air
Heat
8 F4 133024 SL-534u2FT Lower oil temperature
exchanger
Pressure KS-C-E-F-B35D-M-V,0.1-1 Test the system
9 F5 134A288 sensor 0.1V pressure Gefran
10 F6 130071 Filter ZF-100×200 Filter oil

11 V1 120065 Valve S-BG-06-L-40T270 System safety valve Yuken
12 V2 120065 Valve S-BG-06-L-40T270 System safety valve Yuken
Prevent flow
13 V5 848950 Valve T-09-183-00 HAITIAN
backwards
14 V8 122001 Valve DG4V-3-0AL-MUH5-60 Control charge motion Vickers
844177 T-09-119-00
15 V9 Valve Control charge motion
844155 T-09-113-00
844175XA T-09-135-00XA Adjust charge and
16 V10.1 Valve
844429XA T-09-167-01 back pressure
Adjust charge and
17 V10.2 125077 Valve 0811402036 Rexroth
back pressure
4WE10Y11-3X/CG24N9K4 Adjust charge and
18 V10.3 122130 Valve Rexroth
+074684 back pressure
DG5V-8-S-31C-T-M-U-H-1 Control injection and
19 V11 122A065 Valve Vickers
0 suck back
20 V12 122004 Valve DG4V-3-2C-MUH5-60 Control nozzle motion Vickers
124010 Nozzle adv. and hold
21 V13 Valve
MC-02P-05-20 pressure
22 V16 122004 Valve DG4V-3-2C-MUH5-60 Core B in & out Optional
23 V20 122004 Valve DG4V-3-2C-MUH5-60 Core A in & out Optional
Control ejector pin
24 V22 122215 Valve SWH-G03-C22-D24-20-M3 motion Northman
25 V25.1 122000 Valve DG4V-3S-0A-MUH5-60 Hydraulic safety Vickers
26 V25.2 126A048 Valve SFV-EL-32-3-A Hydraulic safety HNC
27 V27 122031 Valve DG5V-8-S-2C-T-M-U-H-10 Mold open & close Vickers
7-5
MA4800Ⅲ/h
28 V28 122A105 Valve SWH-G02-C4-D24-29S Mold adjustment motor HP

29 V29 122000 Valve DG4V-3S-0A-MUH5-60 Control braking Vickers
848068 T-09-178-00
30 V30 Valve Control braking
848079 T-09-104-00
V80,
31 124002 Valve MPC-02B-30-40 Prevent oil backwards
V82
V81,
32 122004 Valve DG4V-3-2C-MUH5-60 Core C,D in & out Optional
V83
V94,
33 123030 Valve RVE-R1/8-X-0.5 Prevent oil backwards Optional
V95
V96,
34 123030 Valve RVE-R1/8-X-0.5 Prevent oil backwards Optional
V97
WSM06020Z-01-C-N-24D
35 V99 122A074 Valve Core release Optional
G
Pressure System pressure
36 B1 135A043 gauge
Φ6040MPa display
Pressure Charge and back
37 B2 135A043 gauge
Φ6040MPa pressure display
Note: We have the right of changing hydraulic components model in case of special request or
further technical development. Model in detail should be found on the machine you order.
7-6
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.4 Valve Manifold
7.4.1 Pressure Valve Manifold
7-7
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.4.2 Injection Valve Manifold
7-8
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.4.3 Clamp Valve Manifold
7-9
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.4.4 Ejector Valve Manifold
7-10
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.4.5 Core Valve Manifold
7-11
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.5 Adjustment of Hydraulic System
Techniques of Electric-Hydraulic proportion control are applied to this machine to

make pressure and speed control more accurately.
The pressure and speed of each motion are adjusted by controller parameters.
Other adjustable hydraulic valves such as safety valves (in V7) have been set to the
optimal condition before shipment. It needs no adjusting in normal condition for clients.
But replacing these valves during maintenance or lower pressure accidentally should
readjusting pressure higher 10bar than system pressure. However, hydraulic valves
shall be adjusted in case of performing the following functions:
Adjusting back pressure

In case that the machine has no function of proportional back pressure (optional),
back pressure valve V10 shall be adjusted to change the pressure in order to meet the
technical requirements.
Note: If the function of proportional back pressure has been adopted, charge and
back pressure shall be adjusted on the computer.
7-12
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.6 Use and maintenance of bypass-filter

According to experiment and research, smudgy oil cause more than 80% trouble
to hydraulic equipments. In order to maintain oil's cleanness, the machine is equipped
a bypass-filter (illustrated by the following diagrams, applied in high-cleanness
machine) to decrease smudgy oil and avoid abrasion of the machine.
More days machines operate, more smudgy oils arise. The core inside filter filtrates
oil. Be sure to change a new core after having operated for some days due to oil's
cleanness.
As the following diagram, there is a pressure
gauge at the bottom of the filter whose rated pressure
is 0.5Mpa. In the course of operation, when the pointer
indicates less than 0.5Mpa, filter is in a good state.
When the pointer indicates more than 0.5Mpa, filter is
clogged and required to replace a new one.
Filter is in Filter is clogged and

a good state be sure to replace a
new one
As illustrated, before replacing a new core, stop the machine, loosen the handle
on the top cover and pull out the core. After mounting a new core, screw on the handle,
and then start the machine.
Notes: when attached packing is inadequate, contact Haitian or manufacturer of

filter directly.
7-13
MA4800Ⅲ/h
7.7 Contrast List of Hydraulic Component Model

No Code Name VICKERS Code REXROTH or other
1 120017 Relief valve CG2V-6FW-10 120040 HRF-G03-2-10
2 120005 Relief valve CG2V-8BW-10 120046 HRF-G06-1-E-31
3 120022 Relief valve CG2V-8BM-10 120046 HRF-G06-1-E-31
4 120016 Relief valve CG2V-8FW-10 120039 HRF-G06-2-10
Solenoid relief CG5V-6FW-D-MUHL5-20-
5 120002 120010 HSRF-G03-1PN-2-L-D24-20
valve EN7
Solenoid relief CG5V-8FW-D-MUHL5-20-
6 120003 120011 HSRF-G06-1PN-2-L-D24-20
valve EN7
7 120017 Relief valve CG2V-6FW-10 120024 DB10-2-5X/200-
8 120005 Relief valve CG2V-8BW-10 120025 DB20-1-5X/50Y
9 120022 Relief valve CG2V-8BM-10 120025 DB20-1-5X/50Y
10 120016 Relief valve CG2V-8FW-10 120029 DB20-2-5X/200-
Solenoid relief CG5V-6FW-D-MUHL5-20- DBW10B-2-5X/200-6SG24K4+074
11 120002 120026
valve EN7 684
Solenoid relief CG5V-8BM-D-MUHL5-20- DBW20B-2-5X/50-6SG24K4+0746
12 120004 120027
valve EN7 84
Solenoid relief CG5V-8FW-D-MUHL5-20- DBW20B-2-5X/200-6SG24K4+074
13 120003 120028
valve EN7 684
Manual reversal
14 122089 DG17V-3-2C-60 122112 4WMM6E5X
valve
Solenoid
15 122104 DG4V-5-0A-MUH6-20 122113 4WE10C3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
16 122017 DG4V-5-0AL-MUH6-20 122130 4WE10Y113X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
17 122178 DG4V-5-2B-J-MUH6-20 122114 4WE10EA3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
18 122018 DG4V-5-2C-J-MUH6-20 122115 4WE10E3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
19 122179 DG4V-5-31C-J-MUH6-20 122116 4WE10U3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
20 122105 DG4V-5-3C-J-MUH6-20 122117 4WE10L3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
21 122014 DG4V-5-6C-J-MUH6-20 122118 4WE10J3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
22 122186 DG4V-5-7C-J-MUH6-20 122119 4WE10M3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
23 122106 DG4V-5-2A-J-MUH6-20 122167 4WE10D3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
24 122013 DG4V-5-31B-J-MUH6-20 122249 4WE10UA3X/CG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
25 122001 DG4V-3-0AL-MUH5-60 122120 4WE6Y116X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
26 122000 DG4V-3-0A-MUH5-60 122121 4WE6C6X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
27 122003 DG4V-3-2AL-MUH5-60 122122 4WE6Y6X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
7-14
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Solenoid
28 122002 DG4V-3-2A-MUH5-60 122123 4WE6D6X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
29 122004 DG4V-3-2C-MUH5-60 122125 4WE6E6X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
30 122006 DG4V-3-31C-MUH5-60 122126 4WE6U6X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
31 122005 DG4V-3-3C-MUH5-60 122127 4WE6L6X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
32 122007 DG4V-3-6C-MUH5-60 122128 4WE6J6X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
33 122008 DG4V-3-7C-MUH5-60 122129 4WE6M6X/SG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16D6X/6SG24N9EK4+0746
34 122035 DG5S4-042A-MUH5-60 122132
reversal valve 84
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16EB6X/6SG24N9ETK4+07
35 122036 DG5S4-042BL-T-MUH5-60 122133
reversal valve 4684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16E6X/6SG24N9EK4/B10+0
36 122037 DG5S4-042C-MUH5-60 122134
reversal valve 74684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16E6X/6SG24N9EK4/B10P
37 122037 DG5S4-042C-MUH5-60 122194
reversal valve 4.5+074684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16E6X/6SG24N9ETK4/B10+
38 122038 DG5S4-042C-T-MUH5-60 122135
reversal valve 074684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16L6X/6SG24N9ETK4+074
39 122039 DG5S4-043C-T-MUH5-60 122136
reversal valve 684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16Y316X/6SG24N9K4+0746
40 122040 DG5S4-046AL-E-MUH5-60 122137
reversal valve 84
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16J6X/6SG24N9ETK4+0746
41 122042 DG5S4-046C-T-MUH5-60 122138
reversal valve 84
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16EA6X/6SG24N9ETK4+07
42 122041 DG5S4-042B-T-MUH5-60 122193
reversal valve 4684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH16U6X/6SG24N9ETK4+074
43 122103 DG5S4-0431C-T-MUH5-60 122168
reversal valve 684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH22C6X/6SG24N9EK4+0746
44 122098 DG5S-H8-0A-MUH5-60 122142
reversal valve 84
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH22E6X/6SG24N9EK4+0746
45 122090 DG5S-H8-2C-MUH5-60 122143
reversal valve 84
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH22E6X/6SG24N9ETK4+074
46 122031 DG5S-H8-2C-T-MUH5-60 122144
reversal valve 684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH22L6X/6SG24N9ETK4+074
47 122032 DG5S-H8-3C-T-MUH5-60 122145
reversal valve 684
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH22Y316X/6SG24N9K4+0746
48 122033 DG5S-H8-6AL-E-MUH5-60 122146
reversal valve 84
Electric-hydraulic 4WEH22J6X/6SG24N9ETK4+0746
49 122034 DG5S-H8-6C-T-MUH5-60 122147
reversal valve 84
Solenoid
50 122004 DG4V-3-2C-MUH5-60 122211 4WE6E6X/EG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
51 122006 DG4V-3-31C-MUH5-60 122212 4WE6U6X/EG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
Solenoid
52 122246 DG4V-3-2B-MUH5-60 122213 4WE6EA6X/EG24N9K4+074684
reversal valve
7-15
MA4800Ⅲ/h
Attached sheet 1 Lube quality and lubrication parameter

All of the joint sleeve(junior feet slip iron、pull rod sleeve、thrust bearing sleeve)in
the closing mold use graphite Cu sleeve,,dilute oil quantitative lubrication.
Require:Lubricating oil no.150
lubrication parameter setting：
First Front10000 modulus after10000 modulus

Self-lubricate modulus 1000（1~2000） 5000（2000~10000）
Lubrication alarm time 60S（30~60） 60S
Lubrication holding time 8S（5~30） 8S
Lubrication interval time 30S（0~30） 30S
Lubrication times 3（1~200） 2（1~8）
Second
Lubrication alarm time 30S（0-120）
Lubrication holding time 10S（0-30）
Lubrication interval time 7
All of the joint sleeve(junior feet slip iron、pull rod sleeve、thrust bearing sleeve)in
the
closing mold use graphite Cu sleeve,,dilute oil quantitative lubrication.
7-16
a b c d e f g h i j k m n p q r s t u
DIN_DKB_1
0
Item Description MA4800III/h

5
6
Manufacturer Haitian Plastics Machinery Group Co.,Ltd.
7
Project Name Plastics Injection Moulding Machine
8
Controller PILOT 5531-M12
50
10
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Cover

HAITIAN
Date 2021/8/19 Version Machine model MA4800III/h Page 1
0 Catalog ‎E-F06_001(新)
Page Page description Remark Date Drawn by

/1 Cover 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
1
/2 Catalog 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/3 Catalog 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/4 Components layout 1 2021/8/19 Administrator
2 /5 Components layout 2 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
/6 Components layout 3 2021/8/19 LIRILI
/7 Components layout 4 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
3 /8 Components layout 5 2021/8/19 SHIHONGSHU1

/9 Components layout 6 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/10 Main power supply circuit 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
/11 Main power supply circuit 2 2021/8/19 Administrator
4
/12 Motor circuit 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
/13 Motor circuit 2 2021/8/19 Administrator
/14 Motor cooling circuit 2021/8/19 LIRILI
5
/15 Socket circuit 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
/16 Heater circuit 1 2021/8/19 LIRILI
/17 Heater circuit 2 2021/8/19 LIRILI
6
/18 Fan and power supply circuit 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
/19 Motor start circuit 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
/20 Lubrication motor circuit 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
7 /21 Controller wiring circuit 2021/8/19 Li Rili
/22 Controller wiring circuit 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/23 Thermocouple module input 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
8 /24 Analog input 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
/25 Analog output and amplifier wiring 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
/26 Digital input module 1 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
9
10
/31 Digital output module 1 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Catalog

HAITIAN
0 Catalog ‎E-F06_001(新)
Page Page description Remark Date Drawn by

1
2 /38 Safety relay circuit 1 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/39 Safety relay circuit 2 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/40 Safety relay circuit 3 2021/8/19 HAITIAN
3 /41 Robot EU67 Interface 1 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong

/42 Robot EU67 Interface 2 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/43 Core interface circuit 2021/8/19 LIRILI
/44 Main Power Circuit 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
4
/45 Heating Circuit of Hotrunner 1 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/46 Thermocouple Input Module of Hotrunner 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
/47 Heating Output Module of Hotrunner 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
5
/48 List of components 2021/8/19 Shen ZiJie
/49 List of components 2021/8/19 Shen ZiJie
/50 List of components 2021/8/19 Chen Haidong
6
10
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Catalog

HAITIAN
S203
1
Purge guard closed
S228-1
Clamping guard 1
4 S277
Front door closed 3
S227
Front door closed 2
5
S202
Front door closed 1 S200
Rear door closed 1 S201-1
EMG1
6
10
S201-2 S226 S204 S228-2
EMG2 Rear door closed 2 Hydraulic safety valve check Clamping guard 2
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Components layout 1

HAITIAN
3
Heater 6 zone Heater 5 zone Heater 4 zone Heater 3 zone Heater 2 zone Heater 1 zone
E64 E63 E62 E61 E54 E53 E52 E51 E43 E42 E41 E33 E32 E31 E23 E22 E21 E12 E11
4
10
11

HAITIAN
1
MADE IN TAWAN CE
INPUT:110-120VAC 3.2A
220-240VAC 1.6A
230V
CAUTION: 115/230V INPUT VOLTAGE 50/60A
CAN BE SELECTED BY SWITCH.CHECK INPUT
VOLTAGE AVOIDING DAMAGE BEFORE POWER ON.
-G2 OUTPUT: +24 6.5A S-150-24 MW -AJ1
MADE IN TAWAN CE
INPUT:110-120VAC 3.2A -AMP0
220-240VAC 1.6A
230V
2 CAUTION: 115/230V INPUT VOLTAGE
CAN BE SELECTED BY SWITCH.CHECK INPUT
50/60A I/O tmIOT102
VOLTAGE AVOIDING DAMAGE BEFORE POWER ON.
OUTPUT: +24 6.5A S-150-24 MW
-G1 SPVA
TB1 TB4 TB5 TB6

4
DCOM
DA1
DA2
DCOM
DA3
DA4
DCOM
DA5
DA6
DCOM
DA7
DA8
O01
O02
O03
O04
O05
O06
O07
O08
O09
O10
O11
O12
O13
O14
O15
O16
O17
O18
O19
O20
O21
O22
O23
O24
O25
O26
O27
O28
O29
O30
O31
O32
HCOM
HCOM
H24V
SC
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5
TR6
TR7
TR8
TR9
TOA52
TO52
TOA53
TO53
TOA54
TO54
TOA55
TO55
Y
DL
MOTON
MOTOFF
ACO
ACIN
HCOM
H24V
DI1 NET1
DI2 (PANEL)
DO1
DO2
+24V
+10V NET5
AD1
AD2
ACOM
+24V AD3 NET4
COM AD4 RUN2 RUN1
ACOM
DA1 SCAN+ PILOT5531
DA2 SCAN-
DCOM COM
TALK2TALK1
DA3 TR
DA4 MCAN+
DCOM MCAN-
456
23
0
789
F 1
AB E
CD
7
+10V
AD1
AD2
ACOM
+10V
AD3
AD4
ACOM
+10V
AD5
AD6
ACOM
+24V
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
IN17
IN18
IN19
IN20
IN21
IN22
IN23
IN24
IN25
IN26
IN27
IN28
IN29
IN30
IN31
IN32
PCOM
P24V
TC1+
TC1-
TC2+
TC2-
TC3+
TC3-
TC4+
TC4-
TC5+
TC5-
TC6+
TC6-
TC7+
TC7-
TC8+
TC8-
TC9+
TC9-
TC10+
TC10-
8 -F1
-KA1 -KA2 -KA3
-KR1
-KA4 -KR10 -KR11 -K201 -KA15 -KX7 -K38 -K269 -KR12 -KR12-1
44 24 14 44
12
A1 13 23 33 A1 13 23 33 A1 13 23 33 A1 13 23 33 A1 13 23 33 A1 13 23 33 A1 13 23 33 44 34 24 14 44 34 24 14 44 34 24 14 34 44 34 24 14 34 24 14
S52 S34 41 42 S52 S34 41 42 S52 S34 41 42 S52 S34 41 42 S52 S34 41 42 S52 S34 41 42 S52 S34 41 42 14
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
42 32 22 12 42 32 22 12 42 32 22 12 42 32 22 12 42 32 22 12 42 32 22 12 11
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 wohner
AES 1x38
10x38
32A 690V 1 2
tyco SCHRACK tyco SCHRACK tyco SCHRACK tyco SCHRACK tyco SCHRACK tyco SCHRACK 3 4
31 110
PT52AL24B PT52AL24B PT52AL24B PT52AL24B PT52AL24B PT52AL24B
(BOTTOM VIEW) (BOTTOM VIEW) (BOTTOM VIEW) (BOTTOM VIEW) (BOTTOM VIEW) (BOTTOM VIEW) 5 6
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) 7 8
12 22 32 42 12 22 32 42 12 22 32 42 12 22 32 42 12 22 32 42 12 22 32 42
9 10
11 12
(5) (8) (7) (8) (5) (8) (7) (8) (5) (8) (7) (8) (5) (8) (7) (8) (5) (8) (7) (8) (5) (8) (7) (8)
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 13 14
(9) (10) (11) (12) (9) (10) (11) (12) (9) (10) (11) (12) (9) (10) (11) (12) (9) (10) (11) (12) (9) (10) (11) (12) 15 16
11 21 31 41 11 21 31 41 11 21 31 41 11 21 31 41 11 21 31 41 11 21 31 41
17 18
(13) (14) (13) (14) (13) (14) (13) (14) (13) (14) (13) (14) 19 20
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
24V 6A/250V~ 24V 6A/250V~ 24V 6A/250V~ 24V 6A/250V~ 24V 6A/250V~ 24V 6A/250V~
08
07
A2 COIL COIL A1 A2 COIL COIL A1 A2 COIL COIL A1 A2 COIL COIL A1

12-48
A2 COIL COIL A1 A2 COIL COIL A1
06
9 V
05
14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13
41 41 11 41 21 11 41 31 21 11 41 21 11 41 31 21 11
04
31 21 11 31 21 31 31
S11 S12 S21 S22 S11 S12 S21 S22 S11 S12 S21 S22 S11 S12 S21 S22 S11 S12 S21 S22 S11 S12 S21 S22 S11 S12 S21 S22
A2-
03
12 11 12 11 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9
10 9 10 9
EU67
02
A2 14 24 34 A2 14 24 34 A2 14 24 34 A2 14 24 34 A2 14 24 34 A2 14 24 34 A2 14 24 34
A1+
01
10
-P3
11

HAITIAN
-KH1 -Q250
T3
D2
M3
250
525
500
440
380/
R1
Compact
A
65
65
60
38
NS160 N
lr
N0(23) 43
100
100 ~ 660/690
100 ~
100 ~
100 ~
100 ~ 380/415
100 ~220/240
NC(41) 31
NC(42)32
NO(24)44
IEC/EN 60947-2
KW
1
Fe
Ui 750V Uimp 8KV
Merlin Gerin
VDE 0660
NK:99T403 AC-3
GB 14048.4
IEC/EN 60947
50
22
30
35
36
85
AC-1=1th=100A
Uimp=8kV
Ui=1000v(Main)
V~
440* 30
240* 18.5
690 30
550 37
Ue (V) Icu(KA) Ics%
0.9
160A *
0.8
5L3
6T3
to
ASUNE CEIBS UTE VDENEMA
trip
push
lm
3L2
80
4T2
P06033
800A
100 /
S1
1L1
4201S
2T1
lm lr
2
SC-N3
- ~
21 (31)NC
13 (13)N0
22 (32)NC
14 (14)NO
NS 160
TM 160D
40 C 160/
T1
-F11
-F21
-F22
-F31
-F32
-F41
-F42
-F51
-F52
-F61
-F62
-Q111 -Q113 -Q114 -Q136 -Q121
-Q161
-Q160
-Q131
JQ521 JQ521 JQ521 JQ551 JQ551 JQ551 JQ551 JQ521
wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner
AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 Moeller M Moeller M Moeller M Moeller M
Moeller M Moeller M Moeller M Moeller M
10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38
32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V
31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110
1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
C4 6000 C4 6000 C4 6000 6000 6000 6000 C1 6000 C4 6000
3 3 3 4 Xpole 4 Xpole 4 3 3
Xpole
PL9-C4/1
Xpole
PL9-C4/1
Xpole
PL9-C4/1
Xpole Xpole
PL9-C1/3
Xpole
PL9-C4/2
-KS1-1 -KS1-2 -KS1-3 -KS1-4 -KS1-5 -KS1-6 -KS1-7
1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2
THE THE THE THE THE THE THE

SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY
T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A
4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3
-KS2-1 -KS2-2 -KS2-3 -KS2-4
-T1
7
1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2 1 LOAD 480V AC 2
THE THE THE THE

SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY SOLID STATE RELAY
T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A T Y P E GTJ48-40A
4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3 4 -IN PUT 3-32VDC- + 3
-K3 -K12
34 32 24 22 14 12 TB3
9 9 8 7 5 3 4
SCHRACK
multimode
N R S T
10 11 6 1 2
A2 31 21 11 A1
10
11

HAITIAN
-Q103
-Q104
1 6 T3 4 T2 2 T1 -Q101
Merlin Gerin
Compact
NS100 N
Ui 750V Uimp 8KV
6 T3 4 T2 2 T1
Ue (V) Icu(KA) Ics%
NC 220/240 ~ 85 100
44 (24) Fuji Electric FA NC (14) 14
NHI-E-11-PKZO
380/
380/415 ~ 36 100 PL9-C1/3
1.54 1.53 3
1.62 1.61 32 (42) NO NO (32) 22 440 100 6000
Xpole
~ 35 0 C1
500 ~ 25 100
NHI-E TEST
525 100
LC1 LC2 ~ 22
660/690 ~ 8 100
1
0 250 50 100
IEC/EN 60947-2
103 90 690 ASUNE CEIBS UTE VDENEMA
1 55-63A 120 75 550 M

push Moeller
Ser.no.01 to
PKZM4-63 150 75 440* 80 /
100
M -KM1 trip
Moeller 150 45 240* JQ551
~V
A KW Ue lr lm TM 100D
800A 100/40 C
1 NS 100
0.8
0.9 ~ -
lr lm
*100A
SC-N7 D2 P06033 4201S

T3
2 M3
5 L3 3 L2 1 L1
R02 31 (41) NC NC (31) 21
43 (23)NO NO (13) 13
5 L3 3 L2 1 L1
FR1
5 -Q100
Merlin Gerin
Compact
NS250 N
Back Ui 750V Uimp 8KV
Ue (V) Icu(KA) Ics%

220/240 ~ 85 100
380/
380/415 ~ 36 100
440 ~ 35 100
Electric
500 ~ 30 100
Schneider
525 ~ 22 100
660/690 ~ 8 100
250 50 100
IEC/EN 60947-2
6 push
to 80 /
trip 100
lr lm TM 250D
800A 250/40 C
1 NS 250
0.8
0.9 ~ -
lr lm
* 250A
7
IV1 IV2
10
11

HAITIAN
-Q102
3
Merlin Gerin
Compact
NS100 N
Ui 750V Uimp 8KV
Ue (V) Icu(KA) Ics%

220/240 ~ 85 100
380/
380/415 ~ 36 100
440 ~ 35 100
Electric
500 ~ 25 100
Schneider
525 ~ 22 100
660/690 ~ 8 100
Thermocouple module 250 50 100
4 IEC/EN 60947-2
push
to 80 /
trip 100
lr lm TM 100D
800A 100/40 C
1 NS 100
0.8
0.9 ~ -
lr lm
* 100A
-F118
-F117
-F112
-F113
-F114
-F115
-F116
-F111
-Q122 -F153
TB7
6 JQ521
wohner wohner
wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner wohner
wohner AES 1x38 AES 1x38
AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38 AES 1x38
Moeller AES 1x38 10x38 10x38
M 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38 10x38
10x38 32A 690V 32A 690V
32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V 32A 690V
32A 690V 31 110 31 110
31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110 31 110
31 110
0
C4 6000
Xpole 3
PL9-C4/2
8
-T2 -KS100-1——-KS100-8
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIRIUS 3 160-690V SIRIUS 3 160-690V SIRIUS 3 160-690V SIRIUS 3 160-690V SIRIUS 3 160-690V SIRIUS 3 160-690V SIRIUS 3 160-690V SIRIUS 3 160-690V
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
3 UN 3 UN 3 UN 3 UN 3 UN 3 UN 3 UN 3 UN
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
300 600 300 600 300 600 300 600 300 600 300 600 300 600 300 600
0 69 0 69 0 69 0 69 0 69 0 69 0 69 0 69
20 0V 20 0V 20 0V 20 0V 20 0V 20 0V 20 0V 20 0V
Delay Delay Delay Delay Delay Delay Delay Delay

8 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 8 12
4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
0,1 S 0,1 S 0,1 S 0,1 S 0,1 S 0,1 S 0,1 S 0,1 S
9 3UG4513-1BR20 3UG4513-1BR20 3UG4513-1BR20 3UG4513-1BR20 3UG4513-1BR20 3UG4513-1BR20 3UG4513-1BR20 3UG4513-1BR20
12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14
22 21 24 22 21 24 22 21 24 22 21 24 22 21 24 22 21 24 22 21 24 22 21 24
10
‎独立热流道箱
11

HAITIAN
R
0
2L1 / 11.b:4
1 S
2L2 / 11.b:4
2
T
2L3 / 11.b:5
N
2N / 11.b:6
BK/R
BK/S
BK/T
35mm²
4 2 4 6
I> I> I>
-Q101
100A 1 3 5
5
BK/R1
BK/S1
BK/T1
BU/N
35mm²
35mm²
6 Customer Wiring Recommended:

Power Supply 380Vac,50Hz
Power 111kW
2 4 6 N
7 Nominal Current 197A -Q100
250A I> I> I> I>
Fuse 200A Setting 200A
Wire Size 120mm² U< 1 3 5 N

-Q100
8 Maximum
98m
Cable Length
PVC Copper
Cable Material
Cables
The unlabeled cross-sectional area
9
of the grounding wire is 1mm² by default.
of the other wire is 0.75mm² by default. 120mm² PE
2*35mm²
10
1
L1 L2 L3 N
12.b:2 / 1L1
12.b:2 / 1L2
12.b:1 / 1L3
1
16.t:10 / 3N
16.c:9 / 3L1
16.c:9 / 3L2
16.b:9 / 3L3
17.c:0 / 3N1
11 Motor circuit Heater

circuit
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Main power supply circuit
HAITIAN
-U -R -R:1 -R:2 -R:3 -R:4 -R:5

Busbar -S:5
-S -S:1 -S:2 -S:3 -S:4
1
-T -T:1 -T:2 -T:3 -T:4 -T:5
-N -N:1 -N:2 -N:3 -N:4 -N:5
2
BK/R
BK/T
10.t:0 / 2L1
BK/T
4
10.t:1 / 2L2 1 3
BK/S -Q121
10.t:2 / 2L3 4A 2 4
BK/R
25mm²
5
BK/400
BK/0400
14.g:1 / 5L1
14.g:0 / 5L2
14.g:0 / 5L3
BU/N
15.k:2 / 2N2
15.g:2 / 2N1
15.q:2 / 2N3
15.j:2 / 2L12
15.j:2 / 2L22
15.j:2 / 2L32
10.t:3 / 2N
15.f:2 / 2L11
15.f:2 / 2L21
15.f:2 / 2L31
15.p:2 / 2L13
15.p:2 / 2L23
15.p:2 / 2L33
25mm²
6
Socket circuit Socket circuit Socket circuit Motor 1
cooling circuit 1 2
-T1
500VA
7 380Vac/220Vac 3 4
RD/220
RD/0220
220V 0220V
18.d:1 18.d:1
10 19.p:7 19.c:9
19.s:7 19.r:7
Fan and
power
supply
11 circuit
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Main power supply circuit 2
HAITIAN
35mm² GNYE
-IV1
1 -KM1 Driver T1 T2
-FR1 -LC1
BK/T 5 6 T11 5 L3 6 T3 T12 L3 L3' T13 W1 W2 T14 W1 -M1
I>
10.k:10 / 1L3 L3 75kW W
BK/S 3 4 S11 3 L2 4 T2 S12 L2 L2' S13 V1 V2 S14 V1 M
‎Θ
I>
10.j:10 / 1L2 3 L2 V 3~
2 BK/R 1 2 R11 1 L1 2 T1 R12 L1 L1' R13 U1 U2 R14 U1
I>
10.j:10 / 1L1 L1 U
95mm² /19.c:8 95mm² 95mm² 2*35mm²
95mm² BK BK BK PE 77kW
95mm² GNYE
2*25mm² GNYE 2*25mm² GNYE 35mm²
-Q103 BK
250A
3
Setting 175A
DN15 ++ x1
T13 / 13.d:1
-- -R01
S13 / 13.d:2 x2
PB
4 -AJ1 R13 / 13.d:2
CAT CAT2
1 CAT / 21.g:3 to IV213.j:6 / CAT2
SLAVE IN
5
CAT1
1
6
1 Hi360
FAC 21.m:7 / B+ 24(P+)

FAC / 22.f:4 CN3
1
EtherNET MASTER SLAVE OUT

21.k:7 / B 23(P-)
7
24V B+ B+ / 21.m:7
0V B B / 21.k:7
GND ‎黑 ‎红
8 B
GND
B -BP1
GND 6
- 0V 24V
P 1-STO1+
BP1
PS1 2-STO1+
9 AI0 ‎白 +‎信号 3-STO1-
V 4-STO1-
PS2 PE 5-STO2+
AI1 Pressure sensor
6-STO2+
‎黑 ‎红 7-STO2-
10 8-STO2-
-BP2
- 0V 24V
+10V
P
BP2
AI3
‎白 +‎信号
11 GND
V
PE Pressure sensor
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Motor circuit
HAITIAN
16mm² GNYE
-IV2
1
Driver T1 T2
-LC2
T13 5 6 T23 W1 W2 T24 W1 -M2
I>
12.j:3 / T13 L3 22kW W
S13 3 4 S23 V1 V2 S24 V1 M
‎Θ
I>
12.j:4 / S13 L2 V 3~
2
R13 1 2 R23 U1 U2 R24 U1
I>
12.j:4 / R13 L1 U
16mm²
16mm² 16mm² 16mm² PE 22kW
16mm² GNYE
BK BK BK 16mm²
-Q104
3 50A
Setting 50A
DN15 ++ x1
-- -R02
x2
4 PB
12.k:4 / CAT2 CAT2

6
from IV1
Hi360
7
21.m:7 / B+ 24(P+)
CN3
21.k:7 / B 23(P-)
6
9
1-STO1+
2-STO1+
3-STO1-
4-STO1-
10 5-STO2+
6-STO2+
7-STO2-
8-STO2-
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Motor circuit 2

HAITIAN
0
11.q:5 / 5L3
11.q:5 / 5L2
11.q:5 / 5L1
1
BK/R
BK/S
BK/T
2 1.00
3
1 3 5
-Q136
3A 2 4 6
101
102
103
1.00
5
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

6 -K12
/19.h:6 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
8
104
105
106
1.00
U1 V1 W1
10
-M17
M
950W 3~
PE
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Motor cooling circuit
HAITIAN
11.k:5 / 2N2
11.h:5 / 2N1
11.j:5 / 2L12
11.j:5 / 2L22
11.j:5 / 2L32
11.p:5 / 2N3
11.g:5 / 2L11
11.g:5 / 2L21
11.h:5 / 2L31
11.n:5 / 2L23
11.n:5 / 2L33
11.m:5 / 2L13
2
BK/R
BK/S
BK/T
N/BU
BK/R
BK/S
BK/T
N/BU
BK/R
BK/S
BK/T
N/BU
2.5mm² 2.5mm² 2.5mm²
3
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
-Q111 -Q113 -Q114
FRBm6- FRBm6- MCB 16A
4 C16/3N/003-A C16/3N/003-A RCD 30mA
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
BK/R01
BK/S01
BK/T01
BU/N01
BK/R02
BK/S02
BK/T02
BU/N02
BK/R03
BK/S03
BK/T03
BU/N03
9
2.5mm² 2.5mm² 2.5mm²
L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 N PE L3 L2 L1 N PE
10 -X1 -X2 -X3
5P,400V,16A 5P,400V,16A 5P,400V,16A
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Socket circuit

HAITIAN
T1
0
T61 / 17.c:1
T62 / 17.c:1
1 S1
S61 / 17.c:2
S62 / 17.c:1
2
R1
R61 / 17.c:2
3 R62 / 17.c:2
BK BK BK BK BK
6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm²
1 1 1 1 1
4 -F11 -F21 -F22 -F31 -F32
6A 30A 16A 30A 16A
2 2 2 2 2
BK
T82
S82
R82
BK/H11 BK/H23 BK/H24 BK/H33 BK/H34
5 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm²
35mm²
6/T3 4/T2 2/T1
KH1
/19.r:6 5/L3 3/L2 1/L1 13 13 13 13 13
-KS1-1 -KS1-2 -KS1-3 -KS1-4 -KS1-5
6 /36.b:9 /36.d:9 /36.d:10 /36.e:9 /36.f:10
14 14 14 14 14
BK SSR SSR SSR SSR
T81
S81
R81
35mm²
BK/H1 BK/H21 BK/H22 BK/H31 BK/H32
6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm²
7 2 4 6
I> I> I>
-Q250
100A 1 3 5
8 Setting 90A
BK/T8
BK/S8
BK/R8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
35mm² PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE
-E1 -E2 -E3 -E4 -E5 -E6 -E7 -E8
9 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm²
16mm²
10
10.r:10 / 3L1
10.s:10 / 3L3
10.s:10 / 3L2
BU/N
-PE
6mm² -3N / 10.s:10
Heater 1 zone Heater 2 zone Heater 3 zone
11
‎1Xφ42×35,250W ‎2XΦ245X70,2400W
‎1Xφ100×55,950W ‎1Xφ190×75,2700W ‎3Xφ190×75,2700W
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Heater circuit 1

HAITIAN
10.t:10 / -3N1
1 16.t:0 / T62
16.t:0 / T61
16.t:2 / S62
16.t:1 / S61
2
16.t:3 / R62
16.t:3 / R61
BK BK BK BK BK BK
6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm²
3
1 1 1 1 1 1
-F41 -F42 -F51 -F52 -F61 -F62
4
30A 16A 30A 30A 30A 30A
2 2 2 2 2 2
BK/H43 BK/H44 BK/H53 BK/H54 BK/H63 BK/H64

5 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm²
13 13 13 13 13 13
6 -KS1-6 -KS1-7 -KS2-1 -KS2-2 -KS2-3 -KS2-4
/36.g:9 14 /36.g:10 14 /36.h:9 14 /36.i:10 14 /36.j:9 14 /36.j:10 14
SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR
BK/H41 BK/H42 BK/H51 BK/H52 BK/H61 BK/H62 BU/N

7 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm² 6mm²
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE
-E9 -E10 -E11 -E12 -E13 -E14 -E15 -E16 -E17 -E18 -E19
9
2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm² 2 6mm²
16mm²
1
10 -PE
Heater 4 zone Heater 5 zone Heater 6 zone

11
‎3Xφ190×75,2700W ‎4Xφ190×75,2700W ‎4Xφ190×75,2700W
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Heater circuit 2

HAITIAN
0
-Q160
220 1 2 220A
11.s:9 / 220V
3A
1 11.t:9 / 0220V
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
-MF1
M -MF2
M -MF3
M -MF4
M -MF5
M -MF6
M -MFF1
M -MFF2
M
/44.r:3 1~ /44.s:3 1~ /44.t:3 1~ 12W 1~ 12W 1~ 12W 1~ KS1 1~ KS2 1~
12W 12W 12W
3 1
-Q161
3A 2
220B
4
6 -G1 -G2
300W 150W
CC
PE PE
7 1
24
024
-F1
10A
2
C
C-
24 024
8
21.c:9 21.c:9
21.c:4 21.c:4
C C- 21.r:9 21.r:9
21.d:9 21.e:9 22.c:4 22.e:4
19.h:7 21.f:9 25.h:9 25.h:9
9 19.j:7 19.g:7
19.m:7 19.i:7
20.e:1 19.k:7
21.d:7 20.e:1
21.k:0 21.e:7
10 32.t:11 21.f:7
34.t:11 21.k:1
35.s:10 35.t:9
35.t:4 40.s:7
37.s:10
38.f:1
11
38.g:1
40.m:7
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Fan and power supply circuit
HAITIAN
1
-U1
Motor cooling circuit Lubrication
Motor on 52A 52 53A 53 54A 54 SC 55A 55 AC In
2
12 13 15 220 C419 C- C219 C- C421 220 220 200 220 220
220
200
220
12
C-
C419
C-
C219
C-
C421
12 / 38.s:9
4
02 / 38.h:1
02
6
A1 A1 A1 A1
-K12 -K3 -KR1 -KH1
A2 A2 A2 SC-N5APM-CF A2
Heater
7
ON
0220V 220V
C- C C- C C- C 220V 11.t:9
18.f:8 18.e:8 18.f:8 18.e:8 18.f:8 18.e:8 11.s:9 11.s:9
x1
A1
8 -KM1 -RC1 1/L1 2/T1 /14.k:6 13 14 /20.n:6 13 14 /41.h:3
SC-N8 A2 3/L2 4/T2 /14.k:6
x2 5/L3 6/T3 /14.k:6
Motor
on
0220V
11.t:9
1/L1 2/T1 /16.c:5
10
1 L1 2 T1 /12.f:2 3/L2 4/T2 /16.c:5
3 L2 4 T2 /12.f:2 5/L3 6/T3 /16.b:5
5 L3 6 T3 /12.f:1
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Motor start circuit
HAITIAN
1 18.f:8 / C-
18.e:8 / C
1
-Q131
3 3A 2
44
5
21.k:7 30.h:7 13
B B276 PE -K3
/19.j:6 14
6
7
41
4 5 8 1 2
13
LS13 -M13
M
10 40W 1~
x2 x1 14
PE
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Lubrication motor circuit
HAITIAN
0
18.e:8
18.f:8C
C-
DCOM
DA1
DA2
DCOM
DA3
DA4
DCOM
DA5
DA6
DCOM
DA7
DA8
O01
O02
O03
O04
O05
O06
O07
O08
O09
O10
O11
O12
O13
O14
O15
O16
O17
O18
O19
O20
O21
O22
O23
O24
O25
O26
O27
O28
O29
O30
O31
O32
HCOM
HCOM
H24V
SC
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5
TR6
TR7
TR8
TR9
TOA52
TO52
TOA53
TO53
TOA54
TO54
TOA55
TO55
Y
DL
MOTON
MOTOFF
ACO
ACIN
HCOM
H24V
DI1 NET1
DI2 (PANEL)
DO1
3 DO2
+24V
+10V 12.e:4 / CAT NET5
AD1
AD2
ACOM
18.i:8 / 24 +24V AD3 NET4
COM AD4 RUN2 RUN1
SCAN+ / 21.c:10
4 18.j:8 / 024 ACOM
SCAN+
SCAN- / 21.c:11
DA1 PILOT5531
DA2 SCAN- 21.c:10
DCOM CANGNG CAN /
TALK2TALK1 21.s:10
DA3 TR
DA4 MCAN+ MCAN+ / 21.s:10
DCOM MCAN- MCAN- / 21.s:10
456
23
0
789
F 1
AB E
5 CD
+10V
AD1
AD2
ACOM
+10V
AD3
AD4
ACOM
+10V
AD5
AD6
ACOM
+24V
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
IN17
IN18
IN19
IN20
IN21
IN22
IN23
IN24
IN25
IN26
IN27
IN28
IN29
IN30
IN31
IN32
PCOM
P24V
TC1+
TC1-
TC2+
TC2-
TC3+
TC3-
TC4+
TC4-
TC5+
TC5-
TC6+
TC6-
TC7+
TC7-
TC8+
TC8-
TC9+
TC9-
TC10+
TC10-
7 18.e:8 18.f:8 18.f:8

C C- C-
B B+
12.g:7 12.g:7
12.m:7 12.m:7
13.k:7 13.k:7
20.i:6 26.r:11
8 26.t:10 27.s:11
HV HCOM HCOM 27.s:11 28.q:11
28.q:10 29.t:11
29.t:11 35.s:4
30.t:10 38.f:1
FGND HV HCOM HCOM 35.s:9 38.q:1
38.f:9 39.e:1
9 38.g:2 39.q:1
18.i:8 / 24 +24V +24V 24 / 18.i:8
38.q:9 40.h:3
38.s:2 40.n:5 COM
18.j:8 / 024 COM 39.e:9 41.c:2
024 / 18.j:8
FGND
39.g:2 42.b:1
C C- C- CAN+ MCAN+ / 21.h:5
39.q:8 42.b:10
40.h:8 43.r:9 CAN-
18.e:8 18.f:8 18.f:8 MCAN- / 21.h:5
10 40.n:4 CANGND
40.s:4 CAN / 21.h:4
TRM
21.h:4 / CAN 41.b:2
SCAN IN I/O tmIOT102 42.b:4
21.h:4 / SCAN+ 42.f:0
21.h:4 / SCAN- 43.r:9
11
Thermocouple Module
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Controller wiring circuit
HAITIAN
-U1
1
Data lock+
auto door open button auto door close button
+24V COM NET2
2
24 024 FAC
18.i:8 18.j:8 12.d:7
5
13
-S1
14
9
CAN+
CAN-
COM/GND
+24V
COM
MANUAL KEY
RESET
COM
DOOR OPEN
DOOR CLOSE
COM
SPARE 1
COM
SPARE 2
COM
10
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Controller wiring circuit
HAITIAN
-Temperature
1
2
10+ 10- 1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- 5+ 5- 6+ 6- 7+ 7- 8+ 8-
18+
18-
0+
0-
1+
1-
2+
2-
3+
3-
4+
4-
5+
5-
6+
6-
5
10 -1TC18
-1TC00 -1TC01 -1TC02 -1TC03 -1TC04 -1TC05 -1TC06 2.5m
4.0m K-3.5M 2.5m 2.5m 2.0m 2.0m 1.5m Hopper Temp.
Thermocouple Heater Heater 2 Heater 3 Heater 4 Heater 5 Heater 5 Check
1 zone zone zone zone zone zone
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Thermocouple module input
HAITIAN
-U1-Analog input
2
+10V AD2 ACOM +10V AD1 ACOM +10V AD3 ACOM +10V AD4 ACOM
I201 I202 I203 I101 I102 I103 I211 I212 I213 I111 I112 I113
I201
I202
I203
I101
I102
I103
I211
I212
I213
I111
I112
I113
4
-R2 -R1 -R3 -R4

9 2 2 2 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
10
Mold Position Screw position Ejector Position Injection unit position

11
PE
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Analog input

HAITIAN
1 -U1-Analog output
2
DA1 DA2 DCOM DCOM DA3
DA1 DA2 DCOM DCOM DA3
PP3- PP3+
P1+
F1+
F1V AMP0
2 1
6 V
PE
85C-1，DC15V
Proportional
back -DP3
pressure+
7 8 -P3
x1 x2 P3 x1 x2
7 A
P1+
F1+
PF-
SPVA 6
PE
8
PE
9 024 / 18.j:8
5
4 24 / 18.i:8
3
2
10
1
11
Remarks:AMP0 is In the computer package.
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Analog output and amplifier wiring
HAITIAN
1
-U1-Digital input module 1
Carriage
forward State of oil level Accumulator Carriage back Safety Gate Servo control Safety relay
position oil filter checker Srew sensor Charge Hopper Detect position Nozzle Input2 temperature reset
2 B100 B101 B102 B103 B104 B105 B107 B122 B123 B124
B101
B102
B103
B124
5 B124
38.s:2
39.g:2
11
S101-2 P
12
8
3
11 11
-S101 P -S102 -S103
9 + -
12 12
1 2
10
B / 21.k:7
B+ / 21.m:7
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Digital input module 1
HAITIAN
1 -U1-Digital input module 2

enough
enough lubrication
Rear Door Emergency Stop Front Door Safety Gate hydr. close Mold completely Ejector Mold Adjust lubrication pressure 2
2
Closed button front Closed Nozzle Input safety closed back Top Guard Sensor pressure Core 1 In
B210
B200 B201 B202 B203 B204 B205 B206 B207 B208 B209 B211
B200
B201
B202
B203
B204
B205
B206
B208
B209
B211
13
5 -S206_2
B211
14
28.a:7
B206A
6
21 13 3 3 13
13 42 13 13
-KR11 -KR10 -S203 -KA15 -S205 -S206 -S208 S209 P
9 K201 + - + -
/40.c:7 14 /40.e:7 /40.g:7 14 /39.n:6 22 /40.r:4 14 14 14
41 1 2 1 2
10
B / 21.k:7
11
B+ / 21.m:7
HAITIAN
1
(Selection)
Mechinical E12 Mold E12 Mold E12 Robot Safety Relay E12 Ejector
Core 2 In(Reserve) Core 1 Out Core 2 Out(Reserve) Core 3 IN Core3 Out Safety bar area free Close Enable operation mode （E12 EMG） Forward E12 Ejector Back
2
B212 B213 B214 B215 B216 B217 B218 B219 B220 B221 B222 B223
B217
B219
B212
B213
B214
B215
B216
4
B219
42.b:3
6
B211
27.t:5
3
-S217
- +
8 2 1
9 11 10 12 9 10
1 3 4 1 2
2
10
B / 21.k:7
B+ / 21.m:7
11
HAITIAN
1 -U1-Digital input module 4

(Selection) (Selection)
Front Door Limits for Min Limits for Max Air Press
E12 Core In E12 Core Out Closed 2 Photo sensor mold height mold height Check Servo Alarm
2
B224 B225 B227 B229 B230 B231 B232 B234
B229
B230
B231
4
3 13 13
-S229 -S230 -S231
9 + -
1 2 14 14
10
B / 21.k:7
11 B+ / 21.m:7
HAITIAN
1
Front door Core release Bypass relay Lubrication (Selection) (Selection) Guide accumulating Emergency stop Lubrication inspection
2 pressure test monitoring of tail plate support
open the CE valve: pressure: feedback oil level check Core D IN Core D OUT Cycle start Cycle stop
B236 B277 B269A B900 B276 B253 B254 B272 B273 B358 B412 B413
3
B412
B413
B269A
B276
B253
B254
B272
B273
B277
4
-B412
5 38.h:2
11
13
S269
-S277
6 12 13 11
/40.n:7 14 13
-S272 -S272 -S413 P
/30.n:6 14 /30.m:6 12
14
7
B276 7 8
20.j:6
3 4
B / 21.k:7
10
11
HAITIAN
1
-U1-Digital output module 1
No back MOOG MOOG Hold
Injection Nozzle Mold Adj. Mold Adj. Mold close
pressure Hold release Injection pressure
valve Charge forward Forward Backward valve
2
C105 C106 C108 C109
C100 C102 C103 C208 C209 C200
C100
C102
C103
C208
C209
C200
4
C100 C102 C103

39.r:1 39.r:1 39.s:1
39.r:8 39.r:8 39.s:8

6
C100A C102A C103A
C100A
C102A
C103A
8
9
-D100 -D102 -D103
-D208 -D209 -D200
TB4
-D102.1
10
C1 / 39.f:9
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Digital output module 1
HAITIAN
1
2
‎储料补油阀
Pump3 Pump4 Pump5 Pump6 Pump7 Pump8 Pump9 Pump10 Pump11 ‎(预塑补油阀) Cool Oil Barrel cooling water
C112 C113 C114 C115 C116 C117 C118 C119 C120 C604 C122 C131
3
C122
C131
-D122 -D131
10
C / 18.e:8
11
HAITIAN
1 -U1-Digital output module 3
Mold open Ejector Ejector

Mold open Slowly forward backward Core 1 In Core 1 Out Core 2 In(Reserve) Core 2 Out(Reserve) Core 3 In Core 3 Out
2
C202 C203 C204 C205 C206 C207 C210 C211 C212 C213
C204
C205
C206
C207
C210
C211
C212
C213
4
-D204 -D205 -D206 -D207 -D210 -D211 -D212 -D213

TB5
10
C2 / 39.f:9
11
HAITIAN
1
-U1-Digital output module 4 Mold open
slowly
(mold open
Nozzle Mold low Mold open Red alarm Yellow alarm Green alarm
Storage back
2 Suckback backward open pressure) celerity Buzzer lamp lamp lamp Air valve 1
pressure closing valve
C101 C104 C202 C203 C227 C753 C220 C221 C222 C223
C601
C601
C101
C104
C202
C203
C753
C220
C221
C222
C223
9
x1
-D601 -D101 -D104 -D202 -D203 x1 x1 x1
-L1 -L1 -L1 -L1
TB6 Buzzer Alarm Lamp x2 Alarm Lamp x2 Alarm Lamp x2 -D223
x2 Red Yellow Green
10
C2B.2 / 39.i:9
C / 18.e:8
11
HAITIAN

1 Tail plate bracket
Injection
lubrication
+Mold close
Air valve 2 reversing valve Air valve 3 Air valve 4 Air 5 Air 6 Air 7(Reserve) Air 8(Selection) Confluence valve Valve gate 1 Core release
C165
C224 C335 C242 C243 C244 C245 C246 C247 C218 C250 C269
C335
C242
C243
C244
C245
C246
C247
C250
C269
C224
3
4 21.m:7 18.e:8
B+ C
23 23
6 K269 K269
/35.r:9 24 /35.r:9 24
B269
C269A
7
x1
-L269 -D269
x2
-D335
A2
-D224 -D242 -D243 -D244 -D245 -D246 -D247 -D250 -K269
9 A1
B C-
21.k:7 18.f:8
10
C / 18.e:8
23 24 /35.s:6
23 24 /35.t:6
11
HAITIAN

1
Hearting 1 Hearting 2 Hearting 3 Hearting 4 Hearting 5 Hearting 6 Hearting 7 Hearting 8 Hearting 9

C400 C401 C402 C403 C404 C405 C406 C407 C408 +24V
2
3
+24
C400
C401
C402
C403
C404
C405
4
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
-KS1-1
9
A1 -KS1-2 A1 -KS1-4 A1 -KS1-6 A1 -KS2-1 A1 -KS2-3 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
-KS1-3 A1 -KS1-5 A1 -KS1-7 A1 -KS2-2 A1 -KS2-4 A1

10
11 13 14 /16.g:6 13 14 /16.k:6 13 14 /16.q:6 13 14 /17.f:6 13 14 /17.m:6 13 14 /17.t:6

13 14 /16.j:6 13 14 /16.p:6 13 14 /17.e:6 13 14 /17.j:6 13 14 /17.q:6
HAITIAN
1
Bypass Mold Opening Mold Clamping

Motor on command relay Valve gate 1 Begin To Stop Begin To Stop
2 C250 C300 C333
C417 C900
C300
C333
4
9 A2 A2
-K38 -KX7
A1 A1
10
C / 18.e:8
33 34 /40.q:8 33 34 /40.q:7
11
HAITIAN
1
21.m:7 18.e:8 18.e:8 19.d:5 21.m:7 38.f:9 38.g:9 38.h:9
B+ C C 02 B+ C1A C2A 03
2
21.k:7 30.r:4 21.k:7 26.q:5
B B412 B B124
-KA3 -KA2
A1 13 23 33 A1 13 23 33
4
S52 S34 41 42 S52 S34 41 42
POWER POWER
-KR12-1 -KR12 -S200

34 33 304 34 33 305 205 14 13 206
6 -S201_2 -S201_1
/42.d:2 /42.c:1 /40.c:3
301A 22 21 302A 22 21 303A
/38.c:8 /38.b:8
7 -S201_1 -S201_2 S22 /40.e:5 /40.e:3 S11 S12 S21 S22
S11 S12 S21 -KR12 -KR12-1 -S226
303 12 11 302 12 11 301 305A 34 33 304A 34 33 210 11 12 209
A2 14 24 34 /42.c:1 /42.d:2 A2 14 24 34 /40.c:5
8
/38.j:6 /38.i:6
/40.e:3 /40.e:5
9
B C1A C2A 03 B C1B C2B.0 12
21.k:7 38.q:1 38.r:1 38.s:1 21.k:7 39.f:1 39.i:9 19.d:4
10
EMG STOP SAFETY RELAY REAR DOOR SAFETY RELAY
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Safety relay circuit 1
HAITIAN
0
21.m:7 38.q:9 39.i:9
B+ C1B C2B.1
21.m:7 31.b:4 31.d:4 31.f:4

1 B+ C100 C102 C103
21.k:7 26.q:5
B B124
2
-KA1 -KA4
3
A1 13 23 33 A1 13 23 33
S52 S34 41 42 S52 S34 41 42

4
POWER POWER
5 -S202
213 14 13 214
/40.g:3
212
6 14
-S203
S11 S12 S21 S22 /27.f:9 13 S11 S12 S21 S22
-S227 Safety Nozzle
217 11 12 216
211
7
A2 14 24 34 /40.g:5 A2 14 24 34
C2B.0 / 38.r:9
C2C / 39.g:9
B C100A C102A C103A
21.k:7 31.b:6 31.d:6 31.f:6
9
TB 21 20
B C1 C2
21.k:7 31.r:10 33.t:10 C2C
39.i:9
10
FRONT DOOR SAFETY RELAY NOZZLE SAFETY RELAY

39.f:1 / C2B.1
34.j:11 / C2B.2
11
HAITIAN
B+ / 21.m:7
3
23
23
21
-S201_1 -S202 24
-S200 24
/38.b:8 22 /39.c:5
/38.m:6 KA15
/38.j:6
4
B204A A1 A2
21.k:7 / B - B / 21.k:7
B200A
B201A
B202A
+
21.m:7 / B+ 13 14 /27.h:9
5 21
21
21
-S201_2
-S226 22
/38.c:8 22
/38.t:8 -S227 22
/38.i:6
/39.i:7
6
B202B
B200B
B201B
A1 A1 A1
7 -KR11 -K201 -KR10 -S277 -KX7
A2 A2 11 12 335 33 34 336
A2 18.e:8 / C C- / 18.f:8
/30.c:6 /37.j:9
-D300
B / 21.k:7 -K38
8
33 34
13 14 /27.b:9 33 34 /41.f:1 /37.h:9

13 14 /27.e:9
33 34 /41.e:2 33 34 /41.g:2 13 14 /41.h:2
43 44 /41.f:2 42 41 /27.c:9 23 24 /41.i:2
9
10
11
HAITIAN
1 -K201
34 33 SR1 Signals from the Injection Machine to Robot
41.g:7 / SC1 -K201 ZA1
/40.e:7 34 33 SR2
B / 21.k:7
B+ / 21.m:7
41.g:7 / SC2 ZA2
KR11 KR10
34 33 SR3A /40.e:7 14 13 SR3 PIN-NR Function
2 41.g:8 / SC3 ZA3
KR11 KR10
/40.c:7 44 43 SR4A /40.g:7 24 23 SR4
41.g:8 / SC4 ZA4
-Robot
/40.c:7 /40.g:7 ZA1-ZC1 emergency stop of machine channel 1
ZA5
AJ1
H24V:
3 SR6 ZA2-ZC2 emergency stop of machine channel 2
HCOM:
41.d:9 / SR6 ZA6
HCOM: -KR1
14 13 SR7 ZA3-ZC3 safety devices of machine channel 1
41.d:7 / SR9 ZA7
IN8: /19.m:6
ZA8 ZA4-ZC4 safety devices of machine channel 2
IN7: B221 B221 / 42.b:0
4
41.d:7 / SR9 SR9 ZA9 ZA5 reject (optional)
IN6: B225 B225 / 42.b:6
41.d:10 / SB2 SB2 ZB2 ZA6 mould closed
IN5: B224 B224 / 42.b:6
41.d:10 / SB3 SB3 ZB3 ZA7 mould open position
5 IN4: B223 B223 / 42.b:5
41.d:10 / SB4 SB4 ZB4 ZA8 intermediate mould opening position
IN3: B222 B222 / 42.b:5
41.d:9 / SB5 SB5 ZB5 ZA9 24V/DC (ROBOT)
IN2: B218 B218 / 42.b:2
41.d:9 / SB6 SB6 ZB6 ZB2 automatic
6 B220
IN1: B220 / 42.b:5
ZB7 ZB3 ejector back position
H24V:
ZB8 ZB4 ejector forward position
7
001A614 SC1 ZB5 core pullers 1 in position 1
41.g:4 41.e:1 / SC1 ZC1
COM: SR9 SR9 /
41.g:3 41.e:2 / SC2 SC2 ZC2 ZB6 core pullers 1 in position 2
COM:
41.e:2 / SC3 SC3 ZC3 ZB7 core pullers 2 in position 1
8
O8:
41.e:2 / SC4 SC4 ZC4 ZB8 core pullers 2 in position 2
O7:
ZC5 ZC5 reserved for future use of EUROMAP
O6: SR6 (C428) SR6 / 41.g:3
SB6 (C427)
9 O5: SB6 / 41.g:6
O4: SB5 (C426) SB5 / 41.g:6
O3: SB3 (C424) SB3 / 41.g:5
ZC9 ZC9 0V/DC (ROBOT)
10 SB4 (C425)
O2: SB4 / 41.g:5
O1: SB2 (C422) SB2 / 41.g:4
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Robot EU67 Interface 1
HAITIAN
0 -KR12 -KR12-1
14 13 B221A 14 13
41.d:4 / B221 B / 21.k:7
/42.c:1 /42.d:2
1
Signals from Robot to the Injection Machine
-KR12
A2 A1 VR1
21.m:7 / B+ -KR12-1 A1
A2 A1 VR2 PIN-NR Function
A2
2 B218
41.d:6 / B218
A3
13 14 /42.d:0 A1-C1 emergency stop of machine channel 1
13 14 /42.c:0
33 34 /38.b:6 A4
33 34 /38.c:6
33 34 /38.j:8 A2-C2 emergency stop of machine channel 2
33 34 /38.i:8
3
A5
28.m:5 / B219 B219 A3-C3 Mould area free
A6
A4-C4 reserved for future use of EUROMAP
A7
A5 reject (optional)
4 A8
21.k:7 / B
A6 Enable mould closed
A9
41.d:6 / B220 B220 A7 Enable full mould opening
B2
5 41.d:5 / B223 B223 A8 reserved for future use of EUROMAP
B3
41.d:5 / B222 B222 A9 0V/DC (ROBOT)
B4
41.d:5 / B224 B224 B2 robot operation mode
B5
6
41.d:4 / B225 B225 B3 Enable ejector back
B6
B4 Enable ejector forward
B7
B5 core pullers 1 in position 1
B8
7 B6 core pullers 1 in position 2
C1
C2
8 C3
C5 reserved for future use of EUROMAP
C4
C5
9 C6
C7
C9 24V/DC (ROBOT)
C8
10 21.m:7 / B+
C9
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Robot EU67 Interface 2
HAITIAN
B215 B216
1 B211 B213 B212 B214
2
-X100 -X101
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Core 1 IN
Core 2 IN
Core 3 IN
Core 4 IN
Core 1 OUT
Core 2 OUT
Core 3 OUT
Core 4 OUT
4
Ejector backward
Ejector backward
Ejector backward
Ejector backward
0V 0V 0V 0V 24V 24V 24V 24V 0V 0V 0V 0V 24V 24V 24V 24V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B / 21.k:7
9
B+ / 21.m:7
10
Movable platen
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Core interface circuit
HAITIAN
1
16mm² -PE
PE -Q102 -T2
2 1 1
BU/N N N -W2 5
I>
N -Q122 1.00 -F153
BK/T 5 6 3 4 TA 2 4 220A 1 2 220
I>
L3
BK/S 3 4 4A 1 1 1
I>
3 L2
BK/R 1 2 1 2 RA 1 3 0220 M M M
I>
L1
25mm² 1~ 1~ 1~
U<
500VA 2 2 2
4A 1
4 100A*0.7 -PE
70A
Customer Wiring Recommended: Point 2 -MF1 -MF2 -MF3

/18.g:2 /18.h:2 /18.j:2
5 Power Supply 380V,50Hz
Power 12.8kW
Nominal Current 24A

6 Fuse 70A
Wire Size 25mm² N2 / 45.b:1

Maximum T2 / 45.b:0
37m
Cable Length
7
PVC Copper S2 / 45.b:1
Cable Material
Cables
R2 / 45.b:1
of the grounding wire is 1mm² by default.
8 The unlabeled cross-sectional area
of the other wire is 0.75mm² by default.
10
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Main Power Circuit
HAITIAN
44.p:7 / T2
44.p:7 / S2
1
44.p:7 / R2
44.p:6 / N2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-F111 -F112 -F113 -F114 -F115 -F116 -F117 -F118
16A 16A 16A 16A 16A 16A 16A 16A
3
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
BK/HR101 BU/N2 BK/HR102 BU/N2 BK/HR103 BU/N2 BK/HR104 BU/N2 BK/HR105 BU/N2 BK/HR106 BU/N2 BK/HR107 BU/N2 BK/HR108 BU/N2
2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
7
-KS100-1 -KS100-2 -KS100-3 -KS100-4 -KS100-5 -KS100-6 -KS100-7 -KS100-8
/47.b:9 14 /47.c:9 14 /47.e:9 14 /47.f:9 14 /47.h:9 14 /47.i:9 14 /47.k:9 14 /47.m:9 14
SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR
8
BK/HR1 BK/HR2 BK/HR3 BK/HR4 BK/HR5 BK/HR6 BK/HR7 BK/HR8
2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
9
-X300
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16
Female
10
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Heating Circuit of Hotrunner 1
HAITIAN
1 Thermocouple Input Module of Hotrunner(Dial code 0)

TC1+ TC1- TC2+ TC2- TC3+ TC3- TC4+ TC4- TC5+ TC5- TC6+ TC6- TC7+ TC7- TC8+ TC8-
101+
101-
102+
102-
103+
103-
104+
104-
105+
105-
106+
106-
107+
107-
108+
108-
5
-X320
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16
Male
10
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Thermocouple Input Module of Hotrunner
HAITIAN
1
Heating Output Module of Hotrunner(Dial code 0)
T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08

2
+24V
+24
4
C500
C501
C502
C503
C504
C505
C506
C507
5
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
-KS100-1 -KS100-2 -KS100-3 -KS100-4 -KS100-5 -KS100-6 -KS100-7 -KS100-8
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
10
13 14 /45.b:7 13 14 /45.e:7 13 14 /45.g:7 13 14 /45.i:7 13 14 /45.k:7 13 14 /45.p:7 13 14 /45.r:7 13 14 /45.t:7

11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description Heating Output Module of Hotrunner
HAITIAN
0 List of components ‎E-F01_001(新)
Series number Code Part Number Description Specification Instruction Manufacturer (company)
1
1 E1 L862A435SW Heater band ‎φ42×35,230V.250W,0.5m SW
2 E2 L862A437SW Heater band ‎φ100×55,230V,950W SW
3 E3 862A350SW Heater band ‎Φ245X70,230V,2400W SW
4 E4 862A351SW Heater band ‎φ245×70,230V,2400W SW
2 6 E6 L862A405SW Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,2700W SW
3 E12 L862A405SW ‎φ190×75,230V,2700W SW
12 Heater band
4 17 E17 L862A404SW Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,2700W SW
20 IV1 E0010109 Driver(75kW) Hi360-4075A26 HT
21 IV2 E0010119 Driver(22kW) Hi360-4022A23T HT
22 LC1 032A136 Reactor RWK3044-140-99 Schaffner
5 23 LC2 032A131 Reactor RWK3044-48-92 Schaffner
24 FR1 032A073 Filter FN3270H-200-99 Schaffner
25 R02 E10091XA Resistance ‎500W/15Ω(2.5m) Hengda
26 F11 008A086 Fuse FWC-6A10F600Va.c. Bussmann
27 F21 008A005 Fuse FWC-30A10F 600Va.c. Bussmann
6
7 34 F52 008A005 Fuse FWC-30A10F 600Va.c. Bussmann
37 KS1 010021 Solid-state relay GTJ48-40-350S Tianhao
38 KS2 010025 Solid-state relay GTJ48-40A-200S Tianhao
8
40 T1 011098 Isolating transformer MST0500-400±5%/110-220 Moeller
41 KR1 015043 Relay TRS24VDC1C Weidmuller
42 KA15 015A003 Relay DRM570024LUL Weidmuller
43 KX7 015A003 Relay DRM570024LUL Weidmuller
44 K38 015A003 Relay DRM570024LUL Weidmuller
9 45 K269 015A003 Relay DRM570024LUL Weidmuller
46 KR12 015A003 Relay DRM570024LUL Weidmuller
47 KR12-1 015A003 Relay DRM570024LUL Weidmuller
48 K3 015A059 Contactor DRL370024L Weidmuller
49 K12 004A007 Contactor DILEEM-10-G Eaton
50 KM1 004074 Contactor SC-N8 FUJI
10
51 KH1 004A174 Contactor SC-N5APM-CF FUJI
52 KA1 015A023 Safety relay X2.8P Pilz
11
Drawn by Chen Haidong Verified by He Yong Page description List of components

HAITIAN
1
56 KR10 015A023 Safety relay X2.8P Pilz
57 KR11 015A023 Safety relay X2.8P Pilz
58 K201 015A023 Safety relay X2.8P Pilz
59 MF1-MF6 021A022 Fan 120×120 San Ju
P3 019A025 Voltage meter XD-02 (0-2A) Rongda
60
2 61 Q160 003A005 1P MCB FAZ-C3/1-AS Eaton
Q161 003A005 1P MCB FAZ-C3/1-AS Eaton
62
63 Q136 003A567 3P MCB FAZ-C3/3-AS Eaton
64 Q250 003A269 3P MCB CVS100F3 Eaton
65 Q121 003A061 2P MCB FAZ-D4/2-AS Eaton
66 Q103 003A271 3P circuit breaker CVS250F3 Schneider
3 Q104 003A447 3P circuit breaker FAZ-C50/3-AS Moeller
67
69 Q101 003A481 3P MCB S203-C100 ABB
71 Q111 003A578 3P MCB FRBm6-C16/3N/003 Eaton
4 72 Q113 003A578 3P MCB FRBm6-C16/3N/003 Eaton
73 Q114 003A578 3P MCB FRBm6-C16/3N/003 Eaton
S1 001A885 PILOT 5531-M12 5531
74
S2 001A647 I/O module tmIOT102
75
AJ1 001A800 J6+R A8(2-8)+Go
76
77 1TC00 023075 Thermocouple 4m Ronda
5 1TC01 023A140 Thermocouple ‎K-ф2.3-L100-3.5M Ronda
78
79 1TC02 023019 Thermocouple 2.5m Ronda
6
85 R1 002006 Position transducer LWH-375 NOVO
86 R2 002013 Position transducer TLH-750 NOVO
R3 002004 Position transducer LWH-225 NOVO
87
R4 002A001 Position transducer LWH-650 NOVO
88
7 89 S203 014A090 Non-contact safety switch PSEN ma1.4p-50+PESN ma1.4-10 Pilz
S103 013007 Proximity sensor E2B-S08KN02-WP-C1-HT OMRON
90
91 S206 013001 Proximity sensor E2B-M12KS04-WZ-C1 OMRON
92 S208 013007 Proximity sensor E2B-S08KN02-WP-C1-HT OMRON
93 S229 014A086 Proximity sensor E3FA-RN11(M18-NPN) OMRON
94 S200 012006 Limit switch T4VH336-20Z SCHMERSAL
8
9 100 S269 016A051 Button A22-RLT-WS/K10/LED Moeller
101 L1 017047 Alarm lamp Werma64900903 Werma
102 -S201_2 017A086 Emegency stop button M22-PV/K01PV6 EATON
103 X1 022211 Socket 5P,400V,16A MENNEKES
104 X1 022212 Plug 5P,400V,16A MENNEKES
10
11

HAITIAN
1
111 F153 008013 Fuse 3NW8004-1（4A）
2 114 F113 008A002 Fuse FWC-16A10F600Va.c. Bussmann
3 120 KS100-1 010A018 Solid-state relay GTJ480-40A Tianhao
121 KS100-2 010A018 Solid-state relay GTJ480-40A Tianhao
4 125 KS100-6 010A018 Solid-state relay GTJ480-40A Tianhao
128 T2 011098 Isolating transformer MST0500-400±5%/110-220 Moeller
10
11

HAITIAN
4.4 电气图纸
IO表对照表
Analog input/模拟量输入
端子号/Terminal
number name 名称线号
+10V +（10V）位置尺+（10V）
AD1 Screw position 螺杆位置 I102
AD2 Mold posotion 模座位置 I202
ACOM - 位置尺-
+10V +（10V）位置尺+（10V）
AD3 Ejector posotion 顶针位置 I212
AD4 I112
ACOM - 位置尺-
+10V +（10V）位置尺+（10V）
AD5 System 1 系统1
AD6
ACOM - 位置尺-
+24V +（24V）位置尺+（24V）
模拟量输出/Analog
output
端子号/Terminal
DCOM DCOM 公共负极 P1-/F1-
DA1 Main pressure 主压力 P1+
DA2 Main flow 主流量 F1+
DCOM DCOM 公共负极 PP3-
Proportional back
DA3 pressure 比例背压 PP3+
DA4
DCOM DCOM 公共负极
DA5
DA6
5
4.4 电气图纸
DCOM DCOM 公共负极

DA7
DA8
通讯模块接口
/Communication
module interface
SCAN+ 接IO扩展模块输出CAN+
SCAN- 接IO扩展模块输出CAN-
COM
TR
MCAN+ 接RMTP12温控模块输出CAN+
MCAN- 接RMTP12温控模块输出CAN-
数字量输入
/Digital input
端子号/Terminal
number name 名称 /wire number
IN1 Core release¶ pressure 中子阀门泄压键 B269
Safety gate nozzle
B122
IN2 input 2 射出防护二取消
IN3
IN4 Rear door closed 后安全门关终 B200 1
Front door open the CE
IN5 valve 先导阀行程开关监控 B277 1
IN6
IN7 Mold completely closed 关模终 B205 1
IN8 Core 3 in 中子C进终 B215 1
IN9 Emergency stop 紧急停止(常闭) B201 1
IN10 Core 3 out 中子C退终 B216 1
Safety gate nozzle
IN11 input 射出防护 B203 1
6
4.4 电气图纸
IN12 Ejector back 脱退终 B206 1

IN13 Safety relay reset 安全继电器复位 B124 1
nozzle forward
座进终
IN14 position B100 整移尺，取消
Lubrication oil level
IN15 check 润滑油位检知 B276 1
IN16 State of oil filter 滤油网检测 B101 1
IN17 Srew sensor 储料电眼 B103 1
IN18 Mold adjust sensor 调模电眼 B208 1
Lubrication inspection
IN19 of tail plate support 尾支架润滑检知 B413 1
Emergency stop
IN20 feedback 急停反馈 B412 1
IN21 Front door closed 安全门关终 B202 1
IN22 Photo sensor 落料电眼 B229 1
IN23 E12 mold close enable 机械手关模安全 B219 1
E12 robot
机械手不操
IN57 operation B220
作
IN24 hydr. Close safety 液压安全检知 B204 1 mode
E12 mold 机械手模区
IN58 B218
IN25 Close 1 In 中子A进终 B211 1 area free 安全
E12 ejector 机械手允许
IN59 B222
IN26 Close 2 In 中子B进终 B212 1 forward 顶进
E12 ejector 机械手允许
IN60 B223
IN27 Close 1 Out 中子A退终 B213 1 back 顶退
机械手允许
IN61 E12 core in B224
IN28 Close 2 Out 中子B退终 B214 1 中子进
E12 core 机械手允许
IN62 B225
IN29 Oil level check 油压油位检测 B102 1 out 中子退
Safety
安全继电器
Enough lubrication IN63 relay(E12 B221
反馈
IN30 pressure 润滑检测 B209 1 EMG)
7
4.4 电气图纸
IN31 Cycle start 循环启动 B272 1

IN32 Cycle stop 循环停止 B273 1
PCOM B TO 0V 接B电源0V B
数字量输出
/Digital output
端子号/Terminal
number name 名称线号/wire number
O01 Mold close valve 关模 C200 1
O02 Core release¶ pressure 中子阀门泄压 C269 1 IO模块 IO module
Yellow
O81 黄色报警灯
O03 Mold open valve 开模 C202 1 alarm lamp C221
Green alarm
注射 O82 绿色报警灯
O04 Injection valve C100 1 lamp C222
O05 Suckback 射退 C101 1 O83 Buzzer 报警灯蜂鸣 C753
Valve gate
O84 阀门#1 C250
O06 Charge 储料 C102 1 1
O07 Nozzle forward 座进 C103 1 O85 Cool oil 系统冷却水 C122
O08 Nozzle backward 座退 C104 1 O86
O09 Ejector forward 脱进 C204 1 O87
O10 Ejector backward 脱退 C205 1 O88
O11 Air 3 吹气C C242 1 O89
O12 Air 4 吹气D C243 1 O90
O13 Mold adj. forward 调模进 C208 1 O91
O14 Mold adj. backward 调模退 C209 1 O92
O15 Air 5 吹气E C244 1 O93
O16 Air 6 吹气F C245 1 O94
O17 Core C in 中子C进 C212 1 O95
O18 Core C out 中子C退 C213 1 O96
O19 Air 1 A组吹气 C223 1
O20 Air 2 B组吹气 C224 1
O21 Core A in 中子A进 C206 1
8
4.4 电气图纸
E12
C203 O57 机械手自动 C422
O22 Mold open slow 开模慢 1 automatism
E12
C207 O58 ejection 机械手顶进 C425
O23 Core A out 中子A退 1 advance
E12
O59 ejection 机械手顶退 C424
O24 Core B in 中子B进 C210 1 retract
Storage back pressure 机械手中子
O60 E12 core in C426
O25 sealing valve 储料背压封闭阀 C601 1 进
E12 core 机械手允中
O61 C427
O26 Core B out 中子B退 C211 1 out 子退
Mold open from E12 mold 机械手关模
O62 C428
O27 beginning to end 开模始末 C300 1 close end 结束
Mold clamping begin to
O28 end 关模始末 C333 1
O29 Motor on command 使能 C417
O30
O31 Red alarm lamp 红色警报灯 C220 1
Tail plate bracket
lubrication reversing C335
O32 valve 尾板支架润滑阀 1
O49 Motor off 马达停 C414

O50 Motor on 马达开 C415
O51 Y TO DELTA
O52 J5 fan 电机冷却 C419
O53 Central lubrication 润滑 C219
O54 E12 mold open end 机械手开模结束 C421
O55 Heating#2 电热#2 200
HCOM B TO 0V 接B电源0V B
9
4.4 电气图纸
H24V B+ TO +24V 接B电源+24V B+
Temperature control
RMTP12 温控模块 module
端子号/Terminal
TC1+ thermocouple 1+ 一区热电偶正 1+
TC1- thermocouple 1- 一区热电偶负 1-
TC2+ thermocouple 2+ 二区热电偶正 2+
TC2- thermocouple 2- 二区热电偶负 2-
TC3+ thermocouple 3+ 三区热电偶正 3+
TC3- thermocouple 3- 三区热电偶负 3-
TC4+ thermocouple 4+ 四区热电偶正 4+
TC4- thermocouple 4- 四区热电偶负 4-
TC5+ thermocouple 5+ 五区热电偶正 5+
TC5- thermocouple 5- 五区热电偶负 5-
TC6+ thermocouple 6+ 六区热电偶正 6+
TC6- thermocouple 6- 六区热电偶负 6-
TC7+ thermocouple 7+ 七区热电偶正 7+
TC7- thermocouple 7- 七区热电偶负 7-
TC8+ thermocouple 18+ 下料口温度+ 18+
TC8- thermocouple 18- 下料口温度- 18-
TC9+
TC9-
TC10+ Oil thermocouple+ 油温热电偶正 0+
TC10- Oil thermocouple- 油温热电偶负 0-
TO1 Hearting 1 一区加热 C400
TO2 Hearting 2 二区加热 C401
TO3 Hearting 3 三区加热 C402
TO4 Hearting 4 四区加热 C403
10
4.4 电气图纸
TO5 Hearting 5 五区加热 C404

TO6 Hearting 6 六区加热 C405
TO7 Hearting 7 七区加热 C406
TO8 Hearting 8 八区加热 C407
TO9 Hearting 9 九区加热 C408
+24V +24V +24V电源 +24
FGND 接地
COM 公线
TRM
CAN+ 接通讯模块输出CAN+
CAN- 接通讯模块输出CAN-
Temperature control
RMTP12 温控模块 module
端子号/Terminal
TC1+ Thermocouple Input 1 模温一
TC1-
TC2+ Thermocouple Input 2 模温二
TC2-
TC3+ Thermocouple Input 3 模温三
TC3-
TC4+ Thermocouple Input 4 模温四
TC4-
TC5+ Thermocouple Input 5 模温五
TC5-
TC6+ Thermocouple Input 6 模温六
TC6-
11
4.4 电气图纸
TC7+ Thermocouple Input 7 模温七

TC7-
TC8+ Thermocouple Input 8 模温八
TC8-
TC9+ Thermocouple Input 9 模温九
TC9-
TC10+ Thermocouple Input 10 模温十
TC10-
TC11+ Thermocouple Input 11 模温十一
TC11-
TC12+ Thermocouple Input 12 模温十二
TC12-
TO1 Heating 1 一区加热
TO2 Heating 2 二区加热
TO3 Heating 3 三区加热
TO4 Heating 4 四区加热
TO5 Heating 5 五区加热
TO6 Heating 6 六区加热
TO7 Heating 7 七区加热
TO8 Heating 8 八区加热
TO9 Heating 9 九区加热
TO10 Heating 10 十区加热
TO11 Heating 11 十一区加热
TO12 Heating 12 十二区加热
+24V +24V电源 +24
FGND 接地
COM 公线
TRM
CAN+ 接通讯模块输出CAN+
CAN- 接通讯模块输出CAN-
12
Chapter 9 Operation of Controller
9 Chapter 9 Operation of Controller

Chapter 9 Operation of controller
Contents
9 Chapter 9 Operation of Controller ..................................................................................... 1
1. General layout of the machine .............................................................................. 9-2
1.1. Overall introduction of the controller system .................................................. 9-2
1.1.1. Overall introduction of the controller ........................................................ 9-3
1.1.2. Introduction to main communication interface ......................................... 9-4
1.1.3. Introduction to HMI3354 panel................................................................. 9-5
1.1.4. IO extended module ................................................................................ 9-6
1.1.5. RMTP12 expansion module .................................................................... 9-8
1.2. Introduction of button on the button plate ....................................................... 9-8
1.2.1. General introduction of the button plate ................................................... 9-9
1.2.2. Detail introduction of buttons ................................................................... 9-9
1.3. General layout of the controller screen .........................................................9-16
1.3.1. Introduction of the main screen ..............................................................9-17
1.3.2. Introduction of the status bar ..................................................................9-17
1.3.3. Introduction of title bar ............................................................................9-18
1.3.4. Introduction of parameter part ................................................................9-19
1.3.5. Introduction of alarming and prompt part ................................................9-21
1.3.6. Introduction of soft button .......................................................................9-21
1.4. Program update method ...............................................................................9-27
1.4.1. HMI program burning method .................................................................9-28
1.4.2. DSP55, DSP28, RMTP12 temperature program, RemoteIO program ....9-28
1.5. General setting of user ..................................................................................9-30
1.6. RFID Introduction (Option) ............................................................................9-33
1.6.1. User login ...............................................................................................9-33
1.6.2. 1.6.2 User logout ....................................................................................9-35
1.6.3. User Management ..................................................................................9-35
2. Introduction of clamping unit structure and function.............................................9-37
2.1. Move mold and clamping system ..................................................................9-37
2.1.1. Introduction of platen structure ...............................................................9-37
1
2.1.2. Introduction of clamping screen and clamping action .............................9-38
2.1.3. Introduction of low pressure mold protection function .............................9-39
2.1.4. Introduction of auto mold adjusting function ...........................................9-42
2.1.5. Opening screen and introduction of opening action ................................9-44
2.1.6. Setting of cooling time ............................................................................9-45
2.2. Ejector System ..............................................................................................9-46
2.2.1. Introduction of ejector screen and function .............................................9-47
2.2.2. Introduction of link action of ejection and opening ..................................9-51
2.2.3. Introduction of requisition cut function（Option）...................................9-52
2.3. Core System .................................................................................................9-54
2.3.1. Introduction of core function selection and types ....................................9-56
2.3.2. Position of core action ............................................................................9-58
2.3.3. Introduction of neutron core-pulling opening linkage function .................9-60
2.3.4. Introduction of core forward hold function ...............................................9-62
2.3.5. Introduction of core action priority ...........................................................9-64
2.3.6. Introduction of action delay setting of cores............................................9-66
2.3.7. Introduction of core whole-process monitoring function ..........................9-69
2.3.8. Introduction of core decompression principle and function（Option） ...9-70
2.4. Introduction of mold installation .....................................................................9-71
2.4.1. Instructions of magnetic platen machine installation mold (option) .........9-72
2.4.2. Instructions on the installation of hydraulic fixture mold (Option) ............9-76
2.5. Instructions on blasting function ....................................................................9-79
2.5.1. Instructions on blasting screen ...............................................................9-79
2.5.2. Instructions on the setting of extended blasting functions ......................9-80
3. Introduction of heating system .............................................................................9-83
3.1. Charging barrel heating system ....................................................................9-83
3.1.1. Introduction of the basic screen of charging barrel temperature heating 9-83
3.1.2. Setting and meaning of charging barrel anti-cold function ......................9-85
3.1.3. Introduction of thermal insulation function and idle automatic thermal

insulation transferring .......................................................................................9-86
2
3.1.4. Setting of manual mode of temperature control ......................................9-88
3.1.5. Weekly heating plan function ..................................................................9-90
3.1.6. Introduction of material entrance cooling ................................................9-91
3.1.7. Maximum allowable material temperature function .................................9-93
3.1.8. Oil temperature preheating function .......................................................9-95
3.2. Hot runner heating system （Option） .........................................................9-97
3.2.1. Introduction of basic screen of mold temperature ...................................9-97
3.2.2. Introduction of mold temperature soft start function ..............................9-106
3.3. Temperature PID self-learning system ........................................................9-108
3.3.1. Temperature PID self-learning settings .................................................9-108
3.3.2. Temperature PID self-learning function monitoring ............................... 9-110
4. Introduction of injection plasticization system .................................................... 9-112
4.1. Injection system .......................................................................................... 9-112
4.1.1. Basic introduction of injection screen ................................................... 9-113
4.1.2. Introduction of injection transform holding function ............................... 9-115
4.1.3. Introduction of automatic purge function ............................................... 9-118
4.1.4. Use of valve function (Option) ..............................................................9-120
4.1.5. Introduction to the use of the injection curve function ...........................9-122
4.1.6. Introduction of secondary charging function .........................................9-123
4.1.7. Introduction of pre-injection function .....................................................9-126
4.1.8. Introduction of gas assistant injection function (Option) .......................9-127
4.1.9. Basic introduction of nozzle function (Option).......................................9-129
4.2. Charging System.........................................................................................9-133
4.2.1. Basic introduction of charging screen ...................................................9-134
4.2.2. Setting of charging backpressure .........................................................9-135
4.2.3. Setting of suckback before charge .......................................................9-135
4.2.4. Setting of suckback after charging ........................................................9-137
4.2.5. Setting of cooling time before charge ...................................................9-139
4.3. Nozzle system .............................................................................................9-140
4.3.1. Basic introduction of nozzle screen ......................................................9-140
3
4.3.2. Function introduction of nozzle forward hold ........................................9-142
5. Production management ....................................................................................9-146
5.1. Introduction of mold parameters/machine parameters saving and loading .9-146
5.2. Production count setting and output ............................................................9-151
5.3. Setting of quality parameters.......................................................................9-154
5.4. Process data monitoring .............................................................................9-161
5.5. Description of process parameters change records ....................................9-163
5.6. Notes for automatic cycle start ....................................................................9-167
5.7. Introduction to the use of quality curve ........................................................9-171
5.8. Identification of program version .................................................................9-172
5.9. Description of alarm light (Option) ...............................................................9-174
5.10. Lubrication setting .....................................................................................9-177
5.11. Storage and loading of machine parameters .............................................9-179
5.12. Introduction to robot interface (Option)......................................................9-181
5.12.1. Simple robot .......................................................................................9-181
5.12.2. European safety standards robot (Option) ..........................................9-183
5.12.3. STAR robot（Option） .......................................................................9-189
5.12.4. Enhanced robot (Option) ....................................................................9-193
5.12.5. Robot mold open middle function (Option) .........................................9-196
6. J6 card introduction (Option) .............................................................................9-199
6.1. Basic introduction of J6 screen ...................................................................9-199
6.2. Alarm information ........................................................................................9-205
6.2.1. Introduction to Alarm Information ..........................................................9-205
6.2.2. Analysis of alarm content on J6 and drive screen .................................9-210
6.3. Drive zeroing/self-learning function .............................................................9-213
6.3.1. Zero-finding/self-learning significance ..................................................9-213
6.3.2. Zeroing/self-learning settings................................................................9-213
6.3.3. Tips for zeroing and self-learning ..........................................................9-215
7. Alarm list ............................................................................................................9-216
4
Preface
Use of documents:
The documents describes the main screen of Haitian controller, the main operating
procedures, as well as prompt message in the visibility operating screen.
Target group and condition of user
The following conditions must be available when using this manual.
Target group Required knowledge and skill
Basic technique education or operation training

Knowledge required:
Safety standard training;
Machine setter
Function of injection molding machine;
Parameter setting of edit panel;
Set a injection molding machine.
Operation training
Knowledge required:
Machine operator
Safety standard training;
Injection molding procedure
Edition of Haitian operating manual
Doc No. Name Description
55_3354 Platen_E_181214（MA Haitian MA Machine Operation

V1.0
Series） Manual（Hongxun Controller）
9-1
1. General layout of the machine
Clamping part Injection part
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 9 10
1. Safety door of the clamping zone
2. Top plate and top bar
3. Movable platen
4. Fixed platen
5. Hopper base of the injection zone
6. Screw cylinder
7. charging cylinder
8. Advance speed motor
9. PC operating panel
10. Distribution box

1.1. Overall introduction of the controller system
General rules
PILOT5 series (including PILOT5580 and PILOT5530) is a simple, fully functional injection
molding machine control system, and is also a series of control systems used by Haitian
Group.
Outlines
⚫ Overall introduction of the controller
9-2
⚫ Introduction to main communication interface
1.1.1. Overall introduction of the controller
The PILOT5580 controller has a total of 48 digital input points (PB points), 48 digital output
points (PC points), 12 AD channels, 12 DA channels (voltage type), and no temperature
input channel.The controller is equipped with EtherCAT communication function,
expandable IO module and temperature module.
9-3
The PILOT5530 controller has a total of 32 digital input points (PB points), 32 digital output
points (PC points), 6 AD channels, 8 DA channels (voltage type), and 10 sets of
temperature input channels.The controller is equipped with EtherCAT communication
function, expandable IO module and RMTP12 temperature module.
1.1.2. Introduction to main communication interface
The PILOT5 system provides one set of NET1 interface to the HMI panel and one set of
NET5 interface to EtherCAT.Two groups of CANBus control can be connected to RMTP12
9-4
temperature module and IO expansion module.
1.1.3. Introduction to HMI3354 panel
USB socket
Data lock Emergency stop

button
On the back of the HMI3354, a set of NET1 interfaces is provided to the host. A group of
network ports is reserved and a set of 232/485 communication interfaces is provided.
9-5
1.1.4. IO extended module
TmIoT_i202 is a simple, fully functional expansion card that communicates with the host
CAN to perform remote IO point expansion.
Among them, the upper and lower IO interfaces are isolated design and there is no direct
connection inside.IN1~IN8 and O01~O08 are a set of power supplies, and IN9~IN16 and
O09~O016 are another set of power supplies.The IO power supply connection of the
expansion board provides a total of 4 HCOM nodes, and all the wiring can load up to 32A
current return (48W * 16 valves open at the same time).The maximum current of single
point at input point is 5mA, while the maximum current of single point at output point is 2A.
Power
supply
A
Input point
Power supply B
Output point
9-6
This module provides 2 CANs and 1 NET. The two SCANs are connected in parallel and
define one input and one output, which are used via communication with the host. The
remaining MCAN and NET interfaces are reserved.
Note that the end device must have a terminating resistor on the SCAN OUT
connector.
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
9-7
1.1.5. RMTP12 expansion module
The RMTP12 is a simple, fully functional temperature control expansion card.Remote

temperature expansion can be performed through CAN communication with the host.It can
be used as temperature detection control of material temperature or mold temperature.
The module provides 12 points DC24V transistor output, single point maximum current
is1.2A and the sharing point is 24V.
The module uses CAN communication. At the end of the device, TR and CAN must be
short-circuited to the termination resistor.
Temperature control
Power supply
CAN
Temperature sensor
Node dial-up
1.2. Introduction of button on the button plate

General rules
User shall be familiar with the button on the operating panel of controller before using the
machine. The button plate integrates several action buttons and screen shortcut buttons. It
allows you to switch among different operating mode and the manual control of the
machine.
Outline of the section
⚫ General introduction of the button plate
⚫ Detail introduction of buttons
9-8
1.2.1. General introduction of the button plate
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
Button plate
[1] interface switch button
[2] input and select button
[3] Manual button of clamping unit
[4] Select the operating mode of machine
[5] Mold adjustment backward and forward button
[6] Injection unit manual button
[7] Motor heater mold temperature on/off button
[8] Lubricating unit button
1.2.2. Detail introduction of buttons
(1). Button for the operating mode of the machine
9-9
Manual semi-automatic automatic mold adjustment
Manual button: This button integrates several functions. It can be used to switch
the machine from any operating mode to the manual operating mode, or to eliminate the
abnormity. It can also be used for the emergency stop of action under other mode. When
the button light is on, the machine is under the manual mode.
Mold adjusting button：The adjusting mode is used for the assembly and
adjustment. Under this mode, the pressure and speed of action is comparatively low. This
mode is used together with many other functions, such as the manual mold adjustment and
the auto mold adjustment.
The machine is under mold adjusting mode when the button light is on.
Semi-automatic button： The machine will enter into the semi-automatic mode
when you press this button. Please close the safety door before enter into next circulation.
The machine is under semi-automatic mode when then button light is on.
Automatic button：The machine will enter into the automatic mode when you
press this button. The machine will execute the entire circulation automatically when
running this operating mode. In case the operating time reach the set value or there’s error
in the machine, the controller will stop the machine and the alarm will ring. The machine is
under automatic mode when then button light is on.
(2). Mold forward/backward button
Mold Mold
Backward Forward
9-10
Mold backward button： When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting
mode, by pressing the button, the injecting molding machine will make the mold backward
action. The mold backward action will be executed according to the set value on the
parameter screen. Upon the release of the button or in case the mold is backed to the
position, the action will stop.
Mold forward button： When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting
mode, by pressing the button, the injecting molding machine will make the mold forward
action. The mold forward action will be executed according to the set value on the
parameter screen. Upon the release of the button or in case the mold is forwarded to the
position, the action will stop.
(3). Manual button of clamping unit
Mold opening button： When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, the injection molding machine will execute the mold opening action by pressing this
button. The mold opening action will be executed according to the set value on the
technique screen. The mold opening will be stopped by releasing the button or when the
mold is opened to the position. The button integrates the reset function in case the core, the
blast or the thimble is set. Certain sequential actions will be executed by operating this
button.
When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the
mold opening action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
Clamping button：When certain condition is met under the manual operating mode,
the injection molding machine will execute the clamping action by pressing this button. The
clamping action will be executed according to the set value on the technique screen. The
9-11
clamping will be stopped by releasing the button or when the mold is closed to the position.
clamping action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
Ejector backward button：When certain condition is met under the manual

operating mode, the injection molding machine will execute the ejector backward action by
pressing this button. The ejector backward action will be executed according to the set
value on the technique screen. The ejector backward will be stopped by releasing the
button or when the mold is backward to the position.
ejector backward action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
Ejector forward button：When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, the injection molding machine will execute the ejector forward action by pressing this
button. The ejector forward action will be executed according to the set value on the
technique screen. The ejector forward will be stopped by releasing the button or when the
mold is forward to the position.
ejector forward action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
Core A forward Core A backward: Select the function of core A. By

pressing the forward or backward button under the manual operating mode, it can realize
the core A forward/backward with the set pressure, speed and speed at any position of
mold opening or clamping.
Core B forward Core B backward: Select the function of core B. By

the core B forward/backward with the set pressure, speed and speed at any position of
Core C forward Core C backward: Select the function of core C. By

the core C forward/backward with the set pressure, speed and speed at any position of
9-12
Core D forward Core D backward: Core D function is selected. Pressing

the forward or backward key under manual mode can perform core D forward and
backward at any position of the switch mode according to the set pressure, velocity and
time conditions.
Core E forward Core E backward:Core E function is selected. Pressing the

forward or backward key under manual mode can perform core E forward and backward at
any position of the switch mode according to the set pressure, velocity and time conditions.
Core F forward Core F backward: Core F function is selected. Pressing

the forward or backward key under manual mode can perform core F forward and
backward at any position of the switch mode according to the set pressure, velocity and
time conditions.
When there are more than 6 sets of cores in the machine configuration, manually core
objects can be set on the core function screen to operate advance and retreat of G and H
cores.
Male mold blasting: Select the blasting function. By pressing the male mold
blasting button, it can realize the blasting function according to the set blasting time at any
position of mold opening or clamping.
Female mold blasting: Select the blasting function. By pressing the female mold
blasting button, it can realize the blasting function according to the set blasting time at any
position of mold opening or clamping.
(4). Manual button of injecting unit
Injection button： When certain condition is met under the manual operating mode,
9-13
the injection molding machine will execute the injecting action by pressing this button. The
injecting action will be executed according to the set value on the technique screen. In case
the button is released or the injection is completed, the action will be stopped. If the feeding
inlet is set, this button will have the reset function. Certain sequential actions will be
executed by the operation of this button. When certain condition is met under the mold
adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the injecting action will be executed with
independent speed and pressure.
This button is a composite function button: It can be used to start the automatic cleaning
process. For details, refer to the description of the “Automatic Cleaning” function.
Charging button： When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, the injection molding machine will execute the charging action according to the set
value on the technique screen by pressing this button. In case the button is pressed again
or the charging is completed, the action will be stopped.
charging action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
Note：The button does not have jog function.
Suckback button： When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, the injection molding machine will execute the suckback action by pressing this
button. The suckback action will be executed according to the set value on the technique
screen. In case the button is released or the suckback is completed, the action will be
stopped. I
suckback action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
Nozzle forward button ： When certain condition is met under the manual
operating mode, the injection molding machine will execute the nozzle forward action
according to the set value on the technique screen by pressing this button. In case the
button is released or the nozzle forward is completed, the action will be stopped.
nozzle forward action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
Nozzle backward button： When certain condition is met under the manual
operating mode, the injection molding machine will execute the nozzle backward action
according to the set value on the technique screen by pressing this button. In case the
9-14
button is released or the nozzle backward is completed, the action will be stopped.
nozzle backward action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
(5). Manual lubricating button
Lubrication 1: When this button is pressed in manual mode, Group 1 lubricant pump
can be turned on.
Lubrication 2: When this button is pressed in manual mode, Group 2 lubricant

pump can be turned on.
(6). Power unit button zone
Power switch button：When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, user can press the heat on button to start heating the feed cylinder, and can stop the
heating by pressing again. User can judge the status by observing the status light
Note： The button does not have jog function.
Motor on/off button： When certain condition is met under the manual operating or
adjusting mode, user can start the motor by pressing the motor button, and can stop the
motor by pressing the motor button again under the manual mode. User can judge the
status by observing the status light
Note： The button does not have jog function.
Mold temperature key: In the manual or molding adjustment operation mode, if the
conditions are met, press the mold temperature button, the mold temperature electric
9-15
heating will start heating. Press the mold temperature button again in the manual mode, the
mold temperature electric heating stops heating. The status light display can determine the
current status.
Note: The button does not have jog function.
(7). Online help button
Online help key: In any screen, press the online help key. If there is corresponding
help information, the corresponding help content can be displayed.
1.3. General layout of the controller screen
General rules
It introduces the general layout of the controller screen,
It introduces the general layout of the controller screen, including the basic icon, and the
data setting. Through this section, user can have a general understanding on the controller
screen and the basic setting.
Section introduction
⚫ Introduction of main screen
⚫ Introduction of status bar
⚫ Introduction of title bar
⚫ Introduction of parameter part
⚫ Introduction of alarming and prompt part
⚫ Introduction of soft button
⚫ Introduction of digital and letter input
⚫ Introduction of screen components’ function
Main function of the screen layout
⚫ Facilitate the users’ operation
⚫ Check the action status of the machine
⚫ Parameter setting of the machine
9-16
1.3.1. Introduction of the main screen
Status bar
Title bar
Parameter area
Warning area
Soft button area
1.3.2. Introduction of the status bar
Haitian logo Power meter Mold temp Heat Motor 55 Communicate 28Communicate Current time
Status
Power meter communication connected
Power meter communication not connected
Mold temp open status
Mold temp closed status
Heat open status
Heat closed status
9-17
Motor open status
Motor closed status
55 communication connected
55 Communication not connected
28 Communication connected
1.3.3. Introduction of title bar
Action mark Page name Current mold name Action mode
(1). Action Mode：
manual mode
Press the manual button, and the machine will enter into the manual mode;
mold adjusting mode
Press the mold adjusting button, and the machine will enter into the mold adjusting mode;
semi-automatic mode
Press the semi-automatic button, and the machine will enter into the semi-automatic mode;
automatic mode
Press the automatic button, and the machine will enter into the automatic mode;
(2). Actual action mark on the screen:
clamping action
opening action
nozzle forward action
9-18
nozzle backward action
injecting action
charging action
ejection action
injection action
lubricating action
core forward action
core backward action
blasting action
1.3.4. Introduction of parameter part
It shows the status parameter when the machine is under working condition, including the
pressure flow, the rpm, the clamping pressure, the injection pressure, the mold base
position, the screw position, the thimble position and the nozzle position.
9-19
Actual output display zone:
It show the pressure and flow of system I and system II respectively.
Actual feedback display zone:
It shows the rpm of screw, the injecting pressure and the clamping pressure respectively,
the last two items are standby.
Actual position display zone
It shows the mold base position, the screw position, the thimble position and the nozzle
position.
Actual action display zone:
It show the current time, the mold number, the circulation time and the soak time.
9-20
Feed cylinder temperature display zone:
Oil temperature display zone:
1.3.5. Introduction of alarming and prompt part
It show the alarming and prompt message of the machine at present.
1.3.6. Introduction of soft button
(1). Word button：
9-21
(2). Graphical button:
9-22
Switch between the word button and the graphical button:
Entry path: Main screen→F10 →F7
Enter the password and enter into the system parameter screen, you can change the
display style of the soft button.
User can choose the graphical button for operation. Select the Graphical style in the
drop-down list of Toolbar Select.
9-23
Introduction of digital and letter input
The button is used for the digital input. Upon the pressing of any number in this zone, the
screen will display the number you entered. The controlling unit of the computer has set the
maximum and the minimum value. Any number larger than the maximum will not be
executed. Such value will be shown at the lower part of the screen. In the following screen,
the input value between 0 to 140 is allowed. In case the input value in not within the
minimum and the maximum value, the cursor can not leave the current input box until you
input a right value.
9-24
Press button for a continuous time to enter the letter through the numerical keyboard. For
example: if you want to input a, you shall press the 7 for 2 times.
introduction of some button in the keyboard.
space button：double press for screenshot.
decimal point button： Press this button to input the decimal point. For dialog box
with several options, it can also be used to callout the drop-down list
Introduction of the screen components’ function
(1). Drop-down list：
9-25
Press the decimal point button, and move the cursor to select the needed option.
(2). function selection
9-26
The drop-down list is also used in the function selection, you can choose “Use” or “No use”.
(3). Screenshot selection:
Insert the USB flash disk, click the space button for 2 times on the screen the need
to be saved, and wait for a moment, then a dialog box will prompt you that the data is saved.
The screenshot is saved in the folded named “Print” in the USB flask disk.
(4). OK and cancel button
OK button： Press this button to confirm the current selection.
Cancel button：Press this button to cancel the current selection.
1.4. Program update method

General rules
This section describes how to update the HMI3354 panel and host program. Note that the
HMI and host program update methods are different.
9-27
Outlines
⚫ Update mode of HMI3354 panel
⚫ Update mode of host system
1.4.1. HMI program burning method
After powering on, press F10+F8 to enter the bootmenu screen and update it from the USB
device.
1.4.2. DSP55, DSP28, RMTP12 temperature program, RemoteIO program
(1). After the panel is turned on, select groups under F10 (F7 system (F9 download, and
according to need, select the corresponding program from the USB device.
(2). After the DSP55 program is updated, it needs to be powered off and restarted, without
any other operations.
(3). Please update the program with manual mode, motor off, electric off and mold off.
9-28
9-29
1.5. General setting of user
General rules
Haitian injection molding machine provides clients with several language option. User can
select the needed language through setting. Thus can facilitate the user in different
countries. The Date Time is used to modify the time, and to cooperate with other actions.
Introduction of this chapter
⚫ Introduction of screen for language selection
⚫ The available language list
⚫ The default language and unit setting
Introduction of screen for language selection
Entry path：main screen→F10 →F7
9-30
Language: set the language of screen. Press the Language icon and callout the drop-down
list, and there appears a list of the available languages. Press the up and down button to
roll the list, click the needed language, and the system will switch the current interface
language into the language you selected.
Start from idle time： When the idle time is set, the system will start the screensaver or
blank screen when then idle time reach the set value.
Start from the opening times: When this value is set, the system will start the screensaver
or blank screen when the set value is reached.
Start after enter the main screen automatically： After restarting the machine, the system
will start the screensaver or blank screen after stay in the main screen for certain time.
Screen saver animation：select whether to use screen saver animation, if not, the blank
screen will be used.
Set the date and time of the system. Input number to change the date or time.
9-31
Language list
Chinese name Corresponding words on the screen
简体中文简体中文
繁体中文繁體中文
英文 English
土耳其语 Turkish
俄罗斯语 Russian
西班牙语 Spanish
希腊语 Greece
葡萄牙语 Portuguese
伊朗语 Iranian
日语 Japan
韩语 Korea
越南语 Vietnam
波兰语 Polish
阿尔巴尼亚语 Albanian
塞维利亚语 Serbian
德语 German
法语 French
斯洛伐克语 Slovakia
匈牙利语 Maygar
芬兰语 Finland
9-32
1.6. RFID Introduction (Option)
General rules
In order to facilitate production management, Haitian Group has defined different user
levels for users.Different levels have different usage rights.The rights include the
permission to enter the screen, the permission to set the parameters, the language settings,
which all need to define different levels of users.Each user's specific information includes:
user name, use code, power level, and use password.Machines that use the RFID function
can only gain permission by logging in to change the machine parameters.No login when
power on, the default level is 0.
Outlines
⚫ How to use the function
⚫ Explain how the user information is changed
1.6.1. User login
1) Log in to a new user using an ID card
The precondition for using an ID card is that the user information has been successfully
saved on the ID card.
Place the card in the sensing area to log in to the new user.
The location to swipe card is as follows:
9-33
The location
to swipe
card
2) Login using the user name and password entered on the screen
Access: main interface right arrow key on the keyboard use the keyboard to input use code
and use password.
After the login is successful, the current user and the power level will be displayed under
the title bar in the upper right corner of the main interface. The icon and user's rights are
displayed in the title bar and can be seen on each screen.
9-34
1.6.2. 1.6.2 User logout
1) Swipe out
When a logged-in user swipes card for the second time, it represents logging out.
2) Automatic logout
Setting: Main screenGroups under F10F7 system.
Automatic logout instructions
⚫ The default time for automatic logout is 1 minute, with the upper and lower limit of 1~99;
⚫ When the panel does not operate, and the time is up, it will automatically log out;
⚫ 15s before the automatic logout, the lower left corner prompts "The user is about to
automatically log out."
1.6.3. User Management
Haitian Group provides customers with different user rights to facilitate customer
management.Customers can add, modify and delete users through user
management.Before performing management operations on the user, you must first obtain
the user management authorization, that is, the login password of the Administrator user
from the related department of Haitian Group.
9-35
1) Add users
In the option column, select "Add User"enter the user name, password and power level in
the last column of the form OK.
2) Modify user data
In the option column, select "Modify user data" enter the user's serial number in read
columnenter the modified content at the bottom line of the form OK.
3) Delete users
In the option column, select "Delete user"enter the user's serial number in read columnOK.
4) Write the user information into the card
In the option column, select "Write the user information into card" enter the user serial
number in read columnselect OK in the column of access to the cardprompt "Please
swipe."OK.
5) Store the user information in memory card
The two methods of operation are similar, and the instructions are combined here.
In the option column, select “Write user information into memory card” or “Read user
information from memory card” OK.
If the storage device is not inserted well or not plugged in, the system will pop up and say
"The external storage device is not ready".
6) Reading user information from the memory card
Same as above.
9-36
2. Introduction of clamping unit structure and function
2.1. Move mold and clamping system
2.1.1. Introduction of platen structure
Function of clamping unit
⚫ Clamp the mold
⚫ Hold the clamping force during injection
⚫ Open the mold after the product is formed
⚫ Eject the product
Composition of the clamping unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
【1】hopper base of the clamping part
【2】position gage of mold closing
【3】rear platen
【4】crankshaft
【5】tie bar
【6】roof plate and roof bar
【7】movable platen
【8】fixed platen
9-37
2.1.2. Introduction of clamping screen and clamping action
General rules
The clamping action is an
The closing action is an important procedure in the injection molding machine. The
clamping shall be quick and smooth, and shall not damage the mold. It can be realized
through adjustment of pressure and flow in different stages.
Introduction of this section
⚫ Introduction of clamping screen
⚫ Introduction of clamping action
Introduction of mold clamping screen
Entry path: main screen→F2 clamp
[1] clamping action setting: In this part, user can set the pressure and flow according to the
starting position of each stage, thus to achieve the most suitable clamping procedure.
[2] opening action setting：In this part, user can set the pressure and flow according to the
starting position of each stage, thus to achieve the most suitable opening procedure.
[3] Display zone of related value: In this part, user can see the mold number, the time, the
9-38
position and other related parameters.
Note: the pressure and flow shall be set according to the protective requirement of the mold.
By taking the slope into consideration, we can meet the requirement on clamping.
Introduction of clamping action.
The clamping action can be divided into：clamping->low pressure->high pressure clamping
Clamping: set the related flow pressure according to the technical requirement of mold,
thus to guarantee that the movable platen can reach the clamping position smoothly.
Low pressure: the speed is low at the low pressure clamping syage, thus to prevent the
mold from being damaged due to foreign matter. Therefore, low pressure shall be set. The
switching point between the closing stage III and the low pressure stage shall be set in such
a position that the foreign matter may exists.
High pressure clamping： After the clamping action is completed, the machine will increase
the pressure until it reach the set value.
Note: the incorrect parameter may damage the machine or mold.
2.1.3. Introduction of low pressure mold protection function
General rules
The low pressure mold protection function can protect the mold from being damaged due to
the mixed products during the clamping procedure.
Option introduced in the document
⚫ Screen of low pressure mold protection function
⚫ Alarming message
Function of low pressure mold protection
⚫ To protect the mold
I. Screen of low pressure mold protection function
9-39
Entry path：Main screen →F2 clamp
Low pressure mold protection stage： When the platen moves to the set position during
the clamping, the mold protection will start. The output pressure flow is in accordance with
the set value in the above figure.
As within the time scope of circulation, please set such a pressure that can ensure the
platen is completely closed. The lower the set flow is, the better the protective effect will be.
9-40
Entry path：Main screen→F10NEXT→F2PM→F8PARA
Timing limit of low pressure closing: In case the mold protection time exceeds the set value,
the circulation will be stopped and the system will make alarm.
II. Alarm information
ER：closing protection failure
The actual low pressure mold protection time exceeds

Cause
the set value.
The alarm light on. The circulation may stop and the
Influence bad signal may appear according to the setting on the
monitoring screen.
The mold thickness is not well adjusted, which cause

that the low pressure mold protection can not be
completed, please adjust the mold thickness again;
Reset there’s foreign matter in the mold, which cause that the
low pressure mold protection can not be completed,
please check the mold to see if there’s foreign matter;
the pressure flow value is set to small, which lead to
9-41
insufficient clamping force, and cause that the low
pressure mold protection can not be completed,,
please adjust the set value of pressure flow within the
proper scope.
2.1.4. Introduction of auto mold adjusting function
General rules
The auto mold adjusting function is used during the mold replacement. After the new mold
is installed in the machine, please execute the auto mold adjusting procedure to obtain the
mold thickness, thus to guarantee that the machine can execute the normal clamping
action.
Options introduced in the document
⚫ Auto mold adjustment screen
⚫ Operation of auto mold adjustment
⚫ Operation of manual mold adjustment
⚫ Alarm information
I. Auto mold adjustment screen
9-42
Mold closing pressure: set the closing pressure during auto mold adjustment.
Mold closing flow: set the closing flow during auto mold adjustment.
Mold opening pressure: set the opening pressure during auto mold adjustment.
Mold opening flow: set the opening flow during auto mold adjustment.
II. Operation of auto mold adjustment
Step 1： Rapid press the mold adjustment button for 2 times, and the computer screen will
show the message of “Please open the safety door”. After the safety door is open, press the
loop start button(it’s needed when the loop start button is installed),then the machine will
enter into the auto mold adjustment procedure.
Step 2: After the auto mold adjustment is finished by the machine, open the mold
completely.
Step 3: The computer screen shows the message that the “Auto mold adjustment is
completed”, and the auto mold adjustment is completed by then.
III. Operation of manual mold adjustment
Step 1 ：Set the proper mold adjusting pressure and flow
Step 2 ：Press the mold adjusting button on the panel
Step 3 ：Under the mold adjusting mode, press the clamping button to execute the
clamping action. In case the fixed and movable platen can not clamp the mold tightly, press
the open mold button.
Step 4 ： Press the Mold Adjustment Forward button, and make the mold adjusting gear
move forward for 1 unit.
Step 5： Return to step 3, and make sure that the fixed and movable platen clamp the mold
tightly.
Step 6： Press the opening button and open mold completely. Press the Mold Adjustment
Backward button and make the mold adjusting gear move backward for 1 unit.
Step 7 ： Press the clamp button and make clamping action. The manual mold adjustment
is successful if the fixed and movable platen fails to clamp the mold (in principle, the
clamping shall succeed if the gear go forward for 1 unit, and shall fail if the gear go
backward for 1 unit)
Step 8 ：Manual mold adjustment completed.
IV. Alarm information
ER：auto mold adjustment completed
Cause This alarm will appear after the auto mold adjustment
9-43
is completed.
Influence The alarm light on
Reset Press the manual button to clear the alarm.
2.1.5. Opening screen and introduction of opening action
General rules: this section introduces the opening action after the completion of cooling
and before the ejection of product. The pressure flow in each section can be set
independently.
I. Manual opening action button
II. Opening
Through the shrink of crankshaft, the movable platen can be opened to such a position that
the product can be obtained.
Action icon:
Parameter setting:
9-44
Entry path：Main screen→F2clamp
Multilevel control of opening can be realized through the setting of parameters in different
positions, thus to achieve a quick and smooth opening action.
2.1.6. Setting of cooling time
General rules
The hot cooling material shall be cooled and formed. The cooling time is decided by the
plasticization procedure and the ejection capability of the product.
⚫ Screen of cooling time setting
⚫ Cooling time function
Function of cooling time
⚫ To avoid deformation during ejection
⚫ To guarantee the quality of product
I. Screen of cooling time setting
9-45
Entry path：main screen→F2clamp→F5function→ F3function
II. Cooling time function
Cooling time（sec）： After the cooling time is set, the machine will start timing upon the
completion of injection. The opening action can be executed after the cooling time is
reached. In case the nozzle backward mode is selected to be executed before opening,
then it can be executed after the cooling time is reached, and then the opening action will
be executed as well.
2.2. Ejector System
General rules
The ejector is used to eject the workpiece from the injection mold.
⚫ Ejector structure
I. Ejector structure
9-46
[1] ejector driver

[2] ejector connecting plate
[3] ejector connecting head
[4] ejector
2.2.1. Introduction of ejector screen and function
General rules
On ejector screen, user can set the pressure and flow of ejection action, as well as other
related functions.
⚫ Ejector screen
⚫ Introduction of ejection function
⚫ Ejection parameter screen
Ejection menu
Enter into the ejection screen, see the following figure:
9-47
Entry path：Main screen→F5 ejector
Ejection mode: three ejection mode, including stay, count and vibration can be selected.
Under count and vibration mode, you can choose the times, and the scope is 1-99.
From the above figure we can see that, a good ejection can be realized through the proper
setting of position, pressure, flow and delay of ejecting action.
Ejector function screen
9-48
Entry path：Main screen→F5eject→F4function
Ejector parameter screen
9-49
Entry path：Main screen→F5eject→F5parameter
Set the pressure and flow of ejecting action under mold adjusting mode.
9-50
Set the position and flow of ejector backward (to prevent the impact during ejector
backward due to overlarge flow).
2.2.2. Introduction of link action of ejection and opening
General rules
To execute the ejecting action during opening procedure can significantly shorten the
production cycle of product.
⚫ Screen of link action of ejection and opening
⚫ Parameter setting of link action of ejection and opening
I. Screen of link action of ejection and opening
Select and set parameter under the eject function screen, see the following figure:
9-51
Entry path：main screen→F2 eject→F3 function
Function selection: whether to select the link action of opening and ejection.
Set the link position: to select the opening position at which the ejection is started.
Note: this is an optional function.

2.2.3. Introduction of requisition cut function（Option）
General rules
The requisition cut function is to cut sprue in the mold. In practical use, the ejector will cut
the useless bur from the product, thus to facilitate the separation of product and mold.
Options in introduced in the document
⚫ Requisition cut function description
⚫ Principle of requisition cut function
⚫ Screen of requisition cut function
9-52
Requisition cut function description:
The requisition cut procedure:The pressure flow rate set to cut off the screen is set to be
ejected automatically when the injection pressure is maintained; in addition, user can
choose to hold or backward after ejection. The standard ejecting action can be executed
after the charging and opening action are completed.
Principle of requisition cut function:
Inject Eject Eject

and charge open
1st 2nd
hold
Select whether
to hold or back
after eject
Screen of requisition cut function:
9-53
Entry path：main screen→F5eject→F4function→F3cut
Set the parameter on the cut screen under eject function. User can choose whether to use
eject backward or not.
2.3. Core System
General rules:
The core is used for the oil cylinder movement in the mold. It can control the forward and
backward action of oil cylinder during the automatic procedure of the injection molding
machine. The core valve plate and the core valve is used to control the action of core.
I. introduction of core valve plate
The core valve plate in the injection molding machine is always installed at the
non-operation side of the fixed and movable platen. See the following figure.
9-54
You can see a core valve (see the red frame in the above figure) on the core valve picture.
The hydraulic oil can control the core forward/backward action through the core valve
action. See the followings for the structure of core value.
Core valve
three-position four-way valve core valve
The above are the three-position four-way valve core valve and its action sketch. Through
the figure, we can see that the valve is disconnected when in the middle position. In case
9-55
the left electromagnet valve is connected, the working chamber A and B is open, the
hydraulic will flow into chamber B through the oil inlet P, then return to chamber A, and
finally drain back through oil inlet T; in the opposite, if the right electromagnet valve is
connected, the hydraulic will flow into chamber A through the oil inlet P, then return to
chamber B, and finally drain back through oil inlet T. The two conditions are in
correspondence with the core forward and core backward.
2.3.1. Introduction of core function selection and types
General rules
Select the core function in the core screen of the injection molding machine. You can
choose whether to use the core, and can set the parameters related to the core.
I. Selection of core function
Entry path：Main screen→F6core
See the above figure, enter the core screen of the injection molding machine, choose
whether to use core or screw, and set the related parameters.
II. Core parameters setting
9-56
According to the above figures, when you select core as the controlling mode, the core
options available for selection are travel, time and travel + time; when you select screw as
the controlling mode, the screw options available for selection are count, time and travel.
（1）Type：
【1】Time：The action of core or screw is controlled by time. When the platen reaches the
set position, the core will go in/out according to the time setting. The core action is only
controlled by time, and will not depend on the protection of limit switch. When the set time
reaches, the action will be stopped. The screw mode is just the same with the core mode.
【2】Travel：The action of core is controlled by the limit switch. When the platen reaches the
set position, the core will go in/out until it reach the end position of limit switch, and then the
core action stops.
【3】Travel + time：The action of core is controlled by the limit switch and the time. When
the platen reaches the set position, the next action will be executed only if the core contact
the travel switch and the set time ends.
【4】Count： It is used in screw mode. When the platen reaches the set position, the action
of screw will be count, when certain number is reached, the action ends.
（2）Pressure： Set the pressure of core action.
（3）Flow：Set the flow of core action.
（4）Set position：Set the position of core in/out. When the platen reaches the set position,
the core will go in/out.
（5）Set time： It is the action time of core when the time mode is selected. After the set
time is reached, the core action stops.
（6）Screw count： It is the action times of screw under the screw mode. When the set
times are reached, the screw action stops.
（7）Hold ：You can choose whether to use or not. If you choose to use, upon the pressing
of injection button, the core valve will start outputting; release the injection button to close
the core valve. The core needs to finish before the injection.
9-57
2.3.2. Position of core action
General rules
The action of core is limited by the set position. When the platen moves to the set position,
the core will execute the in/out action; in case the positional deviation of core is set, then
the action of core is decided by the set position and effective area of core position together.
I. introduction of core action and position
In the following, we take core A as an example to explain the relationship between the core
action and the set position.
Do not set the effective area of core position
The normal core action way is: during closing, when the platen reaches the set position, the
core will go in; during opening; when the platen reaches the set position, the core will go out.
According to the above figure, when the platen is closed to 42mm, the core goes in; and
when the platen is opened to 42mm, the core goes out.
In case the machine is under manual operation, when the current position of platen is just
the set position of core in, user can manually execute the core in action; when the current
position of platen is just the set position of core out, user can manually execute the core out
action.
9-58
Set the effective area of core position：
Enter the core – parameter screen, and you can see the frame for set the effective area of
core position. See the following figure, we set the effective area of 100 and take it as an
example to introduce the influence of effective area on the core action.
Entry path：main screen→F6core→F7 parameter
In case effective area is not set, when the set position of core in is just the current position
of platen, we can manually execute the core in action. If the effective area of 10 is set, when
the set position of core in is 10 unit larger than the current position of platen, we can not
execute the core in action manually, or the machine will make alarm: Core A Action
Deviation. See the following figure. The core out action is just the same.
9-59
2.3.3. Introduction of neutron core-pulling opening linkage function
General rules
During the opening process, the realization of the linkage of neutron core pulling and
opening can reduce the cycle time and improve the production efficiency.
I. Selection of opening linkage function
The following is based on neutron A to introduce you the opening linkage function.
Choose the neutron to be linked in the linkage column and set the position to be realized in
the link position column as follows.
9-60
Entry path: Main screen →F2 mold base →F3 function
After choosing this function, set the neutron action position at the neutron screen. When the
machine opens to the set position, the machine will conduct opening and neutron retreat
actions at the same time. You will find the opening and neutron retreat icons on the left
upper corner of the main screen as the follows.
9-61
2.3.4. Introduction of core forward hold function
General rules
During the automatic operation of the machine, if the core forward hold function is selected,
the core forward will output in the injection action until the action ends.
I. Selection of core forward hold function
The following is to introduce the core forward hold function based on core A as example.
Enter the core screen and choose maintain option in the injection core, which means the
core forward hold function is used as follows.
9-62
Entry path: Main screen →F6 core
II. Use of core forward hold function
After choosing core hold function, in the injection action under the automatic operation of
the machine, the core A forward valve outputs, which can be validates through PC output
as follows.
9-63
Entry path: Main screen →F10 next group →F4IO→F4PC1
2.3.5. Introduction of core action priority
General rules
When the machines applies multi groups of cores (over or equal to 2 groups), if the action
positions of many cores are the same one platen position, the action sequence of the cores
are decided by the action priority of the cores and the core forward and backward priority is
set in compliance with three types.
I. Setting of core action priority:
Take cores A and B as examples, if the action positions of the cores are the same one
platen position, we will introduce you the setting of the priority of the core actions.
Enter the core function screen and set the core forward and backward sequences under the
core forward and backward sequence column. The higher the priority is. As shown in the
following picture, the forward priority of core A is higher than the one of core B, which
means core A conducts the forward action earlier than core B; the backward priority of core
B is higher than the one of core A, which means the core B conducts the backward action
earlier than core A.
9-64
Entry patch: Main screen →F6 core →F5 function
II. Use of core action priority
As the above figure, after setting the priority of the cores, during the operation process of
the machine, when the platen arrives at the set position for the forward action of the cores,
core A forwards first then core B; when the platen arrives at the set position for the
backward action of the cores, core B backwards first and then core A.
Under the manual mode, as the above figure after setting priority of the cores, if both cores
A and B are under the forward status, manually conduct the backward action of core A, as
the backward priority of core A is lower than core B, the machine will alarms: core B not
backwards to the place. As the following pictures shows for the alarm, the core B backward
action shall be earlier than the backward action of core A.
9-65
Entry path: Main screen →F10 next group →F4IO
2.3.6. Introduction of action delay setting of cores
General rules
By setting the delay of core actions, the forward and backward actions or cores or the
opening and closing of core valves can be delayed for some time.
I. Introduction of core action delay setting:
Enter core parameter 2 screen to set the delay of related actions of cores as the following
figure.
9-66
Entry patch: Main screen →F6 core →F7 parameters
9-67
Core forward delay timing:
When the core clamping arrives the set position, the core delays for the set time to do the
forward action.
Core backward delay timing:
When the core opening arrives the backward set position, the core delays for the set time to
do the backward action.
Core forward start proportional valve open:
If the core is equipped with the proportional valve, after the core completes the forward
action, the proportional valve starts the delay setting time.
Core backward start proportional valve open:
If the core is equipped with the proportional valve, after the core completes the backward
action, the proportional valve starts the delay setting time.
Core forward end direction valve delay close:
If the core is equipped with the direction valve, after the core completes the forward action,
the direction valve closes the delay setting time.
Core backward end direction valve delay close:
9-68
If the core is equipped with the direction valve, after the core completes the backward
action, the direction valve closes the delay setting time.
Core forward end delay timing:
When the core clamping arrives the set forward position, after the forward action, the core
will continue to do the clamping action after the set delay time.
Core backward end delay timing:
When the core opening arrives the backward set position, after the backward action, the
core will continue to do the opening action after the set delay time.
Core midway delay time:
When the clamping or opening arrives the core forward or backward position, the core will
forward or backward after the set delay time.
2.3.7. Introduction of core whole-process monitoring function
General rules
Under the travel mode, if the core whole-process inspection function is selected, the
procedure will monitor the core forward and backward end electric signal for the entire
opening and clamping process and once the signal lost time is over the set filtration time,
the ma chine will alarm to remind the user the core is not at the forward or backward end
position.
I. Specific description of core whole-process monitoring function
Enter 1 in mold opening and closing whole-process inspection core signal column, which
means the core whole-process inspection function is used as follows.
9-69
Entry path: Main screen →F6 neutorn →F7 parameters
Notice: The above functions are used for default. The non-professional personnel are not
authorized to change the functions as inappropriate changes many cause damages to the
Molds.
2.3.8. Introduction of core decompression principle and function（Option）
General rules
When replacing the core oil tube, even with the motor turned off, there will be pressure
within the oil tube. The user can press the core decompression button on the machine to
release the pressure within the tube.
I. Core decompression principle
The machine releases the pressure of the oil tube with the output of the core
decompression valve and core forward and backward valves.
II. Introduction of core decompression function
Step 1. The motor must be turned off in the decompression of the core and the machine
shall be under the manual mode.
Step 2. If the machine is equipped with the core decompression valve, when the core
decompression button is pressed, the core decompression valve outputs and will turn off
9-70
after a certain time of decompression.
Step 3. If the core is applied by the machine this moment, the core inlet valve will be closed
after outlet for a certain time; then the core backward valve will be closed after outlet for a
certain time.
After the three steps as above, the decompression action of the core is completed.
2.4. Introduction of mold installation
General rules
The steps referred for the installation process of Molds and the preparation before the
production.
Options involved in the document
⚫ Mold installation steps
⚫ Mold parameter loading and related preparation work
I. Mold installation steps
a). Under the “manual” status, press the mold opening button to start the opening action,
and ensure that the machine is under the opening status;
b). Set the opening position in compliance with the requirements of the new Mold opening
stroke;
c). Under the adjustment status, switch the opening platen to the maximum place slowly;
d). Pull the nozzle out from the plane of the core platen to make sure the nozzle will not
knock down the new Molds;
e). Make sure the thimble number is matched with the relative new Molds and the thimbles
are backwarded to the place;
f). The new Molds are loaded by the crane with the core platen aimed at the
corresponding hole;
g). The new Molds are loaded by the crane with the core platen aimed at the
corresponding hole;
h). Use Mold pressing platen or fast die equipment to make sure the fixed and movable
Molds are clamped to the place;
i). Dismantle the locking block of the movable and fixed platens;
j). Release the loading equipment of the Molds;
k). Connect the corresponding water line, oil line and electric equipment of the Molds.
Notes: the above operation is only for reference.
II. Mold parameter loading and related preparation work
9-71
The user shall enter the mold parameter screen to conduct the corresponding parameter
loading.
a). After loading the mold parameters, turn on the corresponding water line devices.
b). Heat the charging barrel.
c). If there is mold hot runner temperature control, heat it up.
d). Under the adjustment status, slowly open the mold.
e). Test the thimble and core actions.
f). Once the charging barrel temperature meets the requirements, test the sprue action.
g). When the external auxiliary machinery is well prepared and under the semi-auto status,
conduct the trial production.
Notice：the above operation is only for reference.
2.4.1. Instructions of magnetic platen machine installation mold (option)
General rules
For the injection molding machines that are not equipped with fast mold replacing devices,
the molds shall be installed with hands with multiple installation and fixed methods
including clamping clips, magnetic platens and hydraulic fixtures; the following is about the
instructions for the mold installation of E70 magnetic platen machines.
⚫ Introduction of E70 magnetic platen
⚫ Relative alarm information
I. Introduction of E70 magnetic platen
Magnetic platen means the electric magnetic fixture as follows:
9-72
mold replacing enabling key magnetic platen reset key
The following is E70 magnetic platen screen for the display of status of various conditions
of E70 magnetic platen injection molding machine.
9-73
Entry path: Main screen →F9 Next→F8 QMC
MCS enabling: it is the signal provided by magnetic platen, that is usually closed, magnetic
platen failure is OFF when the injection molding machine cuts off all the power;
Standard signal: signals of this section are the injection molding machine allowed magnetic
platen actions. The injection molding machine shall meet the requirements including:
QMC key ON: means the mould replacing key;
Adjustment mode: means switching the injection molding machine to the adjustment status;
Clamping to end: eject to the end, clamp to the end, close both the front and back doors;
Available signals: normal safety tread, normal mold thickness, semi-mold mode and normal
locking force. If the device is equipped with locking force sensor, the locking force will also
become a judgment condition.
II. Mold installation steps
Take Haitian three platen injection molding machine type to introduce the mold installation
steps:
Replacing mold out
1. Normal clamping, rising at high pressure, pull the set back to the end (enough stroke or
come into contact with the travel switch at the back of the nozzle) to make sure the thimble
9-74
backward to the end;
2. Open the door, lock the mold connector and pull out the oil tube, water tube and electric
socket;
3. Hang the mold still with the crane to make sure the mold will not go down during the
opening;
4. After closing the door, turn on the motor and switch to adjustment mode and turn on the
mold replacing key;
5. Unload the magnetism of the magnetic platen;
6. Turn off the mold replacing key and switch to the manual mode, turn on the magnetic
platen reset key;
7. Close the core and hot runner functions.
8. Press opening key and switch to adjustment mode after opening the flashboard, then
slowly open the mold;
9. Lift out the mold.
Replacing mold in
1. Hang the mold into the molding area with the crane, locate and match it with the central
hole of the core platen;
2. Close the safety door and switch to the adjustment mode, start the automatic adjustment
mode;
3. After completion of the automatic adjustment, switch to the manual mode, normally open
and compress to make sure the mold has certain locking force;
4. Switch to the adjustment mode and turn on mold replacing key;
5. Magnetisms the platen into place;
6. urn off the mold replacing key;
7. Open the back door, discharge the hanger, turn on the mold connector, oil tube of the
water pipe and electric socket;
8. Close the back door and load the corresponding mold parameters.
III. Relative alarm information
ER：QMC failure
Reason Input point: QMC normal, no signal input.
Prevent all the actions and need to eliminate the alarm

Influence
manually.
9-75
Reset Check the magnetic platen and the electric wiring.
ER：QMC mode failure
Select QMC mode under semi-automatic\full automatic

Reason mode, the machine alarms QMC mode failure and
switches to manual mode.

Influence
manually.
Do not use QMC function under semi-automatic\full

Reset automatic mode. Use the QMC function under manual
or mold adjustment mode.
2.4.2. Instructions on the installation of hydraulic fixture mold (Option)
General rules
For the injection molding machines that are not equipped with fast mold replacing devices,
the molds shall be installed with hands with multiple installation and fixed methods
including clamping clips, magnetic platens and hydraulic fixtures; the following is about the
instructions for the mold installation of hydraulic fixture machines.
⚫ Introduction of hydraulic fixture
⚫ Relative alarm information
I. Introduction of hydraulic fixture
The magnetic platen physical picture is as follows:
9-76
Hydraulic
fixture
Mold replacing enabling key
The commonly used hydraulic fixtures of Haitian are Santianshun fixture ports and
Shunxing fixture ports;
Santianshun fixture ports:
Input test: opening and clamping allowed;
Output: clamping end indicator light, nozzle backward end indicator light;
Shunxing fixture ports:
Input test: QMC normal;
Output: clamping end indicator light, nozzle backward end indicator light;
II. Mold installation steps
Take Haitian three platen injection molding machine type to introduce the mold installation
steps:
9-77
Replacing mold out
1. Normal clamping, rising at high pressure, pull the set back to the end (enough stroke or
come into contact with the travel switch at the back of the nozzle) to make sure the thimble
backward to the end;
2. Open the door, lock the mold connector and pull out the oil tube, water tube and electric
socket;
3. Hang the mold still with the crane to make sure the mold will not go down during the
opening;
4. After closing the door, turn on the motor and switch to adjustment mode and turn on the
mold replacing key;
5. Loosen the hydraulic fixture and make sure it is loosened to the end;
6. Turn off the mold replacing key and switch to the manual mode;
7. Close the core and hot runner functions.
8. Press opening key and switch to adjustment mode after opening the flashboard, then
slowly open the mold;
9. Lift out the mould.
Replacing mold in
1. Hang the mold into the molding area with the crane, locate and match it with the central
hole of the core platen;
2. Close the safety door and switch to the adjustment mode, start the automatic adjustment
mode;
3. After completion of the automatic adjustment, switch to the manual mode, normally open
and compress to make sure the mold has certain locking force;
4. Switch to the adjustment mode and turn on mold replacing key;
5. Clamp the hydraulic fixture to the place;
6. urn off the mold replacing key;
7. Open the back door, discharge the hanger, turn on the mold connector, oil tube of the
water pipe and electric socket;
8. Close the back door and load the corresponding mold parameters.
III. Relative alarm information
Santianshun hydraulic fixture:
9-78
ER：fixture abnormal
Injection molding machine does not receive “allow

Reason clamping” or “allow opening” signal during opening or
clamping processes.
Unable to conduct clamping or opening action and

Influence
send an alarm.
Check and repair the fixture or controller.

Reset
Check the related electric circuit.
Shunxing hydraulic fixture:
ER：QMC error
Reason Input point: QMC normal, no signal input.

Influence
manually.
Reset Check the magnetic platen and the electric wiring.
2.5. Instructions on blasting function

2.5.1. Instructions on blasting screen
General rules
The main function of blasting is ejection, which means to blow off the products and molds
so that the products can be taken out smoothly. The blasting function can be applied onto
movable and fixed molds.
Section overview
⚫ Blasting button and icon
⚫ Blasting function screen
9-79
Blasting button and icon
Blasting button
Blasting action icon
Blasting function screen
Entry path: Main screen →F5 ejection →F3 blasting
Initial position: set the start position of blasting so that when the blasting arrives at the set
position, it starts the blasting action.
Delay time: set the delay time to control the blasting action so that when the opening arrives
at the set position, it start the blasting action after the set delay time.
Action time: set the blasting action time, if it is "0", it means blasting is not needed.
2.5.2. Instructions on the setting of extended blasting functions
General rules
The main function of blasting is ejection, which means to blow off the products and molds
9-80
so that the products can be taken out smoothly. The blasting function can be applied onto
movable and fixed molds.
⚫ Introduction of multiple blasting functions
⚫ Multiple blasting function usage screen
⚫ Multiple blasting function screen
I. Introduction of multiple blasting functions
Blasting functions have three types of modes (opening, closing, injection, charge, injection
forward and injection backward). The user shall choose the mode in compliance with
different processing requirements so that the blasting action can be conducted in the
required time.
II. Extended blasting function usage screen
Entry path: Main screen →F5 ejection →F3 blasting
Opening: when choosing opening mode, the starting position for blasting is decided by the
platen position. When the platen arrives at the set position, the blasting valve opens.
Closing: when choosing closing mode, the starting position for blasting is decided by the
9-81
platen position. When the platen arrives at the set position, the blasting valve opens.
Injection: when choosing ejection mode, the blasting valve opens in the process of
injection.
Charge: when choosing charge mode, the the blasting valve opens in the process of
charge.
Injection forward: when choosing injection forward mode, the blasting valve opens in the
process of forward injection.
Injection backward: when choosing injection backward mode, the blasting valve opens in
the process of backward injection.
9-82
3. Introduction of heating system

3.1. Charging barrel heating system
General rules
The charging barrel of the machine shall be heated up before putting into production so as
to accurately control the charging barrel temperature to fully melt the materials. All the
heating components are very important to the heating.
⚫ Introduction of charging barrel heating components
I. Introduction of charging barrel heating components
【1】nozzle: the melted materials are ejected here;
【2】charging barrel: materials enters the charging barrel from charging inlet and melt in the
barrel;
【3】thermocouple: test the temperature of charging barrel. Every section of charging barrel
heating area is equipped with a thermocouple;
【4】screw: screw forwards in the injection and backwards during the rotation in the charge
process;
【5】heating ring: the charging barrel is heated up with the heating ring;
【6】charging inlet: the material inlet.
3.1.1. Introduction of the basic screen of charging barrel temperature heating
General rules
The charging barrel of the machine shall be heated up before the production so that the
temperature of the barrel can achieve the target temperature and the materials can be fully
melted.
⚫ charging barrel heating screen
⚫ alarm information
9-83
I. Charging barrel heating screen
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature
Actual temperature: It shows the actual temperature of the current charging barrel.
Set value: set the temperature of the barrel heating.
Upper deviation: set the upper deviation of the temperature of the hot runner.
Lower deviation: set the lower deviation of the temperature of the hot runner.
Thermal insulation using: to use time thermal insulation, please choose use, when the
preset temperature arrives, the computer will turn on the heater switch.
Holding temperature: when the temperature reaches the preset temperature, the
computer will turn on the heater switch automatically and start the thermal insulation
function.
Anti-cold start timing: start timing when the actual temperature reaches the one that is
the difference of the preset temperature minus the lower deviation. The action can only be
proceeded after the timing.
Instructions on colors of heater bands:
9-84
Blue: heating circuit is normal.
Green: heating circuit is working.
Red: heating circuit is abnormal.
3.1.2. Setting and meaning of charging barrel anti-cold function
General rules
Charging barrel anti-cold start function is applied before the screen action. When the
charging barrel temperature is heated to the set lower limit, the anti-cold start function is
initiated and if the anti-cold start time is not up, the screw related actions can not be
conducted.
Section overview
⚫ Introduction of charging anti-cold function
⚫ Screen of charging anti-cold function
I. Function introduction
When the charging barrel temperature achieves the lower limit of the set temperature, the
anti-cold time starts. If the time is not up, all the screw actions are not valid. When the set
time is over, the controller will allow for the screw actions. With this function, it is able to
make sure all the materials in the charging barrel have reached this set temperature.
II. Screen of charging anti-cold function
9-85
Anti-cold start timing: setting the start time of anti-cold.
Anti-cold countdown: it displays the actual anti-cold time.
III. Alarm information
ER：Anti-cold start time is not up
Reason Anti-cold start timing not completed.
Unable to conduct injection, charge and ejection

Influence
backward actions.
Injection, charge and ejection backward only allowed

Reset
after completion of anti-cold start timing.
3.1.3. Introduction of thermal insulation function and idle automatic thermal insulation
transferring
General rules
When the machine is not used for production, use the thermal insulation function to make
sure the charging barrel is maintained at a set temperature.
9-86
⚫ Introduction of thermal insulation function
⚫ Screen of thermal insulation function
I. Introduction of thermal insulation function
When the machine is not producing, use the thermal insulation function, the charging barrel
enters the thermal insulation function immediately; when it is not used, once the thermal
insulation transferring time is up, it transfers into the thermal insulation status automatically
so that the charging barrel is maintained at the set temperature. When it requires to resume
the production, it is not needed to start heating from the room temperature, which is quick
for heating and time saving.
II. Screen of thermal insulation function
Thermal insulation using: it switches to temperature holding status automatically when

choosing, which will maintain the charging barrel temperature at a set temperature.
Holding temperature: when the holding temperature is chosen, the charging barrel will be
maintained at this input temperature.
9-87
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 parameter 1
Time to automatically switch to temperature holding status: if the holding temperature

is not input, it will automatically switch to the temperature holding status after the input time.
3.1.4. Setting of manual mode of temperature control
General rules
When the sensor is faulted, the user can apply the manual mode for the charging barrel
heating.
⚫ Introduction of manual temperature mode
⚫ Screen of manual temperature mode
I. Introduction of manual temperature mode
When the sensor is faulted, the user can apply the manual mode for the charging barrel
heating. Choose the manual mode for the charging barrel heating, set the PWM of the
heating, for example, at 25%, which means the heating time within 1 second is 0.25 second
and is turned off for 0.75 second.
9-88
II. Screen of manual temperature mode
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F7PID
Mode: choose manual mode for the heating of charging barrel, the charging barrel enters
the manual heating mode.
9-89
Setting: set the PWM of the heating, for example, at 25%, which means the heating time
within 1 second is 0.25 second and is turned off for 0.75 second as follows.
3.1.5. Weekly heating plan function
General rules:
This section is about the setting of the parameters of weekly heating function and its usage.
The specific time for heating of charging barrel can be preset in compliance with the actual
needs of the user. It takes week as the unit.
9-90
Entry path: →F8 temperature →F3 function
Operation mode:
1. press F8 temperature——enters F3 function screen.
2. tick the heating day required for, for example, if the user needs to preset Sunday for the
heating, the user shall tick the box at the lower side of Sunday.
3. set the specific starting time.
4. the same principle applies for the turning off.
Notice:
Premises for the validation of this function: the power supply of the injection
molding machine shall be on.
3.1.6. Introduction of material entrance cooling
General rules
9-91
Material entrance cooing function is mainly used for controlling the temperature of material
entrance. When the material entrance temperature is higher than the set temperature, the
cooling function is started.
⚫ Options involved in the document
⚫ Screen for the setting of material entrance cooling function
⚫ Material entrance cooling IO point
I. Screen for the setting of material entrance cooling function
Set the required material entrance deviation value, we set the deviation value 9 as shown in
the following picture.
When the material entrance temperature is higher than set temperature plus the deviation
value, the material entrance cooler starts to work. As shown in the following figure,
25+9=34<36, the input point is 26 and the entrance material cooling shows it is working.
9-92
I. Introduction of IO point
3.1.7. Maximum allowable material temperature function
General rules
The highest temperature the charging barrel of the machine can achieve.
⚫ Method for using the function of maximum allowable material temperature
I. Method for using the function of maximum allowable material temperature
1. Enter the required set temperature in the “allowable maximum temperature.
Notice: the machine will send an alarm whichever the actual electric heating
temperature meets the condition of the allowable maximum material temperature or
the allowable material temperature upper limit.
9-93
9-94
ER ： temperature exceeds the higher limit, electric

heating turns off automatically.
Temperature exceeds the upper limit of set

Reason
temperature.
Influence It sends an alarm and turns off electric heating.
Check if the heater band is normal, if yes, reset the

appropriate temperature parameter; press the manual
Reset button to eliminate the alarm, but the electric heating is
still on before it is switched off. Switch it on again to
start heating.
3.1.8. Oil temperature preheating function
General rules
The function to preheat the oil temperature.
9-95
⚫ Method to use oil temperature preheating function
I. Method to use oil temperature preheating function
Oil temperature preheating: to choose whether to use the oil temperature preheating
function.
End temperature of first stage: If the actual oil temperature is higher than this set
temperature, the oil temperature heating switches to the second stage.
Action time of first stage: When the total running time of the first stage oil temperature
preheating reaches this set action time, the oil temperature preheating switches to the
second stage.
End temperature of second stage: If the actual oil temperature is higher than or equal to
this set temperature, the oil temperature preheating ends automatically and the current
procedures solidifies to +3°of the oil temperature lower limit.
9-96
ER：oil temperature deviation
The actual oil temperature is lower than the allowable

Reason
minimum oil temperature.
Influence Clamping not allowed.
Check the oil temperature setting and actual

Reset temperature, check the oil temperature cooling circuit
or start the oil temperature preheating function.
ER：over high oil temperature
The actual oil temperature is higher than the allowable

Reason
maximum oil temperature.
Influence Clamping not allowed and motor is stopped.
Check the oil temperature setting and actual

Reset
temperature, check the oil temperature cooling circuit.
3.2. Hot runner heating system （Option）
3.2.1. Introduction of basic screen of mold temperature
General rules
Hot runner is the heating assembly used in the mold to inject the molten plastic into the
empty cavity of the mold.
⚫ Introduction of basic screen
⚫ Function introduction
Function of hot runner
⚫ shorten the molding cycle of the products and increase the efficiency of the machine
⚫ economize plastic raw materials
⚫ reduce the quantity of wastes and improve the quality of products
⚫ improve the surface quality and mechanical property of products
9-97
⚫ extend the range of application for injection technique
I. Introduction of basic screen
Screen name: mold temperature setting (or temperature setting)
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 mold temperature
9-98
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 function
II. Instruction of mold temperature icon
When the mold temperature is selected for use, press the mold temperature button on the
panel, the heating icon will light up, indicating that the mold temperature has been turned
on. As shown below:
III. Display of temperature colors
Blue: it means this temperature section is within the set temperature scope and the heater
is not working in this section.
Red: it means this temperature section is beyond the upper and lower deviations of the set
values.
Green: it means the heater is heating when the electric heating starts.
9-99
IV. Thermocouple types
9-100
Currently there are E type, K type and J type thermocouples.
K type temperature sensor (nickel-chromium – nickel-silicon) thermocouples have the

highest coverage currently. The using temperature is between -200°and 1300°. K type
thermocouples feature good linearity, high thermoelectromotive force, high sensitivity,
stability, uniformity and oxidation resistance and lower prices. They can be used in oxidizing
inert atmosphere.
K type thermocouples can not be directly used in sulfur under high temperature, reducing
or reduction oxidation alternated atmosphere or vacuum, they can neither be used in weak
oxygen environment.
J type temperature sensor (iron-nickel-copper) thermocouples are a kind of cheap base

metal thermocouples with the measuring temperature ranging from -200° to 1200°, but the
temperature usually used is from 0° to 750°. Advantageous of J type thermocouples include
good linearity, high thermoelectromotive force, high sensitivity, stability, uniformity and
lower prices. They can be used in vacuum oxidation, reducing and inert atmosphere. They
can not be used in high temperature vulcanized atmosphere without protections.
E-type temperature sensor (Nichrome-Constantan) thermocouples.The E-type

thermocouple has a large thermal electromotive force and high sensitivity and is the highest
among all thermocouples.Thermopiles should be made to measure small temperature
changes.It is not very sensitive to the corrosion in high-humidity atmospheres and should
be used in high humidity environments.E thermocouple also has the advantages of good
9-101
stability, excellent anti-oxidation performance, low price, etc. It can be used in oxidizing and
inert atmosphere and widely used by users.
E-type thermocouples cannot be used directly in sulfur at high temperatures. In a reducing

atmosphere, thermoelectric power is poorly uniform.
Each thermocouple has different temperature measuring scope and precision and shall
choose the proper thermocouple in compliance with different using situations.
Notice: once the thermocouple type is confirmed, it needs to restart the controller to
validate it.
VI. Alarm information
ER：mold temperature deviation
Reason Mold temperature exceeding upper and lower limits.
Injection, charge and ejection backward actions not

Influence
allowed.
Wait until actual temperature of mold reaches the set

scope.
Reset Check the set temperature and actual temperature of
material pipe and check and troubleshoot the heating
circuit.
9-102
ER：thermocouple disconnection
Reason Disconnection of heating circuit.
Alarm thermocouple disconnects when the

Influence
temperature shows 888.
Reset Check the heating circuit.
9-103
ER：Temperature communication disconnection
Temperature platen not connected and temperature

Reason
platen power source not on.
Influence Motor and electric heating off, machine alarms.
Reset Check the temperature platen and wiring.
Note: NODE_ID: 5 represents the disconnection between temperature communication

module and the corresponding dial code.
9-104
ER：Temperature communication disconnection
Multi-block temperature extended module sets the

Reason
same dialing ID.
Influence Motor and electric heating off, machine alarms.
Reset Check the temperature extended module dial code.
9-105
3.2.2. Introduction of mold temperature soft start function
General rules
The function of soft start can be used during the heating process of mold hot runners for
slow heating of preliminary temperature and internal moisture evaporation of the mold with
“dehumidification” effect.
⚫ Principle of mold temperature soft start
⚫ Setting screen of mold temperature soft start
I. Principle of hot runner soft start
9-106
Stage 1: output at 30% PWM until reaching the setting value;
Stage 2: stabilization stage of the temperature according to the setting “soft start
temperature” to ensure the moisture removal inside the mold;
Stage 3: normal heating after the completion of the dehumidification time.
II. Setting screen of mold temperature soft start
9-107
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 function
Starting temperature of mold temperature soft start: after the various temperature
sections are soft started and heated to this set temperature and maintain for the certain
time, the second stage heating starts.
Mold temperature soft start time: the various temperature sections can only start the
second stage heating after heating to the soft start temperature and maintaining the set
mold temperature soft start time.
3.3. Temperature PID self-learning system
3.3.1. Temperature PID self-learning settings
1) In the temperature PID screen, if the second stage wants PID self-learning, the second
stage selects "PID".If multiple temperature PIDs learn at the same time, select the
desired number of segments.
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F7PID
2) In the temperature screen, enter "set value". The PID self-learning program will be
heated to 100 degrees for the first time, so enter "set value" greater than 100 degrees,
and then press the electric heating key on the panel.
Note: The barrel temperature is best to start heating from room temperature
9-108
3) On the temperature PID screen, select “Use” for the “PID self-learning” option. After
selecting “Use”, a prompt “Temperature self-learning, please wait...” appears.
4) When the temperature PID self-learning is completed, it will pop up the dialog box
“temperature self-learning completed” and press OK.
9-109
3.3.2. Temperature PID self-learning function monitoring
After completing the temperature PID self-learning, you can see in the temperature PID
screen the parameter values of KP, KI, KD have changed, as shown in the figure
9-110
Note: During the PID self-learning process, do not cut off the power and turn off the
electric heat. If the power is cut off or the electric heat is turned off, wait until the
barrel temperature drops to room temperature before restarting the PID self-learning
procedure.In the PID self-learning process, do not change the temperature related
parameters and function options, so as not to cause the failure of PID self-learning.
9-111
4. Introduction of injection plasticization system
4.1. Injection system
General rules
The injection unit is used to melt and uniformly mix the materials to move the nozzle to the
mold and the press on mold resisting the injection pressure, and inject materials into the die
cavity with high pressure. The components mainly include nozzle, screw, charging barrel,
hopper, hydraulic motor of drive screw, hydraulic injection cylinder and screw positioning
gauge as shown below:
1 2 3 4 6 7 5
【1】electrical heating nozzle
【2】electrical heating charging pipe
【3】hopper
【4】cooling charging section
【5】hydraulic motor of drive screw
【6】hydraulic injection cylinder
【7】position display of screw
⚫ Nozzle and screw charging barrel
⚫ Drive motor and hydraulic injection cylinder
⚫ Display of screw position ruler
I. Nozzle and screw charging barrel
Small parts as shown below:
9-112
【1】Nozzle is the exit of material injection. Hydraulic nozzle or pneumatic nozzle can also
be used to control the switch to prevent material leakage.
【2】Raise the temperature of the charging barrel with thermocouple output for ease of the
injection after material melting.
【3】Screw is mainly used for material stir and ejection.
【4】Material entrance is mainly used to feed the materials.
II. Drive motor and hydraulic injection cylinder
Drive motor and hydraulic injection cylinder are the dynamical system of screw action
available for injection, plasticizing and decompression.
III. Display of screw position ruler
The display of screw positioning gauge is normally in the side of the injection unit with the
specific function as provide the user an exact reading of the time of injection plasticizing
and decompression action, as well as the position of the screw to ensure the accuracy
without the influence on product quality.
4.1.1. Basic introduction of injection screen
General rules
Settings of various data for the nozzle, including the pressure, velocity and function
selection.
⚫ Ejection setting screen
I. Injection setting screen
9-113
Entry path: Main screen →F3 injection
Position: Setting of the position where the injection transforms to pressure velocity.
Pressure: Setting of injection pressure.
Speed: Setting of injection speed.
Pressure switchover: Mode selection of pressure switchover from injection.
Pressure: pressure setting of packing pressure mode for the injection cylinder pressure
sensor.
9-114
Position: position setting of pressure switchover position mode.
Time: time setting of pressure switchover time mode.
Pressure: setting of packing pressure.
Velocity: setting of packing velocity.
Time: setting of packing time.
4.1.2. Introduction of injection transform holding function
General rules
This documents introduces the injection transform holding function and several standard
transform holding manners.
Outlines of the section
⚫ Injection transform holding position manner
⚫ Injection transform holding time manner
⚫ Injection transform holding pressure manner
Injection transform holding position manner:
9-115
Entry path: Main screen →F3 ejection
Function settings are as shown in the red box above.
Injection transform holding position selection: the position is set as the Injection transform
holding position of screw, which means the injection starts. When the screw position is less
than the set position, it starts to transform holding; under the transform holding mode when
both times action, whichever comes first will prevail.
Injection transform holding time manner:
9-116
Tick the Time option, set the injection time as the time of the injection transform holding,
that is, start the injection and switchover from transform holding after the setting time;
Mode of injection transform holding:
9-117
Under the mode of pressure switchover, set the pressure to the pressure of the pressure
transfer and the injection starts. Upon the set pressure, the transfer of pressure maintaining
is started. The pressure should be the feedback pressure of the pressure sensor for
transform holding and the position should be the protected position of the switch-over screw,
that is, start the injection and transform holding when the feedback pressure of the pressure
sensor is higher than the setting pressure and the screw position is smaller than the
switch-over testing position; time also functions at this time, transform holding would be
performed whether the pressure and the position are satisfied or not after the setting time.
4.1.3. Introduction of automatic purge function
General rules
The automatic purge function is applied to remove the residual materials stored in the
charging barrel. When in material recharging, the original materials in the charging barrel
needs to be removed. The automatic purge function can help the user to eliminate the
excess material in the charging barrel in an automatic and effective way.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of automatic purge function
9-118
⚫ Operation of automatic purge
I. Screen of automatic purge function
Entry path：Main screen →F4 Charging→F3 Purging
Introduction of automatic purge function:
The automatic purge function can be divided into three actions, such as injecting, charging
and suckback. Pressure and speed should be set according to the setting operation in the
injection screen during each action. Note: the charging action is controlled by time and will
be stopped upon reaching the setting time.
Discharging counting: set the number of cycles for operative automatic purge.
Discharging time: set the operating time (in second) of charging during the automatic
purge.
II. Automatic purge operation
Automatic purge:
Select to “Use” the purge on the purge screen in the mode of mold adjustment, then press
the “Injection” button on the control panel and enter the process of automatic purge.
9-119
4.1.4. Use of valve function (Option)
General rules
The valve function is applied in the switch control of valves in the mold for effective control
of the mold runners. During injection, users can set the number of gates needed to be
opened, the mode of open and the time of open, etc.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of gate
I. Screen of gate
Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection →F3 Valve
Debug the valve switch manually:
Under the manual or mold-adjustment mode, manually debug the corresponding valve
setting 1, the valve will in the output of setting time. (The lamp of the valve output point will
be on.) select the “All” setting 1 to realize the manually output of all the valves.
9-120
Open: set the open mode (time, position) of the valve.
In the drop-down list of the Function Menu, select the valve control mode wanted. There
are five modes including "not used": Not Used; Time ON Time OFF; Position ON Position
OFF; Time ON Position OFF; Position ON Time OFF.
9-121
Time ON Time OFF: the open mode of the valve is set to be time, and the clamping mode is
to be time. Set the open time to be “time of injection beginning” and the valve will output
upon the beginning of injection. Set the close time to be “time of injection off” and the valve
will close upon the setting time of output.
Position ON Position OFF: the open mode of the valve is set to be position, and the
clamping mode is to be position. Set the open time to be “ position of injection beginning”
and the valve will output after the screw reaching the setting position. Set the close time to
be “position of injection off” and the fate will close after the screw reaching the setting
position.
Time ON Position OFF: the open mode of the valve is set to be time, and the clamping
mode is to be position. When the open time is set to be “time of injection beginning”, the
valve will output after the beginning time of injection. When the clamping time is set to be
“position of injection off”, the valve will close after the screw reaching the setting position.
Position ON Time OFF: the open mode of the valve is set to be position, and the clamping
mode is to be time. When the open time is set to be “position of injection beginning”, the
valve will output after the screw reaching the setting position. When the clamping time is set
ot be “time of injection off”, the valve will close upon the setting time for output.
Holding process:
Holding: When the valve is selected to be used, the valve during the holding process
should be set as per time whether the modes of open and clamping is time or position.
Holding opening time: set the delay time of valve holding opening.
Holding clamping time: set the output duration time for valve holding.
4.1.5. Introduction to the use of the injection curve function
General rules
The injection curve function is applied during injection to monitor the changing situations of
relevant variables and show them in curves.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of injection curve function
I. Screen of injection curve function
9-122
Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection→F5 Curve
The screen of injection curve can display the setting speed, setting pressure, injection
speed and injection pressure.
Press [1] and [3] keys to move the reticule to check the position, pressure, time and speed
of a certain point-in-time.
The curve can be removed in the curve removal window 1.
Select to display the current curve or the historical curve in the curve selection option.
4.1.6. Introduction of secondary charging function
General rules
The secondary charging function is used for intrusion and makes sure the barrel is filled
with materials during cold slug injection to meet the requirements of some special
processes.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of secondary charging function
⚫ Action process of secondary charging
9-123
I. Screen of secondary charging
Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging→F4 Function
Select the mode of secondary charging function on the charging function screen as shown
in the Figure (default to be time, the time of secondary charging is 0).
9-124
Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging
If the mode of position is selected, set the proper secondary charging position in the
charging screen. The secondary charging position is the forward (injection) distance of the
screw before the secondary charging.
If the mode of time is selected, set the proper time for secondary charging time in the
charging screen.
9-125
II. Action process of secondary charging function
Mode of position Mode of time
mold
合模到底 clamping end
mold clamping end
合模到底
螺杆前进设定
setting distance for screw
的距离（注
forward
射） (injection)
setting
储料设定的时 time of
间
charging
charging
储料
injection, pressure
注射、保压
holding
injection, pressure holding
注射、保压
charging, cooling
charging, cooling 储料、冷却
储料、冷却
mold opening mold opening

开模开模
4.1.7. Introduction of pre-injection function
General rules
The pre-injection function is a special injection process with the aim of discharging some
oxidized materials in the front of the nozzle before nozzle forward action to make sure the
products could meet the customers’ needs.
Section overview
⚫ Background of pre-injection function
⚫ Screen of pre-injection function
I. Background of pre-injection function
During the injection process with PVC materials, some customers found that the materials
on the front sections of the previous mold turn to be yellowing or cooling frequently. The
main reason is that the materials remain too long time in nozzle barrel or air contact and
thus lead to the failure in satisfying customers’ needs. That’s why the pre-injection function
is needed to discharge this part of materials out.
II. Screen of pre-injection function
9-126
Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection →F4 Function
As shown in the above settings, set the injection time of nozzle forward and injection
distance of nozzle forward in the screen of injection function. If the distance is not set to be
0, the machine would be in the action upon distance; if the distance is set to be 0, the
machine would be in the action upon time.
When the machine is in the automatic mode, the machine will proceed injection before the
nozzle forward action. If the injection distance of nozzle forward is not set to be 0, set the
distance of screw forward, then proceed the nozzle forward action and continue to
complete the cyclic action; if the the injection distance of nozzle forward is set to be 0, set
the time for injection and then proceed the nozzle forward action.
4.1.8. Introduction of gas assistant injection function (Option)
General rules
The gas assistant injection function of HAITIAN is optional and used to blow to the inside of
the mold during injection, and is applied to partial process demanded molds.
Section overview
⚫ Use of gas assistant injection function
⚫ Logic of gas assistant injection function
9-127
I. Use of gas assistant injection function
Gas assistant injection function options are in the screen of injection configuration screen,
as shown below.
Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection→F4 Function
Set the position of gas assistant action and gas injecting timing. Output point 32 gas
assistant injection starting would output when the condition is met as shown below.
9-128
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F4IO→F4PC1
II. Logic of injection blowing function
mold chargin mold

injectio
clamping g openin
n
g
gas assistant
action position
gas
gas output
assista
assistant end
nt
injectio time end
n start
4.1.9. Basic introduction of nozzle function (Option)
General rules
During the charging process of the injection molding machine, the nozzle can be used to
prevent the materials from being leaked from the front end of the barrel with pneumatic or
9-129
hydraulic braking piston to control the opening and clamping.
Section overview
⚫ Structure of nozzle
⚫ Function application of nozzle
⚫ Action logic of nozzle function
I. Structure of nozzle
II. Function application of nozzle
9-130
Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection→F4 Function→F5 Nozzle
Make corresponding settings on the screens of injection, function and nozzle. The hydraulic
nozzle can set the pressure velocity of the nozzle switch.
The stroke mode should set the action time and the time mode should set the holding
timing.
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F4IO
The PB input point of the nozzle is shown as above.
9-131
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back →F4IO→F4PC1
The PC output point of the nozzle is shown above.
III. Action logic of nozzle function
Four optional combination control modes are available for the nozzle switch.
Nozzle on stroke, nozzle Off stroke:
Nozzle on→ On PB confirmation→On holding timing→Injection and pressure

holding→Nozzle Off→Off PB confirmation→Off holding timing
Nozzle on stroke, nozzle Off time:
Nozzle on→On PB confirmation→On holding timing→Injection and pressure

holding→Nozzle Off→Time of clamping action
Nozzle on time, nozzle Off time:
Nozzle on→Time of on action→Injection and pressure holding→Nozzle Off→time of

clamping action
Nozzle on time, nozzle Off stroke:
Nozzle on→Time of on action→Injection and pressure holding→Nozzle Off→Off PB
9-132
confirmation→Off holding timing
4.2. Charging System
General rules
The strengthen of plasticization capacity is one of the important indexes to evaluate the
performance of an injection molding machine. Only good plasticization capacity can lead to
high quality products. This function requires to uniformly fuse and plasticize plastic in
specified quantity to the molding temperature within the stipulated time and deliver to the
injection port.
Section overview
⚫ Component description of charging unit
⚫ Operating principle of charging
I. Component description of charging unit
3 1
【1】Preplastication motor: to provide charging power and back pressure.
【2】Hopper throat: the inlet of raw materials.
【3】Barrel screw: melt the materials and deliver them to the injection port.
Note: Do not activate the charging motor for charging action before the barrel reaching the
preset temperature, otherwise surfaces of the screw barrel will be damaged and would
even cause screw fracture.
II. Operating principle of charging
During the process of charging, the barrel temperature reaches the preset temperature and
the charging motor drives the screw to rotate and transfer the ram materials, and to achieve
plasticization with the barrel temperature and shearing of screws. Finally build up pressure
in the front end of the screw and keep closed-loop pressure control to realize uniform
plasticization.
9-133
4.2.1. Basic introduction of charging screen
General rules
Charging plasticization is an important step during the whole production process.
Section overview
⚫ Basic introduction of charging screen
I. Basic introduction of charging screen
【1】Setting of charging action: in this section, users can set the corresponding pressure
velocity and charging backpressure according to the start position of each stage to reach
the most appropriate charging process.
【2】Function setting of charging: in this section, users can set the suckback after charging
and suckback before charge according to the process requirements. More detailed
information about these functions will be given in other separate module.
【3】Display area of related values: in this area, users can be clear about the actual
numerical values of related parameters such as shot, time and position.
9-134
4.2.2. Setting of charging backpressure
General rules
Charging backpressure is the pressure value set for more compact plasticization.
Section overview
⚫ Setting of charging backpressure
I. Introduction of charging backpressure screen and function
On the basis of the charging stages set by the users, there is a backpressure set value for
each stage to be used for accurate control of charging backpressure zonally.
4.2.3. Setting of suckback before charge
General rules
Suckback before charge refers to decompress the screw to a certain position before charge
due to process requirements.
Section overview
⚫ Setting of suckback before charge
9-135
⚫ Setting of suckback before charge
According to the requirements of the process, user can select to use the suckback before
charge function. If used, HAITIAN provides time mode and position mode for customers to
select. Time mode means to decompress for how long time before charge and the position
mode means to decompress to which position before charge.
Note: After using the "Single cylinder injection protection" function, only position
mode can be used.
9-136
If the time mode is selected, the option of Time before charge is available to choose.
If the position mode is selected, the option of Position before charge is available to choose.
Setting of time and position is available in the screen of charging.
Note: the position here refers to the absolute position, for example, if the customer sets the
value to be 10, then the screw will be decompressed to a position of 10mm.
4.2.4. Setting of suckback after charging
General rules
Suckback after charging refers to decompress the screw to a certain position after charging
due to process requirements.
Section overview
⚫ Setting of suckback after charging
⚫ Setting of suckback after charging
9-137
According to the requirements of the process, user can select to use the suckback after
charging function. If used, HAITIAN provides time mode and position mode for customers
to select. Time mode means to decompress for how long time after charging and the
position mode means to decompress to which position after charging.
Selection of time and position is available in the screen of charging function.
9-138
If the time mode is selected, the option of Time after charging is available to choose.
If the position mode is selected, the option of Position after charging is available to choose.
Note: the position here refers to the absolute position, for example, if the customer set the
value to be 10, then the screw will be decompressed 10mm based on the end position.
4.2.5. Setting of cooling time before charge
General rules
Cooling time before charge is the delay time before charge but after the injection.
Section overview
⚫ Setting of cooling time before charge
⚫ Setting of cooling time before charge
9-139
The figure above is the setting place for cooling time before charge. Users can select to set
cooling before charge upon the process requirements.
4.3. Nozzle system
4.3.1. Basic introduction of nozzle screen
General rules
Settings of various data for the nozzle, including the pressure, velocity and function
selection.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of nozzle
⚫ Screen of nozzle parameters
I. Screen of nozzle
9-140
Entry path: Main screen →F7 Nozzle
Setting of pressure velocity for nozzle forward action.
9-141
Setting of pressure velocity for nozzle backward action.
Delay time setting and time setting for nozzle backward action.
Nozzle backward mode: the nozzle backward action can be selected to be active after
charging, before mold opening or after injection.
4.3.2. Function introduction of nozzle forward hold
General rules
The nozzle hold function is applied during injection, pressure holding and charging, during
when the nozzle needs to keep forward as to prop the mold with the nozzle to prevent
material discharging. Meanwhile, may keep nozzle forward for a period of time after the
nozzle going forward in place.
Section overview
⚫ Action screen of nozzle forward hold function
⚫ Function screen of keeping nozzle forward after getting in place
I. Action screen of nozzle forward hold function
(1) Nozzle forward valve output during injection:
9-142
(2) Nozzle forward valve output during pressure holding:
9-143
(3) Nozzle forward valve output during charging:
（4）Function screen of keeping nozzle forward after getting in place
9-144
Entry path: Main screen →F7 Nozzle
Time: the holding time of keeping nozzle forward action after getting in place.
9-145
5. Production management
5.1. Introduction of mold parameters/machine parameters saving and loading
General rules
Mold parameters are used to record the parameters for different molds. Machine
parameters include machine parameters, level data, monitoring data and alarming data.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of mold parameters/ machine parameters saving and loading
⚫ Functions of mold parameters
Functions of mold parameters/machine parameters
⚫ Solve the problem of parameter changes due to the changes of molds during mold
exchange.
⚫ Solve the problem of machine parameter loss due to program change.
⚫ Facilitate the mold management and usage
Introduction of function screen
(1). Mold save: enter the copy screen, select the proper object and saving type, then edit
the mold name, material, color, mold number and other relevant information, select to
confirm the mold parameter saving.
9-146
Enter path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold
Object: MMI/SD card
Select the media format of the source mold.
Saving mode: save/save as
Save: to overwrite the data of source mold into another existing mold.
Save as: copy the name data of the source mold into another mold that no longer exists,
set the “mold name” + “material”+ “color” in the line for SaveAs, while the save date would
be in automatic generation without inputting.
Maximum count: maximum quantity of mold data for storing.
Remaining count: remaining quantity of mold data for storing.
(2). Mold reading: enter the screen of mold reading and select the required source and
mold number to read the mold parameters.
9-147
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold→F3 Read
Source: MMI/SD card
Sort type: date/name.
(3). Mold copy: enter the screen of copy mold and copy the mold parameters stored in the
MMI/external storage device into the external storage device/MMI.
9-148
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold→F4 Copy
Copy mold: input the mold number that needed to be copied in this edit box, select to
confirm and realize the data copying.
Source: MMI/SD card
(4). Mold delete: enter the screen of delete mold to delete the mold parameter that has
been stored.
9-149
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold →F5 Delete
Source: MMI/SD card
(5). Machine parameters storing and reading: enter the screen of the machine to store
and read the machine parameters, level data, monitoring data and alarming data.
9-150
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold→F6 Machine
Mode operation: select to save or read the data.
Mode objective: select to save the data into the MMI or external storage device, or read
the data stored in the MMI or external storage device.
Adj.MachData: current machine data, CONFIG and D/A data;
User level data: setting of all levels for the current user;
Monitoring data: data in the monitoring screen;
Alarming data: historical alarming records.

5.2. Production count setting and output
General rules
Production plan refers to the production situation and production schedule under the
available resource condition within a certain time.
Section overview
⚫ Screen introduction
9-151
Functions of production plan
⚫ Proceed orderly production
⚫ Conducive to enhance resource utilization rate
⚫ Lower the cost of production and operation
⚫ Reduce inventory
⚫ Refine the cost management
I. Production count
(1) Count
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Production
Count per mold: the product quantity, total count and reject count for each mold shall be
increased as per the count per mold.
Clear count: select “use” in this setting and press confirm to return the total count to zero.
Shot count set: set the required total production quantity. When the shot count set is
reached, the computer will alarm that the shot count set has been reached and stop the
machine operation. The machine may not work until the shot count is returned to be zero.
9-152
Total count real: refers to the current real production quantity.
Packing count set: set the required packing quantity. The alarm will ring when the packing
quantity reach the set number and the screen will prompt that the total packing quantity has
been reached to inform the user. While, the machine will not stop but continue to the action
for next mold.
Packing count real: refers to the current real packing quantity, and the current value will
be cleared to 0 when it is same as the set value.
Clear reject count:return the reject count real to zero.
Reject count set: the upper limit of the allowable reject count.
Reject count real: accumulate in case of any reject and the action will be stopped and
alarm when reaching the reject count set.
Reject count continuous set: the upper limit of the allowable continuous reject count.
Reject count continuous real: accumulate in case of any reject and return to zero upon
normal production of one mold. When the reject count continuous real reaches the reject
count continuous set, the action will be stopped and alarm.
Automatic monitoring off bad out: when the automatic monitoring is off, PC point will
output with no alarm nor count.
(2) PPH
9-153
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Production→F3PPH
Display the production curve within the 24 hours.
ER: Shot Count Reached
Accumulated shot count reached the set value in the

Reason
production screen.
The warning lamp lights up. Action stops after the

Consequence
completion of this mold.
Enter the screen of PM---production, reset the total

Reset
shot count to zero.
ER: Packing Count Reached
Accumulated packaging count reached the preset

Reason
value.
The warning lamp flashes but the machine machine

Consequence
continues to the action of next mold.
Enter the screen of PM and Production, reset the total

Reset
packing count to zero.
5.3. Setting of quality parameters

General rules
Monitor the production parameters to protect the full-automatic production during the
production process.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of quality parameters setting
⚫ Alarming information
Function of quality parameters setting
⚫ Monitor the production process time and ensure production safety and product quality.
⚫ Control the production process accurately based on the productive task and prevent
9-154
overproduction and save resources.
I. Screen of quality parameters setting
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F3 Monitoring
Close mold: time of the whole mold clamping stroke.
Low pressure: time of the mold clamping stroke under low pressure.
High pressure: time of the mold clamping stroke under high pressure.
Mold open: time of the whole mold opening stroke.
Injection end: position when the injection ends.
Cycle: time for one cycle in automation.
Ejection: time for ejection stroke.
Mold opening end: mold platen position when mold opening ends.
Charging peak pressure: maximum pressure during the charging process.
Injection peak pressure: maximum pressure during the injection process.
9-155
Injection time: total time required for injection.
V→P switch: position for injection transform holding.
V→P switch: pressure for injection transform holding.
V→P switch: time for injection transform holding.
Injection monitoring: position for injection and holding end.
Injection starting point: position for injection starting.
Charge: time for the charging stroke.
Suckback time: time required for suckback.
Selection of reference data: choose the selection mode of reference data in the
pull-down menu.
Automatic sampling: take the action parameter of the mold produced during the starting
of the automatic monitoring function as the reference value for alarm. Relevant parameters
should be locked and not changeable for the user.
User set: the reference value set and tested by the user.
Automatic sampling + user set: take the action parameter of the mold produced during
the starting of the automatic monitoring function as the reference value for alarm, which
could also set by the user upon requirement.
Parameter setting: all the parameters related to the product quality are set in this table,
including the set value, actual value and allowable error. Options in the pull-down menu of
each parameter are used to control whether monitor the corresponding parameter, whether
give an alarm and when to stop the action, etc.
II. Function
When the Monitor option in the Quality screen is selected to use, the product will be marked
as bad part when exceeds the set tolerance range and generate related alarm if the alarm
output is selected to use.
Relevant aspects can be set to identify bad parts are: mold close time, inject time, plasticize
time, cut off time, cut off position, plasticization reached position, maximum inject pressure,
cut off pressure and maximum RMP. Several of them can be selected at the same time to
monitor the product quality.
9-156
III. Alarming information
ER: injection monitoring failed
During the whole injection process, the minimum

Reason position of the screw exceeds the upper and lower
limits of monitoring.
The alarm light is on. Consequences such as cycle

Consequence stopping and bad piece signal will be generated
according to the setting in the monitoring screen.
Check the setting upper limit value. If the setting value

is normal, it may be the change of injection process
Reset
parameter. In case of insufficient injection, may be the
reasons such as mold flash.
ER: Mold close end not reached
The actual high-pressure clamping time exceeds the

Reason
setting high-pressure mold clamping monitoring time.

The mold thickness is not properly adjusted and leads

to the failure of high-pressure mold clamping, and
readjust the mold thickness;
foreign matters in the mold and leads to the failure of
high-pressure mold clamping, check the mold cavity to
see whether any foreign matter;
Reset
the pressure and flow value of high-pressure mold
clamping is set to be too small and leads to insufficient
high-pressure mold clamping force and fails to
complete the high-pressure mold clamping action,
adjust the pressure and flow setting value of
high-pressure mold clamping within the proper range.
9-157
ER: Injection starting position error
At the beginning of injection, the program will sample

the current screw position, and compare with the
upper and lower limits of the injection starting position
Reason
set in the monitor 1 screen. If the value is exceeds the
range, alarm will be generated and the injection will
be stopped.

Under the premise of the proper setting of upper and

lower limits for injection end position, the generation of
this alarm indicates the pressure holding end position
Reset
deviates. Check the relevant parameters setting of
charging and suckback and inspect the oil circuit when
necessary.
ER: injection time error
The accumulated time from the injection start to

Reason holding end exceeds the upper and lower limit values
of injection monitoring time set in the monitor 1 screen.
The alarm light is on. No subsequent charging action

after the pressure holding ends. When the cooling time
Consequence
is over, open mold to the end directly, perform the
ejection action and do not continue the next cycle.

lower limits for injection end position, the generation of
Reset this alarm may indicate the instability of the whole
system. Please contact the service department of
HAITIAN, in case of failing to solve this problem.
ER: mold clamping protection failed
Reason The actual low-pressure mold protection time exceeds
9-158
the setting low-pressure mold protection monitoring
time.

The mold thickness is not properly adjusted and leads

to the failure of low-pressure mold protection, and
readjust the mold thickness; foreign matters in the
mold and leads to the failure of low-pressure mold
protection, check the mold cavity to see whether any
foreign matter; the pressure and flow value of
Reset
low-pressure mold protection is set to be too small
and leads to insufficient low-pressure mold clamping
force and fails to complete the low-pressure mold
clamping action, adjust the pressure and flow setting
value of low-pressure mold protection within the
proper range.
ER: suckback end not reached
The actual suckback time exceeds the setting

Reason
suckback monitoring time.
The alarm light is on. Under the manual mode, action

stops immediately and the alarm light flashes; under
Consequence the automatic mode, consequences such as cycle
stopping and bad piece signal will be generated
The suckback pressure and flow value is set to be too

small and leads to insufficient suckback force.
Reset Readjust the suckback pressure and flow value;
improper setting of suckback end position, readjust
the suckback end position.
ER: injection end position error
Pressure holding end position exceeds the upper and

Reason
lower limits.
9-159


lower limits for injection end position, the generation
of this alarm indicates the pressure holding end
Reset
position deviates. Check the relevant parameters
setting of injection transform holding and inspect the
oil circuit when necessary.
ER: entire process overtime
The actual cycle time for one period exceeds the

Reason
permissible upper limit value.
The alarm light is on and the action for next mold

Consequence
stops.
Check the setting upper limit value. Check the time

Reset
consumption for each step in the cycle.
ER: charge timeout
The actual charging time exceeds the setting charging

Reason
monitoring time.

First check whether any shortmolding, secondly the

Reset overhigh charging backpressure also may lead to the failing
of completing charging within the schedule time.
9-160
ER: mold opening end position error
The actual mold opening end deviates the deviation

Reason
value set in the monitor 1 screen.
The alarm light is on. Under the manual mode, action

stops immediately and the alarm light flashes; under
Consequence the automatic mode, consequences such as cycle
stopping and bad piece signal will be generated
Adjust the relevant parameters for mold opening to

make the movable platen within the upper and lower
Reset deviation values as set in the monitor 1 screen. Modify
the setting value in the effective zone under the
engineers’ guidance when necessary.。
5.4. Process data monitoring

General rules
Screens of Monitor 2/3 can record the vital production parameters and the error change
during the production. Adjust the relevant setting data upon the comparison through
different production cycle to improve the production quality.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of process data monitoring
Function of process data monitoring
⚫ Monitor the parameters of production process to ensure production safety and product
quality.
I. Introduction of screen
9-161
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F4 Monitor 2 /F5 Monitor 3
9-162
5.5. Description of process parameters change records

General rules
Process parameters change records and alarm records can be searched in relevant
screens.
I. Screen of alarm set
All the parameter changes and alarm records are recorded in the tables of the information
screen in event format.
9-163
Entry path: →F10 Back→F2 PM
Display Start No.: up to 10 sets of alarm data can be displayed on this screen. Enter the
serial number of the previous alarm data and the data would be displayed on the screen. At
most 5000 sets of alarm data can be stored by the system and remain to be saved upon
starting up after switch-off.
Total Error Count: record the total count of the alarms.
No.: indicating the displaying serial number is 1, which could increase to 5000.
Start Time: the time when the error is generated.
Reset Time: the time when the error is eliminated.
II. Screen of modify record viewing and time tracking
9-164
Entry path: Main screen→F10 Back→F2 PM→F9 Record
This screen is the viewing page for modifying record of reference data.
9-165
Entry path: Main screen→F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Record →F3 Event
This screen is the viewing page for machine status record.
9-166
Entry path: Main screen→F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Record →F4 Event
This screen is the viewing page for each module communication statues record.
5.6. Notes for automatic cycle start
General rules
The machine needs to enter the automatic mode for production after normal manual
operation. Before enterting the automatic mode for production, there are some points for
attention and the way the machine enters the automatic mode.
Section overview
⚫ Preparation before entering the automatic mode
⚫ Operation of entering the automatic mode
I. Preparation before entering the automatic mode
As the machine will proceed coherent production operation according to the previously set
parameters of each action after entering the automatic mode, following matters needs to be
noticed.
【1】Check all the set parameters again to see if reasonable or conform to assumption. In
case the parameters are gotten from mold parameters loading, make sure the loaded mold
9-167
parameters conform to the molds installed on the machine.
【2】Confirm each motion under the manual mode and observe whether correct and meet
the requirements.
【3】Make the mold opened before entering the automatic mode and plasticized if no
special reason.
【4】In case have any auxiliary machinery such as robot, mold heater, hot runner control
cabinet, make sure the auxiliary machinery is in normal operation.
【5】Turn on heating to the set temperature and switch on the motor.
II. Operation of entering the automatic mode
After the completion of preparation, then enter the automatic mode.
The automatic mode can be divided into full-automatic mode and semi-automatic mode.
Full-automatic mode means the machine will be in operation according to the setting cycle
until reach the setting cycle count or due to some abnormal interrupt; semi-automatic mode
means the machine stops running after a cycle or due to some abnormal interrupt.
Press the semi-automatic or full-automatic button on the panel, in case the safety gate is
opened, the machine will warn “the safety gate is not closed”; if the machine is equipped
with auto door, press the Safety door close button and the machine will proceed the motion
of safety door close; after the door is closed, press the Cycle start button again and the
machine will enter the automatic mode. If the machine is not equipped with auto door, close
the door manually, pressure the Cycle start button again and the machine will enter the
automatic mode. When the machine is equipped with a cycle start button, it is necessary to
press the cycle start button after the door is closed, or directly enter the automatic mode
after the door is closed.
Press the semi-automatic or full-automatic button on the panel, in case the safety gate is
closed, the machine will warn “Please open the”; if the machine is equipped with auto door,
press the Safety door open button and the machine will proceed the motion of safety door
open; after the door is opened, repeat the above steps and the machine will enter the
automatic mode. If the machine is not equipped with auto door, open the door manually,
repeat the above steps and the machine will enter the automatic mode.
III. Screen of operation tips
9-168
9-169
9-170
5.7. Introduction to the use of quality curve

General rules
The quality curve is applied for signal detection, data analysis, data comparison and so on.
In case the machine is in some problem, user can use this function to conduct analysis and
detection and helpful for problem finding and solving.
Section overview
⚫ Entry of screen
⚫ Selection of relevant monitoring parameters
I. Entry of screen
Entry the screen of quality curve.
9-171
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F6 Curve
Start No.: displays the quality curves for the subsequent 10 molds after this one.
Time (position) maximum/minimum value: displays the quality curve within this range.
Selection of relevant monitoring parameters
Select a parameter needed to check, and press the OK button. The light of this parameter
will be on and the relevant quality curve will be displayed in the curve chart as shown in the
above figure “cycle time”.
5.8. Identification of program version
General rules
Software version is the “ID card” for this set of software. It is important to provide the correct
software version to the supplier in case any problem with the program or change of
program is required for function upgrading.
I. Version identification
Enter the screen of version.
9-172
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back →F8 Version
Enter the screen of version, the information in the red box in the figure above is the content
of program version for this machine.
9-173
Entry path: Main screen →F10 down group →F8 Version →F4 Version
Entering the F4 version interface, the version number and communication status of each
module are displayed. In the above figure, the green light represents the normal
communication module.
5.9. Description of alarm light (Option)
General rules
Alarm light features striking prompting function and can clearly show whether the machine
is in normal operation or alarm condition. HAITIAN currently has three kinds of alarm lights,
which are the mono-color alarm light as standard configuration and other two optional
kinds.
Section overview
⚫ Mono-color alarm light
⚫ Asian three-color alarm light
⚫ CE three-color alarm light
I. Mono-color alarm light
As shown below, mono-color alarm light has only one output point. When the machine is in
alarm condition, the IO point outputs and the red lamp of the machine is on. When the
9-174
machine is in alarm-free condition, the IO point does not output and the green lamp of the
machine is on.
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back →F4IO→F4PC1
II. Asian three-color alarm light
As shown below, the Asian three-color alarm light includes three output points such as
alarm lamp, Auto light and Manual light.
Interior program:
Alarm light (red) Auto light (green) Manual light (yellow), the buzzer, if any, should be
the same as the red light.
9-175
III. CE three-color alarm light
As shown below, the CE three-color alarm light has three IO output points such as red,
yellow and green:
Emergency stop light (red)
Alarm light (alarms except the emergency stop) (yellow)
OK light (green)
The buzzer, if any, should be the same as the red light.
9-176
5.10. Lubrication setting

General rules
During the production process, lubricate the machine through the setting of lubrication to
prevent the machine from abrasion.
Section overview
⚫ Screen of lubrication setting
I. Screen of lubrication setting
9-177
Entry path: Main screen →F9 Quick set→F4 Parameter
Automatic lubricator count
The count interval in each lubricator
Remain lubricator count
Remain count from the next lubrication
Lubricator alarm time
Alarm when no lubrication input signal is detected within the lubrication alarm time
Startup automatic lubrication days
Start automatic lubrication when power on, if the off time exceeds this number of days;
ER: lubrication detection failed
During the lubrication alarm time in the lubrication

action, no feedback signal of lubrication pressure relay
Reason
is detected by the program, thus the alarm is activate
after the end of lubrication alarm time.
9-178
Consequence Mold clamping action is limited.
In case of insufficient lubrication oil, add the lubrication

oil;
In case of the program fails to receive the feedback
signals due to lubrication pressure relay or lubrication
Reset pipeline fault, check the lubrication circuit;
In case of the program fails to receive the feedback
signals due to lubrication detection electrical hardware
loop error, check the lubrication detection electrical
hardware loop.
ER: lubrication oil level error
Oil level is below lower limit. This function is currently

Reason
applied to machines with diluted oil lubrication.
Consequence Alarm light is on.
Check the lubrication oil level, if below the lower limit,

Reset add the lubrication oil. If the oil level is normal, check
the relevant electric circuit.
5.11. Storage and loading of machine parameters

General rules
After the test run of the equipment in the workshop, a set of statistics or the machine
parameters will be saved, including mechanical stroke statistics of the equipment,
parameters of the oil cylinder, calibrated linearity of the position transducer and the pump.
For the loss of machine parameters, the machine will not be able to work properly.
Therefore, it is essential to save and load the machine parameters.
Options introduced in this document
⚫ Introduction to screen of machine parameters
⚫ Introduction to storage of machine parameters
⚫ Introduction to loading of machine parameters
I. Introduction to screen of machine parameters
9-179
Entry pass: Main screen→F10 Next→F5 Mold→F6 Machine
II. Introduction to storage of machine parameters
The machine parameters can be saved locally or in the USB. Select one in the options
below:
【1】Insert the USB to the USB interface of the controller;
【2】Choose “Save” at the pull-down menu of “ModeOption”;
【3】Choose the item that needs to be saved after entering the password;
【4】Choose the storage target at the pull-down menu of “ModeObj”, MMI or Mem. Card;
【5】It will inform that “Data saved” after choosing Confirm at the pull-down menu of
“Confirm”.
III. Introduction to loading of machine parameters
The procedure of loading machine parameters is the same as that of saving machine
parameters, so just choose “Read” at the pull-down menu of “ModeOption”;
IV. Alarm information
9-180
ER：Mem. Card Not Ready
The external storage device is not connected when the

Cause
panel communicates with it.
Influence Error: Mem. Card Not Ready
Check the external storage device and make sure the

Reset external device works well.
Check the interface.
5.12. Introduction to robot interface (Option)

5.12.1. Simple robot
Options introduced in this document
⚫ Operation of interface
⚫ Introduction to IO points
Functions of robot
⚫ It can get products instead of workers, which is more convenient and faster.
⚫ It can avoid accidents, which is safer.
Selection of robot use
9-181
Entry pass: Main screen→ F9 Fast →F9 Take
Enter the Take screen and choose Use at the Robot mode bar, then you can use the robot
function.
Introduction to IO points
Input points:
“ROBCloseEnable” is a signal that the robot gives to the injection molding machine. When
the robot is selected to use, the injection molding machine will detect the signal when
preparing to close the mold and during mold closing. If the injection molding machine does
not detect the “CloseEnable” signal when preparing to close mold, it cannot close the mold.
Output points:
“IMM robot mold open ends” is a signal that the robot gives to the injection molding
machine. When the robot is selected to use and the movable platen is at the position of
mold open end, this point outputs.
Alarm information
ER: Wait For Robot - Mold Close Enable
Cause When the robot is selected to use but it does not send
the injection molding machine the confirmation signal,
9-182
the injection molding machine will be not able to do
corresponding actions and raise the “wait for
robot-mold close enable” alarm to inform the operator
of checking the corresponding input signal.
If the injection molding machine does not detect the

mold close enable signal when preparing to close the
mold, it cannot close the mold and has to wait, and will
sound the alarm if not receiving the signal within 20
Influence seconds. If receiving the signal, the alarm will
disappear and the machine will continue the cycle.
The alarm will be raised and operation will be stopped
if the signal disappears during mold closing.
Check the corresponding input signal according to

specific alarm.
Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the
controller.
5.12.2. European safety standards robot (Option)
General rules:
The European safety standards robot is used to take the product out of the injection
molding machine and put it into the product box, which can reduce labor and be more
automated.
Options introduced in this document:
⚫ Enter screen of robot settings
⚫ Introduction to I/O points
⚫ Work flow of European safety standards robot of injection molding machine
⚫ Analysis of alarm types
Enter screen of robot function settings
Whether to use or not to use the European safety standards robot does not depend on the
option on the Take screen but on the “ROBNotWork” of PB point. When the PB point has an
input signal, the robot is not used; on the contrary, the robot is used.
9-183
Entry pass: Main screen→ F9 Fast→F9 Take
Introduction to I/O points
Input points:
ROBCloseEnable: a signal the robot sends to the injection molding machine. The injection
molding machine will detect the signal when preparing to close the mold and during mold
closing. If the injection molding machine does not detect the mold close enable signal when
preparing to close the mold, it cannot close the mold.
ROBMldZoneFree: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When
the robot enters the mold zone, the mold zone free signal will disappear and the machine
will detect the signal all the time when preparing to open or close the mold and during mold
opening and closing. If the injection molding machine does not detect the mold zone free
signal when preparing to open the mold, the mold cannot be opened or closed.
ROBEjtFwdSafe: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
robot is selected to use, the injection molding machine will detect the signal when preparing
to eject and during ejection. If the injection molding machine does not detect the eject
forward safe signal when preparing to eject forward, the eject forward action cannot be
performed.
ROBEjtBwdSafe: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
9-184
to eject backward and during ejecting backward. If the injection molding machine does not
detect the eject backward safe signal when preparing to eject backward, the eject
backward action cannot be performed.
ROBEmgStop: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
robot is selected to use, the injection molding machine cannot work normally until it
receives the signal whether in the manual state or auto state. If the signal disappears, the
injection molding machine stops running immediately and sounds the alarm.
ROBNotWork: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine, which
decides whether to use the robot or not. When “ROBNotWork” has signal, the robot is not
used; on the contrary, the robot is used.
ROBCoreFwdEnab: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When
preparing for core forward and during core forward. If the injection molding machine does
not detect the core forward enable signal when preparing for core forward, the core forward
action cannot be performed.
ROBCoreBwdEnab: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When
preparing for core backward and during core backward. If the injection molding machine
does not detect the core backward enable signal when preparing for core backward, the
core backward action cannot be performed.
Output points:
IMMOpenEnd: When the robot is used, this point outputs when the movable platen is at the
mold open end position.
IMMCloseEnd: Whether the robot is used or not, this point outputs when the movable
platen is at the mold close end position.
IMMEjtFwdEnd: Whether the robot is used or not, this point outputs when the ejector is at
the eject forward end position.
IMMEjtBwdEnd: Whether the robot is used or not, this point outputs when the ejector is at
the eject backward end position.
IMMRbtAutomtc: Whether the robot is used or not, this point outputs when the machine is
in the semi-auto or full-auto state.
IMMCoreFwdEnd: Whether the robot is used or not, this point outputs when the core is in
the forward end position.
IMMCoreBwdEnd: Whether the robot is used or not, this point outputs when the core is at
the backward end position.
Work flow of European safety standards robot of injection molding machine
9-185
Core forward enable signal
Core forward Core forward signal
Mold zone safe, mold close enable signal
Mold closing Mold close signal

Injection →
Molding (Injection, cooling) Mold zone safe signal Robot

←
Machin
Mold open Mold open signal
e →
Core backward enable signal
Core backward Core backward signal Robot enter mold zone
Eject forward enable signal
Core forward Core forward signal Robot grab products
Eject backward enable signal
Eject backward Eject backward signal Robot put in products (into bad
pieces if there is a bad piece
signal)
V. Analysis of alarm types
ER: Robot emergency stop
When the robot is used, the emergency stop button of

Cause
the robot is pressed.
9-186
Influence The alarm lamp lights and the motor stops.
Release the emergency stop button of the robot while

Reset
ensuring safety.
ER: Wait for robot - Mold Zone Safe
When the robot is selected to use but it does not send

Cause
robot-mold zone safe” alarm to inform the operator of
checking the corresponding input signal.
The mold closing cannot be performed and the alarm

Influence
will be raised.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot - Mold Close Enable

Cause

9-187

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Eject Forward Safe

Cause
robot-ROB eject forward safe” alarm to inform the
operator of checking the corresponding input signal.
The eject forward cannot be performed and the alarm

Influence
will be raised.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Eject Backward Safe

Cause
robot-ROB eject backward safe” alarm to inform the
The eject backward cannot be performed and the

Influence
alarm will be raised.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
9-188
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Core Forward Enable

Cause
robot-ROB core forward enable” alarm to inform the
Core forward cannot be performed and the alarm will

Influence
be raised.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Core Backward Enable

Cause
robot-ROB core backward enable” alarm to inform the
Core backward cannot be performed and the alarm will

Influence
be raised.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
5.12.3. STAR robot（Option）
General rules:
The STAR robot is used to take the product out of the injection molding machine and put it
into the product box, which can reduce manual work and be more automated.
9-189
function.
Input points:
ROBCloseEnable: a signal the robot sends to the injection molding machine. The injection
molding machine will detect the signal when preparing to close the mold and during mold
closing. If the injection molding machine does not detect the mold close enable signal when
preparing to close the mold, it cannot close the mold.
ROBEnablOpnMld: a signal the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
9-190
to open the mold and during mold opening . If the injection molding machine does not
detect the mold open enable signal when preparing to open the mold, it cannot open the
mold.
ROBRecyclByRbt: a signal the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
robot is selected to use and in the full-auto or semi-auto state, the injection molding
machine cannot produce the next mold until it can monitor the cycle start signal when it
finishes the production of this mold and prepares to produce the next mold. Otherwise, it
will stop running.
ROBEjtFwdSafe: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
to eject and during ejection. If the injection molding machine does not detect the eject
forward safe signal when preparing to eject forward, the eject forward action cannot be
performed.
ROBEmgStop: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
robot is selected to use, the injection molding machine cannot work normally until it
receives the signal whether in the manual state or auto state. If the signal disappears, the
injection molding machine stops running immediately and sounds the alarm.
Output points:
IMMCloseEnd: Whether the robot is used or not, this point outputs when the movable
platen is at the mold close end position.
IMMEjtFwdEnd: Whether the robot is used or not, this point outputs when the ejector is at
the eject forward end position.
Analysis of alarm types:
ER: Robot emergency stop
The emergency stop button of the robot is pressed

Cause
when the robot is used.

Reset
ensuring safety.
9-191
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Cycle Start
The injection molding machine does not receive the

Cause
robot cycle start signal.
Influence It cannot enter the next cycle.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot—Mold Close Enable

Cause

disappear and the machine will continue to circulate
actions.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot—Mold Open Enable
9-192

Cause
robot-mold open enable” alarm to inform the operator
The alarm lamp lights and the mold open action cannot
Influence
be performed.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.

Cause
Eject forward cannot be performed and the alarm will

Influence
be raised.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
5.12.4. Enhanced robot (Option)
General rules:
The enhanced robot is used to take the product out of the injection molding machine and
put it into the product box, which can reduce labor and be more automated.
9-193
function.
Input points:
ROBCloseEnable: a signal the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
to close the mold and during mold closing. If the injection molding machine does not detect
the mold close enable signal when preparing to close the mold, it cannot close the mold..
ROBEnablOpnMld: a signal the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When the
to open the mold and during mold opening. If the injection molding machine does not detect
the mold open enable signal when preparing to open the mold, it cannot open the mold..
9-194
ROBRecyclByRbt: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When
the robot is selected to use and in the full-auto or semi-auto state, the injection molding
machine cannot produce the next mold until it can monitor the cycle start signal when it
finishes the production of this mold and prepares to produce the next mold. Otherwise, it
will stop running.
Output points:
Output point:
Analysis of alarm types:

Cause
Influence Next cycle cannot be performed.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.

Cause

Influence
seconds. If receiving the signal, the alarm will
9-195

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.

Cause
The alarm lamp lights and the mold open cannot be

Influence
performed.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
5.12.5. Robot mold open middle function (Option)
Function:
The injection molding machine sends the robot a mold open middle signal to make the
robot reach a safe holding position in advance, which can reduce the product taking time of
the robot. Add an input point ROBOpnAgainEn and an output point IMMRbtMiddle.
Function settings:
Enter the Take screen, select the mode of Robot Midl Op, Robot Midl DownPos and Robot
Midl DownTim.
9-196
9-197
KeepOpn: When the mold reaches the down position, the movable platen will continue to
open the mold instead of stop running.
PBCtrlStay: When the mold reaches the set down position, stop opening the mold and
check if the PB point “OpnAgainEn” has any signal. The machine can continue to open the
mold only when the PB point has signals. Or it shall wait all the time.
KeepOpn: When the mold reaches the down position, stop opening the mold and start
counting, and open the mold again when the time is up.
Robot Midl DownPos: Stop opening the mold when the mold reaches the set position and
start the robot.
Robot Midl DownTim: If choose the KeepOpn mode for the Robot Midl Opt, stay and start
counting when the mold reaches the set position, and then open the mold again when the
time is up.
Introduction to I/O points:
Input points:
ROBOpnAgainEn: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When
the robot is selected to use, the Robot Middle is selected to use, the mode of Robot Midl Op
is set to PBCtrlStay, the injection molding machine can only realize the Robot Middle
function when it can monitor the OpnAgainEn signal.
Output points:
IMMRbtMiddle: When the robot and the robot middle function are both selected to use, this
point outputs when the mold reaches the robot middle position and continues until the
beginning of the next mold.
Note:
1. This function shall be used with the robot, which means the robot shall have the
corresponding function.
2. Ensure absolute safety while using this function. You can adjust by setting a
larger set position and then decreasing gradually to reach a best value.
3. When the function is used for the interface of the European safety standards
robot (or the robot interface linked with similar safety signals) and the robot is at
the holding position, the mold zone safe signal must be sent to the injection
molding machine. Otherwise, the injection molding machine cannot complete the
subsequent mold opening action.
9-198
6. J6 card introduction (Option)
6.1. Basic introduction of J6 screen
General
Haitian J6 card is an optional function. This chapter mainly introduces the parameters and
function settings of J6 card and driver.
The options described in this document
⚫ Hydraulic axis J6 screen
⚫ Hydraulic axis drive screen
⚫ Hydraulic axis debugging screen
⚫ Hydraulic axis compensation screen
⚫ Hydraulic axis temperature screen
⚫ Hydraulic axis configuration screen
1) Hydraulic axis J6 screen
Access: main screen F9 quick set F5J6
Hydraulic axis index: When the machine has multiple pressure systems, the following
parameters need to be selected according to the axis index.
9-199
General: KP KI KD for the system pressure loop.
Pressure Rating: Pressure sensor's maximum pressure (bar). The sensor tag is marked.
Sensor minimum voltage: The minimum voltage of the pressure sensor, which is marked on
the sensor tag.
The maximum voltage of the sensor: the maximum voltage of the pressure sensor, which is
marked on the sensor tag.
Alarm Clear: It is used to clear J6 card alarms, and the alarm can also be cleared by
pressing the manual button.
Write-in confirmation: write to EEPROM and modify the J6 card parameters need write-in
confirmation, otherwise the parameters will be restored after restart.
Injection actual pressure ratio: multi-stage PID function.
Hold pressure actual pressure ratio: multi-stage PID function.
Alarm information: Alarm content when an alarm occurs on the J6 card.
Servo type: 10: HI driver; 11: KEB F5; 12: KEB F6.
2) Hydraulic axis drive screen
Access: main screen F9 quick set F3 drive
9-200
Drive Index: When the machine has multiple drive motors, the following parameters need to
be selected according to the axis index.
Maximum speed: drive speed (rpm) corresponding to 100% flow
Torque factor: The percentage of torque the controller gives to the drive. The maximum
value of F5 and HI drive is 1, ie (100%)
Encoder interface type: The encoder type of the motor: 1 represents endat and 2 for
resolve.
Speed loop: speed PID of the driver, 1: strong 2: medium 3: weak.
Number of encoder lines: number of encoder lines, related to the firmware of the encoder.
Pressure ring acceleration: The acceleration of the motor is shown in rpm/s.
Pressure ring deceleration: Motor deceleration is shown in rpm/s
The full address of the drive searches for the address and content: The internal address of
the drive parameter can be entered directly in the address box, and the parameter values of
this address are displayed and modified in the content box.
Operating status: The drive's operating status value. For drives of different brands, the
status values are different.
Set torque: The driver receives torque command from the J6 card.
Actual torque: The actual output torque of the motor.
Actual current: Actual output current of the driver.
Bus voltage: The capacitor voltage of the driver.
Switching frequency: The output switching frequency of the driver.
Motor zero: Motor encoder zero.
Enabled state: 0: The driver is not enabled, 1: The driver is enabled.
Current spike: The maximum value of the output current.
Bus voltage spike: The maximum bus voltage.
Alert Code: The code that drives the alert. Different brands of drives have different code
meanings.
Alert Status: Common driver alert content.
3) Hydraulic axis debugging screen
9-201
Access: main screen F9 quick set F5J6F4 Debugging
Enable disconnection: After use, the drive motor J6 card does not enable the drive.
Motor control mode: 1: Speed servo control mode.
Parameter function:
Reset: Resets the drive parameters and restores the factory settings.
Download: Download the drive parameters saved in J6 to the drive.
Upload: Backup the parameters of the drive into the J6 card and SD.
Zero-finding function:
Zeroing: The driver performs zero-setting and all permanent-magnet synchronous motors
must do.
Self-learning: Impedance measurement is performed and so far only KEB supports.
Direction selection: 1: The default direction.2: The direction of rotation of the motor is
reversed.3: The encoder direction is reversed.4: The encoder direction and rotation
direction are reversed.
4) Hydraulic axis compensation screen
9-202
Access: main screen→F9 quick set →F5J6→F5 compensation
Leakage compensation: The pressure ring can be used for speed compensation. The user
can set the compensation speed according to the actual pressure.
5) Hydraulic axis temperature screen
9-203
Access: main screen→F9 quick set →F5J6→F6 temperature
Drive temperature: The real-time temperature of the drive.It cannot be read without strong
power, 0 is displayed.
Drive warning temperature: When one of the drive temperatures is higher than this
temperature, the controller will warn of an over-temperature warning (liquid-cooled drive
setting 60, air-cooled setting 70).
Drive Alarm Temperature: When one of the drive temperatures exceeds this temperature,
the controller alerts the over-temperature alarm and stops the action (Liquid Cooled Drive
Setup 70, Air Cooled Setup 80).
Motor warning temperature: When one of the motor temperatures is higher than this
temperature, the controller will warn of an over temperature warning (setting 90).
Motor Alarm Temperature: When one of the motor temperatures exceeds this temperature,
the controller will warn the over-temperature alarm and stop the action (setting 100).
Hydraulic axis configuration screen
9-204
Access: main screen →F9 quick set →F5J6→F7 configuration
Model Information: You can choose MAIIs MAIII JUIII
Machine tonnage: Input the tonnage of the machine, in tons
Driver Brand: Optional HI F5 F6
Special encoding: Default 0 for special cases
Import file selection: When the above content is selected, the corresponding file name will
pop up automatically, and select the confirmation file.
Special configuration: For special models, manually enter the configured file name.
Parameter Management:
USB import to SD: Overwrite FILE files in U disk to SD card.
J6 to SD: Back up the AXS, SYS, and MEC files of the J6 card to the SD card.
SD to USB: Copy the FILE file of the SD card to the USB flash drive.
6.2. Alarm information
6.2.1. Introduction to Alarm Information
9-205
ER: Drive 1 ERROR
Cause Hydraulic Shaft Drive 1 Alarm
It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and

Influences
stop the current operation.
Check the specific alarm content on the hydraulic axis

driver screen, and combine the actual alarm resolution
Reset
content to clear alarm. Refer to “6.2.2. Introduction to
Analysis on Alert Contents on J6 and Drive Screen ”.
ER: Drive 2 ERROR
Cause Hydraulic Shaft Drive 2 Alarm

Influences

Reset
ER: J6 Card Error
Cause Hydraulic Shaft J6 card generates alarm

Influences

Reset
9-206
ER: Electric shaft drive 1 ERROR
Cause Electric shaft drive 1 generates an alarm

Influences
Check the specific alarm content on the electric axis

Reset
ER: Electric shaft drive 2 ERROR
Cause Electric Shaft Drive 2 Generates an Alarm

Influences
Check the specific alarm content on the electric axis

Reset
ER: Electric Shaft J6 card ERROR
Cause Electric Shaft J6 card generates alarm

Influences
Check the specific alarm content on the electric axis J6

screen, and combine the actual alarm resolution
Reset
9-207
ER: Injection shaft drive temperature is too high
Injection Shaft Drive Temperature Is Higher Than Drive

Cause
Alarm Temperature

Influences
Turn off the motor and wait for the driver temperature
Reset
to drop
ER: The temperature of the storing shaft drive is too

high
The storing shaft drive temperature is higher than the

Cause
drive warning temperature.

Influences
Turn off the motor and wait for the driver temperature
Reset
to drop.
ER: Injection shaft motor temperature is too high
Injection shaft motor temperature is higher than motor

Cause
warning temperature

Influences
Turn off the motor and wait for the motor temperature
Reset
to drop.
9-208
ER: The temperature of the storing shaft motor is too

high
Storing shaft motor temperature is higher than motor

Cause
warning temperature

Influences
Reset
to drop.
ER: Temperature of Drive 1 is too high
Temperature of hydraulic shaft drive 1 is higher than

Cause
the driver alarm temperature

Influences
Reset
to drop.
ER: Temperature of Motor 1 is too high
Hydraulic shaft motor 1 temperature is higher than the

Cause
motor warning temperature

Influences
Reset
to drop.
9-209
ER: offline communicatation with the axis card
Cause Controller disconnected from J6 card

Influences
Check if the communication cables between the

controller and the J6 card are properly connected.
Reset
Whether the J6 state is turned on or not and whether it
is in normal communication state.
6.2.2. Analysis of alarm content on J6 and drive screen
Alarm information Cause Reset
Communication between J6 Check whether communication

J6 card master station
card as master and driver is not lines between J6 and drive are
communication lost
established normal
9-210
No SD card inserted during Insert SD card and perform

SD card does not exist
parameter import parameter import again
No U disk inserted during Insert U disk and perform

parameter import parameter import function
U disk does not exist again
Pressure sensor error Shaft 1 - pressure sensor - error Check if pressure sensor value
1 1 is within normal range
9-211
Alarm information Cause Reset
Drive load is too high Press the manual to clear

Drive overload alarm after closing the motor
Motor overload Press the manual to clear

Motor protection alarm after closing the motor
Motor speed is too high Press the manual to clear

Motor overspeeding alarm after closing the motor
Press the manual key to

clear the alarm and then
Self-learning failed Drive self-learning failed
restart the self-learning
function
Encoder wiring error Check if the encoder wiring

Encoder failure is normal
9-212
6.3. Drive zeroing/self-learning function
6.3.1. Zero-finding/self-learning significance
The permanent magnet synchronous motor of the drive looks for the encoder zero position.
Each drive must perform this operation. If the motor is turned on and enabled before this
operation is performed, it may result in a galloping.
6.3.2. Zeroing/self-learning settings
1) Enter the debug screen, turn off the motor and disconnect the enable function to use.
2) Enter the password 66, then enable Write Select Use and turn on the motor.
9-213
3) Select zero/self-learning, start zero/self-learning, and pop up the prompt box.

Zero-finding prompt box is finding the zero position, please wait!
9-214
4) Wait for the zero-finding/self-learning action to complete.
6.3.3. Tips for zeroing and self-learning
1) It is forbidden to open the motor and enable the driver before zero-zero/self-learning
operation.
2) Please do not cut the screen as much as possible during the zero-finding/self-learning
process.
9-215
7. Alarm list
Safety confirmation:
ER: Mold ID Check Failure
The mold ID used to read the mold is different from the

Cause
actual mold ID.
Semi-auto or full-auto cannot be performed and the

Influence machine will shift directly to the manual mode in the
semi-auto or full-auto mode.
Read the mold ID correctly to be consistent with the

Reset actual mold ID.
Set the mold ID correctly.
ER: Transmission Failure

Cause communication ready or communication received
signal.
The information cannot be transmitted, so that the

Influence
mold number transfer function cannot be used.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Safety Door Not Closed
Prompt before entering the auto or auto mold adjust

Cause
state, or open the door in the wrong time.
9-216
Influence Mold closing, injection and charging are prohibited.
Close the safety door and check the electrical

Reset
hardware circuit of the safety door.
ER: Safety Door 2 Not Closed
The front safety door is detected by several limit

Cause switches. When the safety door is closed, one of the
limit switches is not pressed, which causes the alarm.
Influence Mold closing, injection and charging are prohibited.
Check if the front safety door is closed completely.

Check the limit switch that corresponds to the “Safety
door closed 2” input point and adjust its installation
Reset position properly while ensuring safety after having
contacted after-sales staff of Haitian for confirmation;
Check the electrical hardware circuit of safety door
closed 2.
ER: Rear Safety Door Not Closed
Cause The rear safety door is opened.
Influence All actions are prohibited.
Reset Close the rear safety door.
ER: Please Open Safety Door
Cause If the safety door is closed before entering the auto or

auto mold adjust state, the machine will inform of
9-217
opening and closing the safety door to activate the
desired mode.
Wait for taking products during the interval in the

Influence semi-auto mode and wait for activation before the auto
and auto mold adjust mode.
Reset Open the safety door.
ER: Please Open Safety Door 2
If the safety door is closed before entering the auto or

auto mold adjust state, the machine will inform of
Cause
opening and closing the safety door to activate the
desired mode.
Wait for taking products during the interval in the

Influence semi-auto mode and wait for activation before the auto
and auto mold adjust mode.
Reset Open the safety door.
ER: Safety Door Detection Abnormal
Foreign matters enter the door close area while the

Cause
automatic door is closed.
Influence Immediately stop closing the door.
Check if there are foreign matters in the door close

Reset
area.
ER: Rear Safety Door Detection Abnormal
Cause Foreign matters enter the door close area while the
9-218
rear automatic door is closed.
Influence Immediately stop closing the door.
Check if there are foreign matters in the door close

Reset
area.
ER: Safety Door Servo Abnormal
The driver does not send a servo signal to the

Cause
controller.
Influence Stop opening or closing the door.
Reset Check the electrical circuit of the driver safety door.
ER: Zero Position of Safety Door Lost, Please Close

Door To End
The computer cannot find the zero position of the

Cause
safety door.
Influence Stop opening the door.
The first action after power on. If the door is not closed,
close the door manually (press the door close button
Reset
all the time). The alarm will disappear automatically
and return to normal when the door is closed.
ER: Please Release Cycle Start Button
The program will check the cycle start button to see if it

is in the safe state when entering the auto mode. If the
Cause
button is fount to be pressed for long, the program will
raise the alarm and prohibit entering the auto mode.
9-219
Prompt to release the cycle start button. The prompt

Influence
will disappear when the cycle start has no signal.
Release the cycle start button.

Reset
Check the circuit connection.
ER: Please Release Cycle Stop Button
When pressing the semi-auto/full-auto button, the cycle

Cause
stops and there is no signal.
Prompt to release the cycle stop button. The prompt

Influence
will disappear when the cycle stop has a signal.
Release the cycle stop button.

Reset
Check the circuit connection.
ER: Please Press Cycle Start Button
In the semi-auto, full-auto or auto mold adjust state, the

machine will prompt the operator to press the cycle
Cause
start button after the safety door is closed to start cycle
actions.
Influence Prompt you to press the cycle start button.
Reset Press the cycle start button according to the prompt.
ER: Please Select To Use Electric Motor Temperature

Detection Function
Do not use the electric motor temperature detection

Cause
function for the air-cooled electric motor.
9-220
Prompt you to select the electric motor temperature

Influence
detection function.
Select to use the electric motor temperature detection

Reset
function according to the prompt.
ER: Please Press Mold Close Button
In the semi-auto, full-auto or auto mold adjust state,

part safety standard will inform the operator of pressing
Cause
the mold closing button after the safety door is closed
so as to confirm start of real cycle.
Influence Prompt you to press the mold close button.
Reset Press the mold close button according to the prompt.
ER: Release Manual/Emergency Stop Button
The manual button is long pressed

Cause
The emergency stop button is pressed
Influence Stop all actions and turn off the motor.
Release the manual button

Reset Release the emergency stop button while ensuring
safety
Safety alarm:
ER: Mechanical Safety Abnormal
9-221
The mechanical safety has the function of electrical

Cause inspection which is to check if the mechanical safety
block is successfully lifted up and dropped.
Raise the alarm and stop opening and closing the

Influence
mold.
The alarm appears during mold closing means that the

mechanical safety is not successfully lifted up. Check
the position of the block. If the block is lifted up, adjust
the installation position of the detection sensor. If the
sensor is installed correctly, check the electrical
hardware circuit related to the sensor;
Reset In order to prevent the block dropping in the wrong time

or manual short-circuiting in the semi-auto state, the
program will check if the block has dropped when the
last cycle finishes and the next cycle starts. If the
program does not detect that the block has dropped,
adjust the installation position of the detection sensor.
If the sensor is installed correctly, check the electrical
hardware circuit related to the sensor.
ER: Low Air Pressure
The machine does not receive the air pressure check

Cause
signal during mold opening and closing.
Influence Mold opening and closing are prohibited.
Reset Increase the air pressure.
ER: Front Door Light Screen Blocked
Cause The light screen of the front door is blocked.
Influence Cannot do the mold closing action and raise the alarm.
Reset Check if the light screen of the front door is blocked.
9-222
Check the relative electrical circuit.
ER: Mechanical Protection
Foreign matters enter the mold open area of the toggle

Cause injection molding machine or the two-plate injection
molding machine, which causes the alarm.
Influence Prohibit all actions.
Check if there are foreign matters in the mold open

area;
Reset Check the electrical element (generally, light screen)
that corresponds to the “mechanical protection” input
point.
ER: Feeding Ladder In Use
The feeding ladder is put down when the injection unit

Cause
actions.
Injection, charging, suckback and nozzle actions are

Influence
prohibited.
Reset Put the ladder back while ensuring safety.
ER: Please Keep Away From Safety Pedal
Cause The safety pedal is pressed down.
Influence Prohibit all actions and disable the alarm manually.
Keep away from the safety pedal;

Reset
If you are sure that there is no foreign matter on the
9-223
pedal, check if the pedal gets stuck;
Check the installation position of the limit switch of the
pedal. If necessary, adjust the installation position
properly while ensuring safety;
Check the electrical hardware circuit of the safety
pedal.
ER: Hydraulic Safety Abnormal
The hydraulic safety valve core is not opened or closed

Cause
in time.
Influence The alarm lamp lights and all actions stop.
Press the manual button to disable the alarm and

repeat the earlier operations. If the alarm continues,
check the hydraulic safety valve.
If the hydraulic safety detection switch is not that with a
Reset
built-in valve core, check the installation position of the
hydraulic safety detection switch to enable it to sense
correctly;
Check the hydraulic safety valve to see if it is stuck
ER: Mold Height Abnormal
The actual mold height exceeds 20% of the limit range

Cause
of the set mold height.
Cannot do the mold opening/closing, nut and tie bar

Influence
actions.
Reset Set a proper mold height.
ER: Clamp Abnormal
9-224

Cause “mold close enable” or “mold open enable” signal from
the clamp when opening or closing the mold.
Influence Cannot do the mold closing action and raise the alarm.
Overhaul the clamp and the controller.

Reset
Check the related electrical circuit.
QMC:
ER: QMC Error
Cause Input point: OMC normal, no signal input.
Check the electromagnetic platen and the electrical

Reset
wiring connection.
ER: QMC Mode Error
When choosing the QMC mode in the

Cause semi-auto/full-auto mode, the machine will warn of
QMC mode error and shift to the manual mode.
Do not use the QMC function in the semi-auto/full-auto

Reset
mode. Use it in the manual or mold adjust mode.
Tie bar:
9-225
ER: Limit Failure
1. When pressing the tie bar forward/backward button,

the fixed platen nut and the rear platen nut does not
move backward to end.
2. When the tie bar moves backward and the rear
Cause platen nut does not move backward to end, the fixed
platen nut starts to move backward
3. When the tie bar moves forward and the fixed platen
nut does not move backward to end, the rear platen nut
starts to move forward.
Influence The tie bar cannot move forward or backward.
Check the position of the nut, the limit switch and the
Reset
wiring connection.
ER: Under Mechanical Protection
1. After choosing the tie bar option button, press the

mold opening/closing and mold adjust buttons.
Cause 2. When any of the fixed platen nut, rear platen nut and
tie bar does not move forward to end, pressed the mold
opening/closing and mold adjust buttons.
The tie bar cannot move forward or backward and

Influence
mold opening and closing cannot be performed.
Do not press the mold opening and closing or the mold

Reset adjust forward and backward buttons in the tie bar
mode.
Material temperature:
ER: Keep Warm On Time Not Up
9-226
Cause Keep warm timing is not finished.
Influence Cannot do injection, charging and suckback actions.
Allow to perform injection, charging and suckback after

Reset
the keep warm on timing is up.
ER: Temp.ReachUpLimit, ElectricHeatAutoOff
The temperature exceeds the upper limit of the set

Cause
temperature value.
Influence Raise the alarm and turn off the electric heat.
Check if the heating band is abnormal. If not, reset a

proper temperature parameter; after pressing the
Reset manual button, the alarm will disappear but the electric
heat still cannot heat. Turn off the electric heat and
restart it, the electric heat will then start to heat.
ER: Electricity Leakage Protection Abnormal
Cause Electricity of barrel heating circuit leaks away.
Influence The electric heat will be turned off after the alarm.
Check the heating circuit and find out the source of

leakage;
Reset
Check the electrical hardware circuit detected by
electricity leakage protection.
ER: Heating Abnormal
Cause The machine will raise the alarm if the increased value
of the temperature is below the “continuous heating
9-227
check degree” within three minutes after starting the
barrel heating.
Influence The electric heat will be turned off after the alarm.
Check if the heating circuit is abnormal;

Reset Properly adjust the “continuous heating check degree”
according the actual situation of the machine.
ER: Temperature Deviation
The temperature of the tube is not high enough or a bit

Cause
too high.
Influence Injection, charging and suckback are prohibited.
Check the set temperature and the actual temperature

Reset
of the tube, and examine the heating circuit.
ER: Mold Temperature Deviation
Cause The mold temperature exceeds the limit range.
Wait the actual mold temperature to reach within the

set range.
Reset
Check the set temperature and the actual temperature
of the tube, and examine the heating circuit.
ER: Oil Temperature Deviation
The actual oil temperature is lower than the enable

Cause
lowest oil temperature.
9-228
Influence Mold closing is prohibited.
Check the set oil temperature, actual oil temperature

Reset and oil cooling circuit, or start the oil preheating
function.
ER: Oil Temperature Too High
The actual oil temperature is higher than the enable

Cause
highest oil temperature.
Influence Mold closing is prohibited and the motor stops.
Check the set oil temperature, actual oil temperature

Reset and oil cooling circuit, or start the oil preheating
function.
ER: System Auto Into Keep Warm, Please Press

Manual Button To Return
If the machine is not operated for long in the manual

state, the barrel heating will automatically switch to the
Cause
Keep warm state and the machine will display the
information.
Influence Inform of entering Keep warm.
Reset Press the manual button to restore normal heating.
ER: Heating Zone 1 Cut Off
Heating zone 1 is cut off and the input point has no

Cause
signal.
Influence Inform that heating zone 1 is cut off.
9-229
Check the hardware of the heating zone 1 and the

Reset
electrical circuit, and press the manual button to reset.

Cause
signal.

Reset

Cause
signal.

Reset

Cause
signal.

Reset
9-230

Cause
signal.

Reset

Cause
signal.

Reset

Cause
signal.

Reset
9-231

Cause
signal.

Reset

Cause
signal.

Reset
ER： Thermocouple Cut Off
Cause The thermocouple is cut off.
Switch off the electric heat and warn that the

Influence
thermocouple is cut off.
Reset Check the heating circuit.
ER: Upper Top Cover Not Closed
Cause The upper top cover is opened.
Mold opening and closing, injection, charging and

Influence
nozzle forward are prohibited.
9-232
Close the upper top cover;

Check the installation position of the limit switch of the
upper top cover and properly adjust the installation
position while ensuring safety after contacting
Reset
after-sales service personnel of Haitian for
confirmation;
Check the electrical hardware circuit of the upper top
cover.
ER: Hopper Check Abnormal
Cause The hopper is not closed.
Reset Close the hopper.
ER: Hopper Check Abnormal#2
Cause The hopper2 is not closed.
Reset Close the hopper2.
ER: Injection Shield Not Closed
The machine will check if the injection shield is closed

during injection and will raise the alarm if not. New
Cause
national safety standards will also be checked during
charge and nozzle forward.
Injection, charging and nozzle forward will be stopped

Influence
if the injection shield is not closed.
9-233
Close the injection shield, repeat the above actions to

see if the alarm continues. If the alarm continues,
Reset
check the electrical hardware circuit related to the
injection shield.
ER: Injection Shield Safety Circuit Abnormal
The machine will check the injection shield and

injection shield close#2 input signals during injection
Cause
and will raise the alarm when both the injection shield
and injection shield close#2 signals become abnormal.
The current action will stop if it is not closed during

Influence injection, charging and nozzle forward, and cannot
start electric heating and the motor.
Close the injection shield and check the electrical

Reset
hardware circuit related to the injection shield.
ER: Heating Abnormal
The machine will raise the alarm if the increased value

of the temperature is below the “continuous heating
Cause
check degree” within three minutes after starting the
barrel heating.
Turn off the electrical heating and warn of abnormal

Influence
heating.
Check if the heating circuit is abnormal; adjust the

Reset “continuous heating check degree” properly according
to the actual situation of the machine.
ER: Charge Gas Injection Timeout
9-234
When the screw position exceeds 85% of the total

Cause
charge stroke, gas injection time is not up.
Influence Close the injector and raise the alarm.
Reset Check the electrical circuit related to charging.
ER: Screw Melt Pressure Too High
Cause The screw melt pressure exceeds the set value.
Influence Stop injection and raise the alarm.
Reset Check the electrical circuit related to charging.
ER: Charge No Move Monitor Timeout
When the motor is on, do the charging action. If the

actual screw position is within the detecting position all
Cause
the time and the accumulative duration reaches the set
monitoring time, stop the action and raise the alarm.
Influence Stop charging and raise the alarm.
Reset Press the manual button to disable the alarm.
ER: Charge Safety Position Protection
When the charging starts, record the current screw

position as S1, and then force to suckback with a
suckback distance ≥1.0mm. When the suckback
Cause finishes, check the actual position of the screw during
the subsequent charging process. If the value is
smaller than S1+X and lasts T seconds, the action will
stop and the machine will raise the alarm.
9-235
Influence Stop charging and raise the alarm.
ER: Material Shortage
The material shortage alarm input point has no input

Cause signal while the feeding forward end point has signal
during charging.
Influence Warn of material shortage.
ER: Feed Enable
The material shortage alarm input point has input

Cause
signal during charging.
Influence Warn of feeding enable.
Automatic detection:
ER: Cycle Not Finish On Time
The actual circulation time of one cycle exceeds the

Cause
enabled upper limit.
The alarm lamp lights and the next mold action is

Influence
stopped.
9-236
Check the set upper limit value and the time spent
Reset
each step of the cycle.
ER: Injection Monitoring Failure
The minimum screw position exceeds the monitoring

Cause
limit range after the injection pressure holding finishes.
The alarm lamp lights. The cycle stops and the bad
Influence piece signal will appear according to the settings on
the monitoring screen.
Check the set upper limit. If the set value is normal, it

may be because of the change of injection technical
Reset
parameter. If injection is not sufficient, it may be
because of insufficient eject or flash.
ER: Charge Not Finish On Time
The actual charging time exceeds the set charging

Cause
monitoring time.
First check if the machine is short of material. The reason

Reset why charging cannot be finished within the prescribed time
may be that the charge back pressure is too high.
ER: Mold Close Set Position Not Reached
The actual high-pressure clamping time exceeds the

Cause
set high-pressure clamping monitoring time.
9-237
The mold height is not adjusted well, so the

high-pressure clamping cannot be performed. Please
readjust the mold height;
There are foreign matters inside the mold, so the
high-pressure clamping cannot be performed
successfully. Please check if there are foreign matters
Reset
in the cavity;
The pressure and the flow rate of high-pressure
clamping are set so low that the high-pressure
clamping power is not sufficient and clamping cannot
be performed. Please readjust the set value of the
pressure and flow rate of high-pressure clamping.
ER: Injection Start Position Deviation
When the injection starts, the program will take

samples from the current screw position and compare
it with the upper and lower limits of the injection start
Cause
position on the monitor I screen. If it exceeds the
range, the machine will raise the alarm and stop
injection.
On the premise that the upper and lower deviation

values of the injection start position are correctly set,
the appearance of this alarm means that deviation of
the charge end position or the after-charge suckback
Reset
end position occurs, which causes the deviation of the
injection start position. Please check the relative
parameter settings of charge and suckback. If
necessary, check the oil-way.
ER: Injection End Position Deviation
9-238
The pressure holding end position exceeds the limit

Cause
range.

values of the injection end position are correctly set,
the appearance of this alarm means that deviation of
Reset
the pressure holding end position occurs. Please
check the relative parameter settings of injection
pressure holding. If necessary, check the oil-way.
ER: Injection Time Deviation
The accumulative time from injection start to pressure

holding end exceeds the upper and lower deviation
Cause
values of the injection monitoring time on the monitor I
screen.
The alarm lamp lights. After the pressure holding

finishes, the charging is not performed. After the
Influence
cooling time, open the mold to the end, do ejection and
do not continue the next cycle.

values of the injection monitoring are correctly set, the
appearance of this alarm may mean that the entire
Reset
system of injection is not stable. If you are not able to
solve this problem, please contact the service
department of Haitian.
ER: Mold Close Protection Failure
The actual low-pressure mold protection time exceeds

Cause
the set low-pressure mold protection monitoring time.
Influence The alarm lamp lights. The cycle stops and the bad
piece signal will appear according to the settings on
9-239
The mold height is not adjusted well, so the

low-pressure mold protection cannot be completed and
please readjust the mold height; there are foreign
matters inside the mold, so the low-pressure mold
protection cannot be completed and please check if
there are foreign matters in the cavity; the pressure
Reset
and flow rate of the low-pressure mold protection are
set too low, so the low-pressure clamping force is not
strong enough and the low-pressure clamping cannot
be completed. Please adjust the set value of the
pressure and flow rate of low-pressure mold protection
within a proper range.
ER: Suckback End Set Position Not Reached
The actual suckback time exceeds the set suckback

Cause
monitoring time.
The alarm lamp lights. In the manual state, all the

actions stop immediately and the alarm light blinks.
Influence The cycle stops and the bad piece signal will appear
according to the settings on the monitoring screen in
the auto status.
The pressure and the flow rate of suckback are set too
low, so the suckback power is not enough and please
Reset readjust the pressure and flow rate of suckback; the
suck back end position is set improperly, so please
readjust the suckback end position.
ER: Mold Opening Amount Reached
The accumulative amount of mold opening reaches the

Cause
set value on the production screen.
The alarm lamp lights. The machine stops running after

Influence
this mold.
Reset Enter the PM-Production screen and set the total mold
9-240
opening amount to zero.
ER: Mold Opening Packaging Amount Reached
The accumulative packaging amount exceeds the

Cause
preset value.
The alarm lamp blinks but the machine will continue

Influence
the next mold.
Enter the PM-Production screen and set the total

Reset
amount of packaging to zero.
ER: Number Of Bad Piece Reached
The accumulative number of bad pieces has reached

Cause
the set upper limit.
Actions stop and the production of the next mold

Influence
cannot be continued.
Clear the actual number of bad pieces and check items

Reset
of bad piece monitoring and alarm.
ER: Continuous Bad Piece Number Reached
The continuous bad piece number has reached the set

Cause
upper limit.
Actions stop and the production of the next mold

Influence
cannot be continued.
Check items of bad piece monitoring and alarm and

Reset
clear automatically after normal production.
9-241
ER: Mold Open End Position Deviation
The actual mold open end deviates from the set upper
Cause
and lower deviation value on the monitor I screen.
The alarm lamp lights. In the manual state, actions

stop immediately and the alarm lamp blinks. The
Influence cycle stops and the bad piece signal will appear
according to the settings on the monitoring screen in
the auto status.
Adjust relative parameters of mold open to make the

position of the movable platen within the set upper and
Reset lower deviation values on the monitor I screen after
mold opening. If necessary, change the set value of the
effective zone under the guidance of engineering staff.
Robot:
ER: Robot Emergency Stop
When the robot is used, the emergency stop button of

Cause
the robot is pressed.

Reset
ensuring safety.

Cause
9-242
Influence Cannot do the next cycle.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot—Mold Zone Safe

Cause
robot-mold zone safe” alarm to inform the operator of
checking the corresponding input signal.
Cannot do the mold opening and closing and raise the

Influence
alarm.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.

Cause

Influence
seconds. If receiving the signal, the alarm will
9-243
if the signal disappears during mold close.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.

Cause
The alarm lamp lights and the mold opening cannot be

Influence
performed.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.

Cause
Influence Cannot do the eject forward action and raise the alarm.

Reset specific alarm.
9-244
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Eject Backward Safe

Cause
robot-ROB eject backward safe” alarm to inform the
Cannot do the eject backward action and raise the

Influence
alarm.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Core Forward Enable

Cause
robot-ROB core forward enable” alarm to inform the
Influence Cannot do the core forward action and raise the alarm.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
9-245
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Core Backward Enable

Cause
robot-ROB core backward enable” alarm to inform the
Cannot do the core backward action and raise the

Influence
alarm.

specific alarm.
Reset
controller.
ER: Wait For Robot Eject Enable
When passing the eject middle point after using the

Cause robot eject middle function, the keep eject enable
signal disappears.
Influence The alarm lamp lights and the eject action stops.
Reset Check the electrical circuit of the robot.
Spacing check:
ER: Mold Open Set Position Not Reached
The machine will check if the position of the current

movable platen is within the effective zone of the mold
Cause
open position during eject and will raise the alarm if
not.
Influence The alarm lamp lights. Stop the ejection and cannot do
9-246
tie bar action.
Adjust the parameters related to mold opening to make the

position of the movable platen within the effective zone of
Reset mold opening when mold opening finishes. If necessary,
change the set value of the effective zone with the guidance
of engineering staff.
ER: Eject Set Position Not Reached
The machine will check if the eject reaches the set

Cause position during mold closing and core action and will
raise the alarm if not.
Influence Prohibit mold closing and core forward.
Enter the mold adjust mode and press the eject button.
Reset Check the eject position transducer and the limit switch
of eject end.
ER: Mold Adjust End Reached
The machine will raise the alarm and stop the action if
the mold adjust forward end switch is pressed during
mold adjust forward;
Cause
If the mold adjust backward end switch is pressed
during the mold adjust backward action, the machine
will raise the alarm and stop the action.
Influence Restrict mold adjust forward/backward.
Do the reverse mold adjust action to make the pressed

Reset
switch not move.
ER: Mold Adjust Sensor Failure
9-247
The machine will raise the alarm if the mold adjust

sensor is not correctly sensed in the auto mold adjust
Cause
state and during mold adjust forward or mold adjust
backward.
Press the manual button to eliminate and cannot do

Influence
other actions.
Please check the mold adjust ring gear to see if it gets

stuck with foreign matters, so that the mold adjust
forward and backward cannot be performed normally;
Reset
Please adjust the installation position or the sensing
distance of the mold adjust sensor to make the mold
adjust sensor correctly sensed.
ER: Mold Not Eject Backward
The machine will check constantly if the mold goes

Cause backward to the safe position during mold closing and
will raise the alarm if it does go backward to the end.
Influence Stop closing the mold.
Check if the mold backward end is confirmed.

Reset
ER: Mold Not Backward End
The ejector of the fixed mold does not go backward to

Cause
the end during mold closing.
Influence Stop closing the mold.
Check if the ejector of the fixed mold goes backward to

Reset end.
9-248
ER: Core Status Abnormal
When choosing travel control for the core, both limit

Cause switches of core forward end and core backward end
can be sensed.
Influence The alarm lamp lights and relative actions stop.
Check the status of the core to see if it is at the safe

Reset position.
Check the electrical circuit connection.
ER: Core A Forward Set Position Not Reached
The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the

safe position (forward end or backward end) during
ejector or mold opening/closing. If it finds that the core
Cause
is not at the safe position, it will raise the alarm: Core X
Forward Set Position Not Reached or Core X
Backward Set Position Not Reached;
The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing

Influence
and ejector.
Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding

group of cores to reach the safe position according to
the alarm. Notice: If 2 or more groups of cores are
selected to use, these cores will be interlocked in the
manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
safety position while moving and Core B will also check
Core A’s safety position while moving, so it will be hard
Reset for the cores to reach the safe position. Enter the rough
mold adjust state while ensuring safety and the
program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to
make the cores back to the safe position through the
manual operation button. Remember: Operation of all
cores must be done on the premise of ensuring mold
safety.
9-249
ER: Core B Forward Set Position Not Reached

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

safety.
ER: Core C Forward Set Position Not Reached

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

Reset the alarm. Notice: If 2 or more groups of cores are
9-250
for the cores to reach the safe position. Enter the rough
safety.
ER: Core D Forward Set Position Not Reached

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

safety.
ER: Core E Forward Set Position Not Reached
9-251

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

safety.
ER: Core F Forward Set Position Not Reached

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

Reset selected to use, these cores will be interlocked in the
9-252
safety.
ER: Core A Backward Set Position Not Reached

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

safety.
ER: Core B Backward Set Position Not Reached

Cause safe position (forward end or backward end) during
9-253

Influence
and ejector.

safety.
ER: Core C Backward Set Position Not Reached

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

Reset safety position while moving and Core B will also check
9-254
safety.
ER: Core D Backward Set Position Not Reached

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

safety.
ER: Core E Backward Set Position Not Reached

Cause
9-255

Influence
and ejector.

safety.
ER: Core F Backward Set Position Not Reached

Cause

Influence
and ejector.

safety.
9-256
Oil level check:
ER: Lubrication Oil Level Deviation
The lubrication oil level is lower than the lower limit.

Cause This function is currently used for thin oil lubricated
machines.
The alarm lamp lights and the current group lubrication

Influence
stops.
Check the lubrication oil level. If it is below the lower

Reset limit, add the lubrication oil. If the oil level is normal,
check the relative electrical circuit.
ER: Group 2 Lubrication Oil Level Deviation
The group 2 lubrication oil level is lower than the lower

Cause
limit.
Influence The alarm lamp lights and the current lubrication stops.
If the oil level is normal, check the relative electrical

Reset
circuit.
ER: Lubrication Detection Failure
If the program does not detect the feedback signal of

the lubrication pressure relay during lubrication and
Cause
lubrication alarm timing, the machine will raise the
alarm after the lubrication alarm timing.
Influence Restrict mold closing and stop the current action.
The lubrication oil is not enough, so please add

Reset
lubrication oil;
9-257
The lubrication pressure relay or the lubrication
pipeline breaks down, so the program cannot receive
the feedback signal. Please check the lubrication
circuit;
The lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit
becomes abnormal, so the program cannot receive the
feedback signal. Please check the lubrication detection
electrical hardware circuit.
ER: Group 2 Lubrication Detection Failure

the group 2 lubrication pressure relay during group 2
Cause
lubrication and lubrication alarm timing, the machine
will raise the alarm after the lubrication alarm timing.

lubrication oil;
Reset
circuit;
ER: Group 3 Lubrication Detection Failure

the group 2 lubrication pressure relay during group 3
Cause
Reset The lubrication oil is not enough, so please add
9-258
lubrication oil;
circuit;
ER: Mold Adjust Lubrication Failure

the lubrication pressure relay during mold adjust
Cause
Influence Warn of mold adjust lubrication failure.

lubrication oil;
Reset
circuit;
ER: Oil Amount Detection Failure
Cause The oil pressure and oil level is below the lower limit.
The alarm lamp lights. Restrict any action, stop the

Influence motor after the abnormal signal lasts for 10 seconds,
and do not switch the operation mode.
9-259
Check the oil level in the oil tank. If it is below the lower
limit, add the hydraulic oil. If it is at a normal level,
Reset check the relative electrical circuit.
The alarm will disappear if the signal returns to normal.
ER: Filter Screen Check Failure
Cause The hydraulic oil filter screen is clogged up.
Influence Restrict any action.
Please clean the hydraulic oil filter screen. If there is

Reset nothing wrong with the filter screen, check the
electrical hardware circuit related to it.
ER: Oil Filter Screen#0Check Failure
Cause The hydraulic oil filter screen is clogged up.
Influence Inform of oil filter screen#0 check failure.
Please clean the hydraulic oil filter screen. If there is

nothing wrong with the filter screen, check the
Reset electrical hardware circuit related to it.
It can be reset if there is any signal.
ER: High-pressure Filter Screen Abnormal
The high-pressure filter screen has no signal during

Cause
injection and is clogged up.
Influence Warn that the high-pressure filter screen is abnormal.
Reset Please clean the hydraulic oil filter screen. If there is
9-260
nothing wrong with the filter screen, check the
electrical hardware circuit related to it.
Power:
ER: Servo Controller Abnormal
The servo controller becomes abnormal after the motor

Cause
starts.
Influence Check when the motor is on and prohibit all actions.
Check the servo driver and the fault code, and solve
Reset
the problem.
ER: Motor Overloaded
Cause The motor overloaded input point has an input signal.
Do not turn on the motor during cycle check. If the

Influence
motor is on, turn off the motor.
Check the servo driver and the motor.

Reset
ER：Motor Start Failure
The motor start done input point has no signal during

Cause
start-up of the motor.
Influence The motor cannot be turned on.
Reset Check the servo driver and the motor.
9-261
ER：Motor Closed
The motor start done input point has no signal when

Cause
the motor is on.
Influence Turn off the motor.
Check the servo driver and the motor.

Reset
ER: Driver Temperature Abnormal
The temperature of the driver exceeds the set upper

Cause
limit after the motor starts.
Influence Check when the motor is on and prohibit all actions.
Check the servo driver to see if the temperature of the

Reset
driver is normal.
ER: Electric Heating Motor Not Start
The machine will raise the alarm and prohibit entering

Cause the auto state if the electric heating motor does not
start when entering the auto state.
Influence Cannot enter the auto mode.
Turn on electric heating and the motor in the manual

Reset
state.
9-262
Others:
ER: Entering Auto Prohibited
The entering auto prohibited input point has no signal

Cause
when entering the auto state.
Inform that entering the auto state is prohibited and

Influence
switch back to the manual state.
Reset Check the relative electrical circuit and hardware.
ER: Pilot Oil Accumulator Failure
1 Check the pressure of the pilot oil accumulator

constantly in the state of semi-auto, full-auto, auto
mold adjust or auto purge, and the pilot oil pressure
detection point signal will be off after it continues for 2
seconds.
2 Check the pressure when shifting the manual mode
Cause
to the semi-auto, full-auto, auto mold adjust or auto
purge, and the pilot oil pressure detection point signal
will be off.
3 Press the keys of other actions except the motor
switch, electric heating switch and the lubrication key,
the energy accumulation time exceeds 6 seconds.
Warn of “pilot oil accumulator failure” and do not allow

Influence
shifting the operation mode.
Check the accumulator and the relative electrical

Reset
circuit.
ER: Cavity Pressure Abnormal
9-263
The detected value of the cavity pressure sensor

Cause
during injection exceeds the set cavity safety pressure.
Influence Warn of “cavity pressure abnormal” and stop injection.
Check the cavity pressure sensor and the relative

Reset
electrical circuit.
ER: Input Mold Adjust Tonnage 1
If there is a clamping pressure sensor, the machine will

Cause prompt you to input mold adjust tonnage 1 before
correction of the clamping pressure sensor.
Influence Inform of inputting mold adjust tonnage 1.
Input the currently actual mold closing tonnage

(generally, 50% of the maximum mold closing tonnage
Reset
of the machine), press the OK button and then the
program will continue to start auto mold adjust.
ER: Input Mold Adjust Tonnage 2
If there is a clamping pressure sensor, the machine will

Cause prompt you to input mold adjust tonnage 2 before
correction of the clamping pressure sensor.
Influence Inform of inputting mold adjust tonnage 2.
Input the currently actual mold closing tonnage

Reset (generally, the maximum mold closing tonnage of the
machine), press the OK button and finish correction.
ER: Core Valve Pressure Release End, Press Manual

Button To Stop Pressure Release
9-264
Press the auto mode button or other manual action

buttons except the motor on button, the electric heating
Cause on/off button, emergency stop button, automatic door
on/off button (including the front door and the rear
door).
Influence Prohibit any action.
Press the manual button to stop pressure release and

Reset
do the subsequent actions.
ER: Fluid Injection Emergency Stop
The fluid injection emergency stop does not detect any

Cause
input signal.
The auto state will switch to the manual state and

Influence
prohibit any action.
Check the injection unit and the relative electrical

Reset
circuit.
ER: Fluid Injection Abnormal
In the auto state, the machine will check if there is an

input impulse signal for 30 seconds when the mold
opening/closing starts and will warn of fluid injection
abnormal if there is no such signal. In the manual state,
Cause
the machine will check if there is an input impulse
signal as soon as the mold opening/closing starts and
will warn of fluid injection abnormal if there is no such
signal
Influence Prohibit mold opening and closing.
Reset Check the relative electrical circuit.
9-265
ER: Clamping Force Deviation
The machine is equipped with the clamping force

sensor. The machine will raise the alarm if the actual
Cause clamping force detected by the clamping force sensor
after high-pressure mold clamping is beyond the
enabled range of clamping force set on the screen.
The alarm lamp lights and needs to be disabled

Influence
manually.
Readjust the clamping force, automatically or

Reset
manually.
ER: Hopper Sensor Detection Failure
Open the mold to the end in the full-auto state of

sensor. The machine will raise the alarm if the hopper
Cause
detection sensor does not find any product dropping
within 6 seconds after eject.
The alarm lamp lights and stop the action after

Influence
finishing this mold.
First check if there are products dropping. If there are,

Reset adjust the position of the hopper sensor and check the
hopper sensor circuit.
ER: Poor Position Settings
The input part of the controller hardware A/D becomes

Cause
abnormal.
Influence The alarm lamp lights and any action is restricted.
Reset Check the input part of the controller hardware A/D.
9-266
ER: Poor Position Detection
The corresponding channel of the position transducer

Cause
has no input signal..
Influence The alarm lamp lights and any action is restricted.
Reset Check the input part of the controller hardware A/D.
ER: Complete Auto Mold Adjust
The prompt will appear when the auto mold adjust is

Cause
completed.
Influence The alarm lamp lights.
Press the manual button to make the prompt

Reset
disappear.
ER: Cooling Source Pressure Too Low
Cause The cooling water level is too low.
Inform that the pressure of the cooling source is too

Influence
low.
Check the cooling water level.

Reset
ER: External Storage Device Not Ready
When the panel communicates with the external

Cause storage device, the external storage device is not
connected.
9-267
Influence Inform that the external storage device is not ready.
Check the external storage device and ensure normal

Reset use of the external storage device.
Check the interface.
9-268

Imm 480 Haitian

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Imm 480 Haitian

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MA4800Ⅲ/h

INJECTION MOULDING MACHINE

HAITIAN PLASTICS MACHINERY GROUP

Serial number: MA4800Ⅲ/h -SMS

DESIGNED CHECKED APPROVAL

HAITIAN PLASTICS MACHINERY GROUP

We take customers' demands seriously. If you have any question for

General notes on the operating manual

Note: --pay special attention

Attention: --safety information

Machines in series of MA are in accordance with the standard available for

Customer can only use designated parts by Haitian, especially nozzle,

Places labeled with marks can only be allowed to enter.

Reprinting and duplication, including extracts, requires ours authorization. The

Chapter 2 Safety……… ……………………………………………………..2-1

Chapter4 Maintenance ......................................................................... 4-1

Chapter6 Mechanism ......................................................................... 6-1

Chapter7 Hydraulic............................................................................. 7-1

Chapter8 Electric Unit ........................................................................ 8-1

Chapter9 Controller operation ......................................................... 9-1

1.1.2 Middle-type machine lifting(combined frame)

Frame of middle-type machine connecting indication

1.1.2.1 Procedure of disconnecting and connecting the machine frame.

1.1.2.3 Middle-type machine suspension—injection unit

1.1.5 Removal of protective

1.2 Environment Requirements for Installation

1.3 Machine outline and foundation plan

1.4 Installation and Alignment

Mold orientation hole diameter Ф80~100 Ф125~250 aboveФ315

3) Adjusting landscape and vertical level of machine body

1.4.2.2 Machine alignment

1.4.2.2.1 Aligning the guide level of mini-type machine.

Middle and large type machine foundation plan

1.5 Cooling Water Supply System

1.5.2 Discharge of Cooling Water

1.5.3 Flow Rate of Cooling Water

1.6 Filling with Hydraulic Oil

1.7 Power Supply

Motor Power Conductor Size (Section Area)

1.7.1 Check Rotating Direction of Pump Motor

Oil pump motor switch

1.8 Adjustable mounts

(For large or middle-type machine)

Adjusting Adjustable mounts (mini-type machine)

2.1 General safety regulations

If necessary, enlist the help of our service department.

To remove, modify any safety related equipment is therefore not

The safety equipment also includes the safety program contained in

Actuate emergency stop button;

The person in charge must be informed at once.

If someone’s behavior is dangerous, whom must be warned.

Before machine operation, it must be confirmed that there is nobody in dangerous

2.1.1 Machine main safety scutcheon

Scutcheon Sample Installation position

On the guide rail of

Scutcheon Sample Installation position

On the guide rail of

Beside the air switch of the

Scutcheon Sample Installation position

Non stamp positions-for

Beside the air switch of

Scutcheon Sample Installation position

On electrical cabinet cover,